ECDIS User Guide

© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

Part Number: 65900012
ECDIS User Guide
Part Number: 65900012-2

Publication Revision: C
Software Version: 3.0.x

Before using the equipment, please read this manual.

© 2008 Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

This publication and the information contained herein is and remains the intellectual
property of Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. Northrop Grumman Sperry
Marine B.V. provide a limited licence for the user to reproduce this material for their
own internal purpose and use, but not for distribution to third parties. Reproduction
of this material for resale or commercial gain is expressly prohibited. Northrop
Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. are not responsible for any loss or damage of any
nature or kind whatsoever that may arise from either the use of this publication or its
reproduction.

© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

ECDIS User Guide

Intentionally Blank

65900012 ii
ECDIS User Guide Warnings and Cautions

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The features, functionality and capability which are described in this
manual are not necessarily present in all versions or configurations of the
VisionMaster FT system.

WARNING: Lethal Voltage Hazard

When access covers are removed, lethal voltages may be

exposed. Some capacitors used in the equipment take several
minutes to discharge their stored voltages after switch OFF;
this is a lethal voltage hazard. Always set the supply switch-
fuse to OFF and remove the fuses, before removing the access
covers of the equipment.

WARNING: Health Hazard

When cleaning the inside of the equipment, take care not to

inhale dust. The dust is a temporary health hazard, depending
on individual allergies.

WARNING: Radiation Hazard

Keep outside the hazard zone around an antenna or open

waveguide radiating power. Refer to the table below for hazard
zones. When it is necessary to work on the Scanner Unit, make
sure that radar is switched OFF, and that both the Mains Isolator
and the Scanner Control Unit are turned to the OFF position.
Never look directly into an open waveguide.
Radar and other forms of RF radiation can cause Cardiac
Pacemakers to malfunction. If you use a Cardiac Pacemaker and
suspect a malfunction, leave the vicinity of the radar system
immediately and seek medical advice.
Most countries accept that there is no significant radiation
hazard at RF power density levels of up to 10mW/cm2.

65900012 iii
Warnings and Cautions ECDIS User Guide

Hazard Zones
Antenna Length 10 mW/cm2 1 mW/cm2

1.2 m X-Band 1.7 m 17 m

1.8 m X-Band 1.05 m 10.5 m
2.4 m X Band 0.75 m 7.5 m
2.7 m S-Band 0.73 m 7.3 m
3.7 m S-Band 0.55 m 5.5 m

CAUTION: Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs)

This equipment contains ESSDs. Take care not to damage these

devices by discharge of electrostatic voltages.

iv 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Preface

PREFACE
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The structure of this manual and the design of the pages can help you to
find the information that you need. Consistent presentation techniques are
used throughout the manual, to make it easy to use.

Depending on the composition and configuration of your

installation, not all of the facilities presented in this User Guide may
be applicable to your system.

This manual is intended to be used by the VisionMaster FT operator and is

divided into the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 - Overview
Chapter 2 - Getting Started with ECDIS
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation of ECDIS
Chapter 4 - Charts
Chapter 5 - Navigation Tools
Chapter 6 - Routes
Chapter 7 - Alarms
Chapter 8 - Brilliance
Chapter 9 - Sensor Management
Chapter 10 - Targets
Chapter 11 - Electronic Range and Bearing Lines
Chapter 12 - Radar
Chapter 13 - Autopilot Interface
Chapter 14 - Conning Information Display
Chapter 15 - System

Appendix A - Chart Datum Codes

Appendix B - Glossary

NOTICE
Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. has a policy of continuous development.
This may lead to the equipment described in this manual being at variance with
equipment manufactured after its publication.

65900012 v
Preface ECDIS User Guide

Intentionally Blank

vi 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table of Contents

Table of Contents
PREFACE

Chapter 1 Overview
Hardware Configurations ...........................................................................1-1
Single System ............................................................................................1-2
Interswitched System.................................................................................1-4
Multi-Node System.....................................................................................1-6
Product Types............................................................................................1-7
Applicable Features ..............................................................................1-7
Common Features .....................................................................................1-8
Chart Radar/ECDIS Features ..................................................................1-11
ECDIS Specific Features .........................................................................1-12
ECDIS Radar Interface ............................................................................1-13
Total Watch..............................................................................................1-14
Information on Sensor Inputs to the System ...........................................1-15
Compass Input....................................................................................1-15
Log Input .............................................................................................1-15
Position Input ......................................................................................1-15

Chapter 2 Getting Started with ECDIS

System Controls.........................................................................................2-2
Control Panel ........................................................................................2-2
Monitor Controls ...................................................................................2-4
Power On/Off ........................................................................................2-4
System Start-Up.........................................................................................2-5
Switching on the System ......................................................................2-5
Starting up the System at a Low Temperature .....................................2-6
Software Start-Up .................................................................................2-7
Setup Procedures .................................................................................2-8
System Security .........................................................................................2-9
ECDIS Screen Layout..............................................................................2-10
Main Menu and Sub Menu Area.........................................................2-11
Upper and Lower Toolbar Areas ........................................................2-11

65900012 vii
Table Of Contents ECDIS User Guide

Chart Display............................................................................................2-12
Accessing System Functions ...................................................................2-13
Accessing System Functions ...................................................................2-13
Upper Toolbar Functions ....................................................................2-13
Lower Toolbar Functions ....................................................................2-14
Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions .................................................2-15
Accessing Context Window from the Display .....................................2-15
Controlling Popup Windows.....................................................................2-16
Show/Hide Windows ...........................................................................2-16
Using the Cursor ......................................................................................2-17
Cursor Graphics..................................................................................2-17
Standby and Transmit Mode....................................................................2-19
Standby Mode.....................................................................................2-19
Transmit Mode ....................................................................................2-20
Online Help ..............................................................................................2-20
Accessing Context Sensitive Help ......................................................2-20
Accessing the Help Guide ..................................................................2-21
On-Screen Keyboard ..........................................................................2-22
Accessing Tool Tips .................................................................................2-22
Operator Messages .................................................................................2-23
Action Required Messages .................................................................2-23
Operator Messages ............................................................................2-23
System Shut Down ..................................................................................2-24

Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

Selecting Transmit Mode ...........................................................................3-2
Returning to Standby Mode ..................................................................3-3
Heading Line, Beam Line and Stern Line ..................................................3-4
Beam Line.............................................................................................3-5
Own Ship Symbols.....................................................................................3-6
Own Ship Vector ...................................................................................3-7
Predicted Vector ...................................................................................3-8
Cursor Readout..........................................................................................3-9
Position ....................................................................................................3-10
Alarm Status Indicator..............................................................................3-13
Sensor Data Display ................................................................................3-14

viii 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table Of Contents

Stabilisation Options ...........................................................................3-15

Multi-node System ..............................................................................3-15
Presentation Modes .................................................................................3-16
Presentation Mode dictated by Raster Charts....................................3-17
Motion Modes ..........................................................................................3-18
True Motion.........................................................................................3-19
Vector Modes...........................................................................................3-20
Selecting the Vector Mode..................................................................3-20
Vector Time ........................................................................................3-22
Radar Video Mode ...................................................................................3-23
Switching the Video On ......................................................................3-23
Setting Video Transparency Levels....................................................3-23
Video Settings.....................................................................................3-24
Scale Ratio...............................................................................................3-25
Automatic Scale..................................................................................3-25
Manual Scale ......................................................................................3-26
Zoom Window.....................................................................................3-26
Chart Database & Chart Sub Menu Selection .........................................3-28
Target Display Button ..............................................................................3-30
AIS Display Button ...................................................................................3-31
Access to Own Ship AIS.....................................................................3-31
Messages.................................................................................................3-32
ECDIS Presentation Options ...................................................................3-33
Picture in Picture Mode.......................................................................3-34
Split Screen Mode ..............................................................................3-34
Functions Available in Secondary Chart Windows .............................3-35
Off Centre, Pan and Goto ........................................................................3-36
Off Centring Own Ship........................................................................3-36
Panning...............................................................................................3-37
Goto ....................................................................................................3-37
Centre & Maximum View Options............................................................3-40
Centring ..............................................................................................3-40
Maximum View ...................................................................................3-40
True Motion Limits ...................................................................................3-41
Displaying the TM Limits.....................................................................3-41
Setting the TM Limits ..........................................................................3-41

65900012 ix
Table Of Contents ECDIS User Guide

Automatic resizing of the TM Limits box .............................................3-43

Current Date and Time ............................................................................3-43
Range Rings ............................................................................................3-44
Brilliance Control ......................................................................................3-45
Zoom Window ..........................................................................................3-46
Scale Bar..................................................................................................3-47
Synthetics Button .....................................................................................3-47
Watch Mode .............................................................................................3-48
Total Watch Features .........................................................................3-48
Safety Checking .......................................................................................3-49
Multi-node Support..............................................................................3-51

Chapter 4 Charts
Accessing Charts Menus ...........................................................................4-2
About Charts ..............................................................................................4-3
Chart Types ..........................................................................................4-3
Chart Rendering....................................................................................4-3
Factors affecting Chart Accuracy..........................................................4-3
Chart Overscale ....................................................................................4-5
Chart One Presentation Library ............................................................4-6
Using Raster Charts...................................................................................4-6
Description ............................................................................................4-6
Selecting Raster Charts ........................................................................4-7
Tools ..........................................................................................................4-9
Tool Functions .........................................................................................4-10
Chart Match ........................................................................................4-10
Chart Updates Summary ....................................................................4-11
Chart Permissions...............................................................................4-13
Chart Index .........................................................................................4-17
Settings ....................................................................................................4-19
Feature Set .........................................................................................4-19
Setting Custom Chart Features ..........................................................4-21
Chart Depths/Heights...............................................................................4-23
Safety Depth and Height.....................................................................4-23
Shallow and Deep Contours ...............................................................4-24
Changing Chart Depth/Height Values.................................................4-24

x 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table Of Contents

Databases................................................................................................4-25
Enabling and Disabling Databases.....................................................4-25
Enabling Auto Scale Preferences.......................................................4-26
Supported Chart Engines and Chart Databases ................................4-26
Official and Unofficial Chart Data .......................................................4-27
Legend .....................................................................................................4-28
Legend Select.....................................................................................4-28
Legend Detail......................................................................................4-28
Legend Updates .................................................................................4-31
Notes...................................................................................................4-31
Manual Chart Update...............................................................................4-32
Multi-node Support .............................................................................4-32
Manual Chart Update Functions ..............................................................4-33
Chart Layers .......................................................................................4-33
Edit Chart Update ...............................................................................4-34
Create and Modify Chart Updates ......................................................4-34
Display Chart Updates........................................................................4-40
Importing or Exporting Chart Updates ................................................4-41
Archived ..............................................................................................4-43
Chart Query .............................................................................................4-44
Query Features ........................................................................................4-45
Query Results .....................................................................................4-45
Query Options.....................................................................................4-47
Dangers ...................................................................................................4-48
Dangers Information ...........................................................................4-49
Changing the Danger Settings ...........................................................4-50
Chart 1 .....................................................................................................4-51
Chart 1 Catalog...................................................................................4-51
Color Diagram.....................................................................................4-52

Chapter 5 Navigation Tools

Navigation Marks .......................................................................................5-2
Parallel Index Lines....................................................................................5-4
Selecting PI Lines .................................................................................5-4
Importing and Exporting PI Lines .........................................................5-9
Multi-node Support ...............................................................................5-9
History Tracks ..........................................................................................5-10

65900012 xi
Table Of Contents ECDIS User Guide

Primary History Track .........................................................................5-10

Secondary History Tracks...................................................................5-11
Event Marks ........................................................................................5-12
Trial Manoeuvre .......................................................................................5-13
Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters ..............................................5-13
Delay Countdown................................................................................5-14
Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre ..........................................................5-14
Display of Vectors ...............................................................................5-15
Trial Manoeuvre Vector ......................................................................5-16
Trial CPA and TCPA ...........................................................................5-16
Parallel Cursor .........................................................................................5-17
Display Settings Features ........................................................................5-19
Display Settings ..................................................................................5-19
Ownship ..............................................................................................5-19
Next Turn EBL ....................................................................................5-23
Grid .....................................................................................................5-24

Chapter 6 Routes
Routes........................................................................................................6-2
Multi-node Support................................................................................6-3
Creating a Route ........................................................................................6-4
Adding a Waypoint................................................................................6-4
Changing a Waypoint's Position ...........................................................6-6
Delete a Waypoint.................................................................................6-7
Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius ....................................................6-7
Editing a Route ..........................................................................................6-8
Edit Route .............................................................................................6-8
Route Tab Folder ..................................................................................6-9
Waypoints Tab Folder.........................................................................6-13
Critical Points ......................................................................................6-17
Dangers ..............................................................................................6-20
Editor Table.........................................................................................6-22
Monitoring a Route...................................................................................6-25
Monitor Route .....................................................................................6-25
Route ..................................................................................................6-26
Dangers ..............................................................................................6-31
Critical Points ......................................................................................6-32
ETA Calculator .........................................................................................6-33

xii 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table Of Contents

Temporary Routes ...................................................................................6-35

Creating and Editing a Temporary Route ...........................................6-35
Monitoring a Temporary Route ...........................................................6-36
Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route ....................6-37
Route Status ............................................................................................6-38
External Routes .......................................................................................6-39
Multi-node Support .............................................................................6-40
Importing and Exporting a Route .............................................................6-41
Importing Routes ................................................................................6-41
Exporting Routes ................................................................................6-42
Route Display Settings ............................................................................6-43

Chapter 7 Alarms
Alarm Status ..............................................................................................7-2
Alarm Display.............................................................................................7-3
Viewing Announcement Details ............................................................7-4
Hide Acknowledged ..............................................................................7-4
Sort by Group .......................................................................................7-4
Alarm Buzzer .............................................................................................7-5
Alarms on a Multi-node System.................................................................7-6
Prompts......................................................................................................7-7
Permanent prompts ..............................................................................7-7
Temporary Prompts ..............................................................................7-7
Picture Freeze............................................................................................7-8
List of Alarms and Warnings......................................................................7-9

Chapter 8 Brilliance
Brilliance Menu ..........................................................................................8-1
Day and Night Modes ................................................................................8-2
Multi-node Settings ...............................................................................8-2
Brilliance Groups........................................................................................8-3
SENC .........................................................................................................8-4
Brightness Check.......................................................................................8-5

65900012 xiii
Table Of Contents ECDIS User Guide

Chapter 9 Sensor Management

Sensors Menu ............................................................................................9-1
Sensor Data Source..............................................................................9-2
Sensor Data Sources.................................................................................9-4
Heading Source Values ........................................................................9-4
STW Source Values..............................................................................9-5
COG Source Values .............................................................................9-6
SOG Source Values..............................................................................9-7
Position Values .....................................................................................9-8
Depth Source Values ..........................................................................9-11
Set and Drift Values ............................................................................9-11
Rate of Turn Values ............................................................................9-13
Date and Time ....................................................................................9-13
Wind Values........................................................................................9-13

Chapter 10 Targets
Tracking Targets ......................................................................................10-2
Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System .........................................10-3
Tracked Targets Capacity...................................................................10-4
Cancelling Targets on a Multi-node System .......................................10-5
AIS Targets ..............................................................................................10-6
AIS Rendering Conditions ..................................................................10-6
Target Display Capacity......................................................................10-6
AIS Target States................................................................................10-6
Target Alarm States ............................................................................10-9
Multi-node Support for AIS Targets ..................................................10-10
Target Monitoring ...................................................................................10-11
Lost Target........................................................................................10-11
CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions.........................10-11
Target Monitoring Symbols ...............................................................10-12
Multi-Node Support ...........................................................................10-12
Echo Reference Target..........................................................................10-13
Selected Target Functions .....................................................................10-16
Selected Target.................................................................................10-16
Target Data .......................................................................................10-17
AIS Info .............................................................................................10-19
Multiple Targets .....................................................................................10-20

xiv 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table Of Contents

Automatic Sorting of Targets ............................................................10-21

Selecting Targets for the User Folder...............................................10-21
Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets ......................................10-21
Target Display........................................................................................10-22
Target Display...................................................................................10-22
Identification......................................................................................10-23
Past Position Dots..................................................................................10-25
Other Target Display Functions .............................................................10-26
Automatic Dropping of Targets .........................................................10-26
Vector Timeout .................................................................................10-26
Cancelling Tracked Targets...................................................................10-27
Test Targets...........................................................................................10-28
Fixed Test Targets............................................................................10-28
Moveable Test Targets .....................................................................10-29
Using Test Targets ...........................................................................10-30
Acquisition Zones...................................................................................10-31
Editing Zones ....................................................................................10-32
AIS Display ............................................................................................10-34
AIS Input ...........................................................................................10-34
Filter Settings ....................................................................................10-34
Other .................................................................................................10-35
Own Ship AIS.........................................................................................10-36
Own Ship ..........................................................................................10-36
Messages .........................................................................................10-37
Limits and Settings.................................................................................10-38
Target Association ............................................................................10-38

Chapter 11 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Off-Centring, Carrying and Dropping an ERBL .......................................11-2
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)..................................................................11-3
Changing the EBL Bearing .................................................................11-4
Changing the EBL Position.................................................................11-5
Variable Range Marker (VRM) ................................................................11-7
Changing the VRM and EBL range ....................................................11-7
Changing the VRM and EBL position .................................................11-9

65900012 xv
Table Of Contents ECDIS User Guide

Chapter 12 Radar
Radar Settings .........................................................................................12-2
Transceiver .........................................................................................12-2
Video ...................................................................................................12-5
Interswitch...........................................................................................12-9
Radar Alarms .........................................................................................12-11
Video Settings Alarms ......................................................................12-11
Communications Alarms...................................................................12-11
Transceiver Alarms ...........................................................................12-12
Interswitch Alarms.............................................................................12-13

Chapter 13 Autopilot
Auto Status...............................................................................................13-2
Auto Control Mode ...................................................................................13-3
Control Mode Selection ......................................................................13-3
Autopilot Control Mode Description ....................................................13-4
Autopilot on a Multi-node System .......................................................13-4
Autopilot Heading Control ........................................................................13-5
VisionMaster Heading Control .................................................................13-6
Track Control............................................................................................13-8
Track Control on a Multi-node System ...............................................13-8
Tracking a Monitored Route ...............................................................13-9
Alarms and Indications .....................................................................13-10
Track Control Settings ...........................................................................13-12
Track Control Data............................................................................13-12
Limits & Settings ...............................................................................13-13
Turn To Next Leg ..............................................................................13-14
Temp Route Monitoring on a Multi-node System ..................................13-15
Simultaneous Temp Route Editing on Multi-nodes ..........................13-15

Chapter 14 Conning Information Display

Track Control............................................................................................14-2
Track Control Status Window .............................................................14-2
Docking Display .......................................................................................14-4

xvi 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Table Of Contents

Chapter 15 System
User Profiles ............................................................................................15-2
Multi-Node Functionality .....................................................................15-2
Create New Profile..............................................................................15-3
Available Profiles ................................................................................15-6
Options.....................................................................................................15-7
Diagnostic Functions ...............................................................................15-8
Diagnostics .........................................................................................15-8
Performance Monitor ..........................................................................15-9
Report ...............................................................................................15-11
DataLog ............................................................................................15-12
Sensor Status ...................................................................................15-15
Buzzer...............................................................................................15-16
Commissioning ......................................................................................15-17
Time Management .................................................................................15-18
Local Offset.......................................................................................15-19
Shutdown ...............................................................................................15-20

Appendix A Chart Datum Codes

Appendix B Glossary

65900012 xvii
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Chapter 1 Overview
Hardware Configurations
The VisionMaster FT system can be one of the following hardware
configurations:
A single node system comprising one console, connected to a
transceiver and scanner assembly (antenna and turning unit), see
Single System.
An interswitched system, with each console connected via an
Interswitch to separate transceivers and scanner assemblies, see
Interswitched System.
A multi-node system, where consoles, configured to specific
product types, are connected via a LAN, see Multi-Node System.
Navigation sensors provide data inputs to the console. Radar video and
other radar/chart radar functionality is displayed on the console monitor.
Traditional bridge equipment and most navigation sensors can be
interfaced to the system, and optional remote monitors can provide
additional slave displays at any required location.

65900012 1-1
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Single System

1-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Scanner Assembly. Comprises an Antenna unit, a Turning unit and an

optional Performance Monitor. If the system includes an integral transceiver
then this also forms part of the Scanner Assembly. If the system uses a
bulkhead transceiver then the transceiver unit is not included in the
Scanner assembly.
Antenna Unit. 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X-band (4,
6 or 8 ft aperture).
Performance Monitor. If fitted, the performance Monitor Antenna is
mounted on the Turning Unit.
Transceiver. Masthead (mounted as an integral part of the Scanner
assembly) or Bulkhead (mounted as a separate unit below decks).
Scanner Control Unit – for switching the scanner on and off – are
supplied for S-band radars only.
Console Assembly. Supplied as a standalone, deck mounted console
(including pedestal) or kit version for installation into an existing console
suite. The console assembly includes the following modules:
Input/Output (PCIO) Unit - receives data inputs from the
transceiver and external sensors; outputs data to the processor unit.
Processor Unit - a single PC running Windows XP operating
system.
Display Unit. includes a 19" or 23" flat panel monitor
Control Panel includes the following:
Trackball with left/right keys
Video gain and anti clutter controls
Range scale adjustment
EBL and VRM adjustment
Brilliance adjustment
Alarm acknowledgement

65900012 1-3
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Interswitched System
The basic, single-scanner/single-console configuration can be expanded by
the introduction of an Interswitch Unit, plus additional scanners and display
configurations. The arrangement below shows two scanners (S band or X
band), two transceivers (A and B) with a two-way interswitch unit
connected to two consoles. A 6-way interswitch unit is available for
systems with a maximum of six scanners and six consoles.
A console can be connected via the interswitch to any one of the scanner
units, and can be selected as the master display, or as a slave display.

1-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

A console selected as a master display has full control of the connected

scanner. The controls available at a master display but NOT at a slave
display are as follows:
switching the transceiver between standby and transmit mode
selection of transmission pulse-length
tuning the transceiver
selecting Manual or AFC mode for tuning
tuning the performance monitor.

65900012 1-5
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Multi-Node System
A multi-node system may include a number of consoles which have been
configured as specific product types, see Watch Mode.
Each console is linked via a LAN so that data input to one console is
available to all. Consoles providing radar video data will be connected via
the interswitch to one or more scanner units, and can be selected as the
master display, or as a slave display.

1-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Product Types
The VisionMaster radar product types include the CAT 1 Radar/Chart
Radar, CAT 2 Radar and enhanced CAT 2 Radar/Chart Radar variants.
For details on these Radar /Chart Radar product types, refer to 6590010,
Radar/Chart Radar User Guide.
In addition to the Radar/Chart Radar variants, the following product types
are available:
ECDIS (with or without radar overlay)
CID
Total Watch
Applicable Features
The features applicable to the configuration listed above are given in the
following tables:
Common Features - lists the features which are applicable to all
configurations.
Chart Radar/ECDIS Features - lists the features which apply to a
Chart Radar or ECDIS configuration.
ECDIS Specific Features - lists the features which only apply to the
ECDIS configuration.

65900012 1-7
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Common Features
The following table lists all the features common to Radar, Chart Radar and
ECDIS product types.
For information on features specific to all the VisionMaster radar product
variants, refer to 6590010, Radar/Chart Radar User Guide.
Feature Additional details
Selection and set up.
Transceiver control
Manual/automatic tuning.
Video gain.
Video processing controls Manual/automatic anti-clutter sea/rain control.
Enhanced video mode.
Picture brilliance (day/night selection).
Brightness check
Display controls
Displaying/hiding heading line and synthetics.
Off-centring (max view) the picture.
Own ship’s position.
Defining and displaying
Waypoint data.
user specified data
Wind and depth data.
Range scale in nautical miles (NM) from 0.125 to
Scale selection 96 (Radar/Chart Radar)
Scale ratio from 1:500 to 1:8,000,000 (ECDIS)

Range rings on or off. Ring interval dependant on

Range Rings
scale.

Compass alignment.
Ship’s heading and speed Selection of speed mode (through water or over
display ground).
Selection of water or ground stabilisation

Selection of sensor source for data type (heading,

Selection of Sensor Source
STW, position etc.)

Selection of presentation North-up or Course-up (all configurations)

mode Head-up (unstabilised – Radar/Chart Radar only).
For Radar/Chart Radar the selection of Relative
Selection of motion mode Motion (RM) or True Motion (TM).
For ECDIS the selection of TM only.

1-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Feature Additional details

Selection of true (T) or relative (R) vectors.
Selection of vector mode
Selection of vector time.

Selection of True or Relative Trails

Selection of following trail modes:
Short trails.
Selection of trails mode
Reset trails.
Long trails.
Permanent trails
Off
Two electronic bearing lines – EBL 1 & EBL 2.
Defining and displaying Two variable range markers – VRM 1 & VRM 2.
EBLs, VRMS & ERBLs Each EBL/VRM pair can be displayed as a
combined ERBL – ERBL 1 and/or ERBL 2.

Position as derived from navigational sensors or

Navigation facilities
an estimated position.

Monitor and display internal, external and

Routes facilities temporary route data.
Import or export route plans

Parallel index lines - Defining line type/position.

Displaying a maximum of 5 index lines per set.
History Tracks - Displaying lines indicating past
Navigation Tools
locations of position sources.
Parallel Cursor - Displays a rotating parallel
cursor, centred on own ship’s CCRP.

Selection of Display Display of own ship display settings, including:

Settings Beam Line, Predicted Vector, Vector Tick marks.

Define data/time and set a time zone offset

System tools
Display information on unit groups

Displaying the current unacknowledged alarm

with highest priority.
Extensive alarm and Facility for acknowledging alarms.
warning indications Display list of alarms and warnings.
Alarm buzzer facility.
Watch alarm facility.

65900012 1-9
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Feature Additional details

Extensive monitoring and
Built in self tests (BIST).
test facilities

Monitor the performance of the system or the

receiver
Generate a report and export the report file.
View Datalog files and export the datalog as a zip
Diagnostic facilities
file.
View the status of the sensor data from the
sensor source.
Test the Alarm buzzer.

Enables user login.

Commissioning facilities Display of TxRx settings, Video and Authorization
information

Alarm and Warning Alarm and Warning announcements are

Announcements displayed in a status indicator

Temporary and Permanent Both Temporary and Permanent prompts are

prompts displayed below alarms.

Online Help Guide.

Help facility
Context sensitive Help.

1-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Chart Radar/ECDIS Features

The following table lists the features which apply to a Chart Radar or
ECDIS configuration.

Feature Additional details

Enables vector charts installed from an installer
facility to be displayed on the display.
Charts facilities
Chart feature sets can be customised and manually
updated by the operator.

Ensures any adjustments made to brightness and

contrast settings will enable SENC data, such as
SENC Colour Diagram
coastlines, safety contour and other objects to be
adequately displayed.

65900012 1-11
ECDIS User Guide Overview

ECDIS Specific Features

The following table lists the features which apply only to an ECDIS
configuration.

Feature Additional details

Display of primary, or primary and secondary
presentation displays (vertical/horizontal split screen or
Display Options
popup window secondary display), see ECDIS
Presentation Options.

Conning Information Enables Conning Information Display (CID) windows

Display to be shown over an ECDIS.

A north arrow pointed true north in the upper left

North Arrow
corner of the chart window, see Presentation Modes.

Scale and latitude bars drawn vertically at the left side

Scale and Latitude
of the chart display, 2 to 4 mm from the border of the
Bars
display, see Scale Ratio.

Enables the setting of the transparency level of radar

Transparency Level
video for the ECDIS task view, see Radar Video Mode.

Hides all windows currently shown on the display, or

Show/Hide Windows
restores all previously opened windows.

In addition to displaying vector charts the ECDIS can

Raster Chart Display
be configured to display ARCS charts.

Enables the operator to zoom into a specific area of

Zoom Window
the chart display.

1-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

ECDIS Radar Interface

The optional radar interface provides access and display of target
information. Radar contacts are automatically processed to provide a single
target list, so that if two VisionMaster nodes have acquired the same target
it will be displayed as one target at the ECDIS. Symbols representing radar
targets are displayed on the electronic chart, see Target Facilities.
In addition to the targets display, the radar interface can optionally provide
a Radar Overlay, which displays radar video on the electronic chart, see
Radar Video Mode. The radar return information from fixed navigation
points can be used to check the accuracy of the displayed chart, matching
chart data to actual location data for objects visible to the radar.

65900012 1-13
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Total Watch
If your VisionMaster FT system is configured as a Total Watch (see
Product Types), the following presentation options may be available from
the Watch Mode button:
Chart Radar
ECDIS
Conning Information Display (CID)
The availability of the presentation options listed above is dependent on the
product type and security device installed at initialisation, see System
Security.
This User Guide describes the ECDIS product type only
For information on the Radar and Chart Radar, refer to the VisionMaster
Radar/Chart Radar User's Guide, 65900010.
For information on the CID, refer to Chapter 7 `Conning Information
Display' in the VisionMaster Ship's Manual, 65900011.

1-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Overview

Information on Sensor Inputs to the System

The VisionMaster Radar system is Type Approved using 19" and 23"
displays with X-Band and S-Band top units. To function correctly the
system requires sensor input from external devices. Any limitations
associated with the method of sensor input are stated below.
Compass Input
The approved method of compass input is via an analogue input, either
through a Synchro or Stepper motor interface. If an analogue input is
unavailable then a serial input may be used with data conforming to IEC
61162-2 at 38400 baud rate and a message update rate of approximately
50Hz. If serial input data at 4800 baud rate, or a lower message update
rate is used then the tracking data will be compromised.
The primary compass data should be used in all circumstances. For
example, re-constituting serial data as analogue data via a converter is
inferior to using the serial data direct.
Log Input
The speed log input used must be compliant to IMO resolution A 824(19).
When a ground speed log is in use, true video trails and target tracking
data will be ground stabilised, using both longitudinal and transverse data if
available from the log. However, a ground speed log may have
inaccuracies in deep waters, depending on the actual depth of the sea.
Additionally, if a single axis log is used it will not take into account
transverse effects due to leeway, tides and currents. The magnitude of
these effects will depend on their strength and direction.
When a water speed log is in use, true video trails and target tracking data
will be water stabilised, using both longitudinal and transverse data if
available from the log.
Position Input
The EFPS connected to the system must be compliant with IMO resolution
MSC.112(73) or MSC.114(73). However, there are areas of the world
where coverage is limited and these areas may cause inaccuracies on the
tracking and positioning data.

65900012 1-15
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Chapter 2 Getting Started with ECDIS

This section shows you how to start up the ECDIS display and how to use
the ECDIS controls. The following topics are covered:
a description of the System Controls
System startup and Security features
typical layout of an ECDIS display and access to System Functions
a description of fixed and movable windows in the ECDIS display
switching between Standby and Transmit mode
using the screen cursor and a list of cursor graphics
how to access the online Help and accessing Tool Tips
a description of system generated Operator Messages
shutting down the system

65900012 2-1
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

System Controls
The operator controls the VisionMaster FT system via a control panel
assembly, monitor controls and a power On/Off switch.

Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of the following group of controls:
Trackball assembly
Rotary controls
Adjustment and Acknowledgement buttons.

2-2 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Trackball Assembly
The trackball assembly comprises a trackball and two associated keys (left
and right). The trackball controls the position of the screen cursor.
Selections are made by positioning the cursor over a menu caption or
control button on the chart display and clicking (press and release) on the
left key. The right key is used to provide additional functionality such as
accessing drop down menus applicable to the function.

Throughout this manual, instructions to ‘left click’ or ‘right click’

relate to a press-and-release of either the left key or right key.

Rotary Controls
The rotary controls include the following:
Turning the EBL control automatically switches on EBL1. Turning the
control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the EBL1
bearing, see Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) in Chapter 11 Electronic
Range and Bearing Lines.
Turning the VRM control automatically switches on VRM1. Turning
the control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the VRM
range, see Variable Range Marker (VRM) in Chapter 11 Electronic
Range and Bearing Lines.
The GAIN control adjusts the video gain setting for the currently
selected anti-clutter mode, see Video in Chapter 12 Radar.
The RAIN control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting, see Video in
Chapter 12 Radar.
The SEA control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting, see Video in
Chapter 12 Radar.
Adjustment and Acknowledgement Buttons
The RANGE buttons increase or decrease the currently selected scale ratio
by one level, see Scale Ratio in Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS.
The BRILL (brilliance) buttons change the day/night modes by one level,
see Day and Night Modes in Chapter 8 Brilliance.
Pressing the ACK ALARM button acknowledges the currently displayed
alarm announcement, see Alarm Status Indicator in Chapter 3 Basic
Operation of ECDIS.

65900012 2-3
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Monitor Controls
The monitor controls include an On/Off button and a brightness adjustment
button.
The On/Off button controls the monitor only; it does NOT control the radar
system.

WARNING!

The use of the monitor brightness control may inhibit

visibility at night.

Power On/Off
The ECDIS system is switched on and off via the Power On/Off switch
located on the underside of the control panel, see System Start-Up.

2-4 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

System Start-Up
Switching on the System
The VisionMaster workstation is designed such that one switch at the
workstation typically applies power to that workstation’s computer and
monitor.
In a multi-node system, as the system is started, the software automatically
establishes communication with other workstations that may already be
running.
To start up the system press the On/Off rocker switch, located on the
underside of the control panel. When this switch is turned On the system
powers up.

The On/Off switch is the only system control accessible to the

operator. Do NOT remove the front panel.

CAUTION:

When starting up the system always leave at least one

minute after the system has powered down before
switching the On/Off switch to On.

65900012 2-5
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Starting up the System at a Low Temperature

When the system is switched on, the Processor unit measures the
temperature of its hard disk drive to determine if it is ready for operation. If
the temperature is acceptable the system powers up.
If the temperature is too low the power up sequence is delayed while the
hard disk drive is heated to an acceptable temperature (as defined in the
table below).

CAUTION:

The warm up sequence of the hard disk drive may take up

to 30 minutes. The status of the hard disk is indicated on
the upper LED at the front of the Processor unit and is
detailed in the table below. The lower LED indicates hard
disk activity

To view the Processor status, open the flap on the front housing cover. The
LEDs can be viewed by looking towards the left side of the Processor.

Processor Unit System Indicators

Upper LED
Indication Description

Off Power is removed from the system

Power up sequence is delayed while the hard disk drive (HHD)
is heated.
Red Flashing 1.25Hz: HDD temperature is below - 5º C
2.5Hz: HDD temperature is between - 5ºC and + 5º C
5Hz: HDD temperature is below + 5º C
The system is monitored for 10 seconds to ensure valid power
Green
up. If the motherboard shuts down as a consequence of BIOS
Flashing
`Last State' settings the system will be forced to reboot.
Green The system is powered up
Red The system is in Standby mode

2-6 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Software Start-Up
Each VisionMaster workstation is equipped with a device called a Security
Block (sometimes called a `dongle') which is attached to a USB port on the
PC. On start-up, the system compares permit codes and the product type
identifier (e.g. `ECDIS with Radar Overlay' or Chart Radar) stored in the
dongle to the corresponding data in the system configuration file. If the
data does not match, the system will not be authorized and will run in a
degraded state. For further information, see System Security.
In a multi-node system the dongle will also contain security data which
defines the number of nodes in the system of each product type (e.g. two
Radars and one ECDIS).
Starting up the software takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes. Soon after the
system is powered up the VisionMaster FT Start Up window appears on the
screen, this window shows the current system software version number,
copyright information and a status bar displaying the system loading status.

After system initialisation has completed the start up window is replaced by

the ECDIS display. By default the system opens with the chart display in
centre mode with ownship symbol shown in the centre of the chart. On start
up the system is always in Standby mode.

65900012 2-7
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Setup Procedures
After the VisionMaster software has loaded, some setup procedures may
be necessary. To verify proper setup, make the following checks:
On the sensor data display at the top left of the upper toolbar area,
the indicators for HDG (Heading), COG (Course Over Ground),
SOG (Speed Over Ground), and STW (Speed Through Water)
should all be green. Red data indicates a loss of valid data from the
selected source. The sensor data display indicates the current
stabilisation mode: water stabilised or ground stabilised, with the
HDG/STW field block highlighted in water stabilisation and the
COG/SOG field block highlighted in ground stabilisation. Own
ship's Lat/Lon position, displayed in the left corner of the lower
popup toolbar, should also be green, see Position.
The currently active sensor sources for navigation data are
indicated to the right of the displayed sensor data. Verify that the
desired sensor devices are selected; if not, select alternate data
sources. For information on sensor source selection, see Chapter 9
Sensor Management. On the chart display, the colour of the
Ownship circle symbol or outline is red if the software determines
that the data sources data sources for Position are not providing
valid data. If the data sources for Heading are not providing valid
data only Ownship outline is shown in red.
If any alarm conditions are active the Alarm Status Indicator will
flash red or amber and the buzzer will sound. To acknowledge
alarms left click on the alarm status indicator, or right click to open
the Alarm Display and view information on the alarms. See Chapter
7 Alarms for more information on using the Alarm Display window.
On the upper toolbar, verify that the selected chart type shown in
the Chart button is correct. To change chart settings, or to install
charts, see Chapter 4 Charts.

2-8 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

System Security
System security is maintained by comparing identification codes contained
in the Security Block device attached to the VisionMaster PC (see System
Start-up) with the codes contained in the software configuration file.
The following rules govern system security:
In order for the VisionMaster FT to operate effectively, a Security
Block device must be properly programmed by Sperry Marine and
attached to the workstation PC.
On a multi-node system each node has a Security Block attached.
The system also compares the allowed number of workstations
(nodes), to the actual number of nodes in the system. If the number
of nodes exceeds the limit set in the Security String an
Authorization Failure alarm is given.
If the Security Block becomes damaged or detached while the
VisionMaster FT is running, an Authorization Failure alarm is given.
The system will continue to operate but will revert to a degraded
state after a period of 7 days. If the Security Block is damaged the
operator should contact Sperry Marine to apply for a replacement.
If on start-up an invalid system identification code is found in the
configuration file, the system will shut down. No grace period is
provided.
While the Security Block is broken or detached, installation of
charts is prohibited. This is true even if the user has obtained a
temporary security password.

65900012 2-9
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

ECDIS Screen Layout

When the system has successfully started up the ECDIS appears. Apart
from the upper toolbar area the chart display fills the whole of the display
area rectangle.
The basic controls and screen layout for an ECDIS are shown below.

The control functions for an ECDIS can be divided into the following areas:
Main Menu and Sub Menu functions (auto show/hide)
Upper Toolbar Area (fixed)
Lower popup Toolbar Area (auto show/hide)

2-10 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Main Menu and Sub Menu Area

When the cursor is moved over the Show Menu button at the bottom right
of the screen, the Main Menu functions and any associated Sub Menu
functions are shown in a vertical panel to the right side of the screen. If the
cursor is moved away from this area the functions are hidden.
If the cursor remains stationary for a short period of time (usually around 5
to 6 seconds) on the lower toolbar area the Show Menu button is replaced
by the Sperry Marine VisionMaster FT logo. The Show Menu button
reappears when the cursor is moved.
Upper and Lower Toolbar Areas
At the top of the screen, the upper toolbar area provides quick access to
system functions that must be visible at all times, such as primary
navigation information and operating modes. The upper toolbar area is
fixed and always visible on an ECDIS.
The lower toolbar area is initially hidden, but can be displayed at any time
by moving the cursor to the bottom of the screen. The lower toolbar area is
hidden again when the cursor is moved away from the toolbar area. This
area provides controls that are needed frequently during system operation.
From both the upper and lower toolbar areas, various popup windows can
be opened for access to system functions, see Controlling Popup Windows.

65900012 2-11
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Chart Display
The ECDIS has the capability to catalogue and display vector charts and
raster charts in various formats. Since chart formats differ, the system can
be configured to use the formats specified by the customer.
Available vector chart formats include:
C-MAP charts (supported by the C-MAP chart engine)
S-57, S-63, DirectENC, VPF (supported by the SevenCs chart
engine)
Available raster chart formats include:
1 2
ARCS and BSB (supported by the SevenCs chart engine)
If a chart portfolio is active, the display shows the most detailed chart set,
from the loaded portfolio, for the area where the ship is located.

1
Admiralty Raster Chart Service. Suppliers of raster format electronic charts with
world coverage, in the HCRF format.
2
A supplier of raster format electronic charts. Charts based on the paper charts supplied
by National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and CHS and available in
the data format established by BSB Electronic Charts.

2-12 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Accessing System Functions

Most ECDIS system functions use controls that are located on popup
windows, which can be moved to any location on the chart display.
For more information on using popup windows, see Controlling Popup
Windows.
Upper Toolbar Functions

The following functions on the upper toolbar can be changed by a left click
on its control button:
HDG/STW (for water stabilised mode), COG/SOG (for ground
stabilised mode)
Video On/Off
Standby/Transmit mode
True or Relative Vectors
Presentation Mode (or right click to select available modes)
Scale Ratio Up/Down buttons
Alarm Acknowledgement
Buzzer alarm On/Off
Watch Mode (to select the console view)
To access the following control windows left click on these upper toolbar
buttons:
Target (for Target Display)
AIS (for AIS Display)
Message (for Own Ship AIS Messages)
Danger (for Dangers window)
To access the following sub menu functions left or right click on these
upper toolbar buttons:
Chart Type (for selection of available chart sets, with its natural
scale, based on position of own ship).
Route (for Routes)
To access the following sub menu functions right click on these upper
toolbar buttons:
Video (for Video Settings)
Standby/Transmit (for Transceiver Control and Interswitch)
Target (for Targets sub menus)
AIS (for AIS sub menus)

65900012 2-13
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

HDG, COG, STW and SOG (for applicable data source)

Motion Mode (to show, set or reset TM limits, see Setting True
Motion Limits)
Alarms (for Alarms Display window)
Lower Toolbar Functions

The following functions on the lower toolbar can be changed by a left click
on its control button:
Synthetics On/Off
Range Rings On/Off
Popup windows Show/Hide
Centre view (moves own ship to centre of display)
Max view (off centres own ship and display)
Presentation modes (Primary and Secondary chart display)
To access context sensitive Help left click on the iHelp button, the cursor
changes to the iHelp icon (see Using the Cursor). Left click on a function
button to display context sensitive Help for that function.
To access the following popup windows left click on these lower toolbar
buttons:
Curs (for Cursor status)
Posn (for own ship position status)
ERBLs 1 and 2
Query (for Chart Query)
Date and Time field (for Time Management window)
Goto
To access the following sub menu functions left click on this lower toolbar
button:
Brilliance icon (for Day/Night settings and Brilliance sub menus)
CID (for available CID windows)
Profiles (for apply available profiles, or to access User Profiles)
To access the following sub menu functions right click on these lower
toolbar buttons:
iHelp (for Report tab folder in the System Diagnostics sub menu)

2-14 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions

To access the sub menu functions of each
main menu click on the function in the sub
menu navigation list. The selected function is
highlighted in the main menu and the function
window opens in the upper right of the
display, directly above the sub menu list. If
another sub menu function is opened the
function window previously opened now
closes and is replaced by the new selection. To keep the previous window
open, move it to another position on the display (see Controlling Popup
Windows), each displayed function is highlighted in the sub menu
navigation list.
To remove the function window from the display either click on its button in
the navigation list, or click the Exit button on the window.
Selecting related Sub Menus from a Function Title Bar
When a sub menu window is open all related
sub menu options within that main menu can
be quickly accessed by right clicking on the
sub menu title bar and selecting from the drop
down list. The sub menu option selected from
the drop down list replaces the previously
opened window.
Accessing Context Window from the Display
The following functions can be additionally
accessed by right clicking anywhere with the chart
display and selecting the option from a semi
transparent context menu:
Cancel Target (if a target has been found)
Off-centre Own Ship
Pan
GoTo..
Zoom Here
Query Chart
Create Nav Mark
The context window is removed from the screen after about 10 seconds of
inactivity.

65900012 2-15
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Controlling Popup Windows

When a function is accessed from the
lower toolbar that calls for a status window
(e.g. Position or Cursor) the function's
popup window appears on the chart
display, directly above its access button.
Each popup window includes a top area
containing the window's title, an
expand/collapse button and a close button.
To move a window, select the window's
title bar, hold down the left key and then
use the trackball to drag the window to the
desired new location.

1. To collapse a window click on the button. Only the top toolbar

area of the window appears on the display.

2. To expand a previously collapsed window click on the button.

The control area of the window re-appears.

3. To close a window click on the button. The window is removed

from the display.
Show/Hide Windows
To hide all windows currently shown on the chart display, click on the

Show/Hide Menus button in the lower toolbar area .

To restore all previously opened windows click on the Show/Hide Menus
button again. All opened windows are restored to their previous positions
on the display (unless new windows have been opened since the Hide
Menus button was clicked).

2-16 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Using the Cursor

Wherever the cursor is displayed on the chart display, a popup Cursor
window, accessed from the lower popup toolbar area gives a readout of the
cursor’s position within the display. By default the Cursor window gives
cursor range and bearing (from own ship) and cursor latitude/longitude, see
Cursor Readout.
Cursor Graphics
When the cursor moves over the system control areas
and popup windows it is displayed as a small white
arrow.
When the cursor passes from the control areas into the
chart display it changes to an orange cross.

When the cursor is moved near to the edge of the chart

window it changes from an orange cross to the following
symbol
When the cursor moves over the dividing line between
the primary and secondary windows in vertical split
screen mode it changes to the following symbol.
When the cursor moves over the dividing line between
the primary and secondary windows in horizontal split
screen mode it changes to the following symbol.

When the cursor moves over the right bottom edge of a

secondary window in secondary presentation it changes
to the following symbol. The window can then be re-
sized.
If an adjustable parameter is selected within a control
window, the cursor is displayed as a text entry cursor.

When Select Points is selected from Charts menu the

letters CM are added to the cursor, see Chart Match.

65900012 2-17
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

When Query On is selected from Chart Query menu, or

Add Annotation Mark is selected from Manual Chart
Update a ? is added to the cursor, see Chart Query

When a Return To Plan temporary waypoint is to be

added, the letters ADD RTP appear below the cursor,
see Route Plans.
When a map offset is to be applied graphically, the cursor
changes to the following symbol, see Maps Display
Settings
When a Temporary Route Plan is created or edited, the
letters TMP WYPT appear below the cursor, see
Temporary Route Plans.
When a mapping object is created or edited, the letters
MO EDIT appear below the cursor, see Mapping.

When the cursor moves over an object to be deleted the

letters DEL appear below the cursor.

When the iHelp button is selected and the cursor moves

over screen functions it changes to the following symbol.

When the cursor moves over an Electronic Bearing Line

(EBL) or Parallel Index line it changes to the following
symbol, see EBLs, ERBLs and VRMs and Parallel Index
Lines.

When the range of a Variable Range Marker (VRM) or

Parallel Index line is adjusted the cursor changes to the
following symbol, see EBLs, ERBLs and VRMs and
Parallel Index Lines.
When the video cursor moves over an Electronic Range
and Bearing Line (ERBL) it changes to the following
symbol, Electronic Range and Bearing Line (ERBL).

2-18 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Standby and Transmit Mode

Standby Mode
After the system has powered up the display is always in Standby mode,
with own ship's symbol shown centred in the chart display (see Own Ship
Symbols).
The Standby/Transmit control icon is located on the upper
toolbar. When the system is in Standby the icon is shown with a
red diagonal line through it.
In Standby mode you can access the following functions which allow the
display to be set up for operation:
Presentation Mode
Radar Settings
Alarms
Cursor data
Scale Ratio selection
Chart View
Video Processing Controls (Manual/Auto and Enhance On/Off only)
Sensors Indicator and Sensors menu
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs)
Trial Manoeuvre settings
Route Plans
Navigation Tools
Chart settings
System Settings

65900012 2-19
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

Transmit Mode
In addition to the functions listed in Standby mode, the following
functions are available when the ECDIS chart display is in
Transmit mode:
Radar Video
Display and selection of target data
Video Processing Controls, see Video
Radar Fine Tuning, see Transceiver
If you are not familiar with using the ECDIS display, it is strongly
recommended that you read System Controls. This describes how to use
the external controls in order to operate the system.

Online Help
The VisionMaster FT system includes an online Help Guide that provides
information and procedures necessary to operate the system.
A context-sensitive help facility is also provided. This type of help is called
"context-sensitive" because it enables the user to quickly access
information relevant to the major functions displayed on the VisionMaster
FT screen.
Accessing Context Sensitive Help
1. Click on the iHelp button in the lower toolbar area.

2. With the cursor displaying the ? icon

click on the required function button,
the Help information relevant to that
function appears in a movable
window on the chart display.

2-20 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Accessing the Help Guide

The Help Guide is accessed by clicking on the
Launch Explorer button at the bottom of the
Help window. This window can be accessed
either from the context Help window previously
opened, or by clicking on the Help button in the
main menu list, and then clicking on the Help
sub menu button.
The online Help guide appears as a moveable
window and can be resized as required.

65900012 2-21
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

On-Screen Keyboard
The Help Guide includes a screen keyboard that allows the operator to
enter textual and numerical data.

To access the keyboard click the On-Screen Keyboard button at the

bottom of the VisionMaster Help window. A keyboard window appears
below the Help Guide, replicating a standard computer keyboard. The
keyboard window may be minimised or closed by clicking the respective
buttons at the top right of the window.

Accessing Tool Tips

As the screen cursor moves over the system function buttons the text in the
highlighted button changes from white to yellow and a tool tip for that
function is briefly displayed in a popup window.

2-22 65900012
Getting Started with ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Operator Messages
The system generates messages that appear in order to either confirm an
action to proceed that the operator has requested, for example, when
switching from Transmit to Standby. Or a message to confirm an action that
the system is about to make, for example to acknowledge a change of own
ship's course on a monitored route.
Action Required Messages
If an Action Required message is confirming an
operator action the window will include an OK
button and a Cancel button. The action is
confirmed by clicking the OK button, or if the
action is to be cancelled the Cancel button is
clicked.
If the action requested by the operator cannot be
done, the system displays the reason for not
proceeding with the action and a confirmation
(OK) button.
While an Action Required is active the system
periodically sounds an audible indicator, which
may be muted by the operator, see Alarm Buzzer.
Operator Messages
Operator messages are used to notify the users at all nodes about course
changes on a monitored route (see Monitor Route), or when the system is
transitioning into or out of track control mode, see Chapter 13, Track
Control.
When an operator message is displayed, the
buzzer is sounded briefly to alert the operator to
their presence. All Operator Messages include
an Acknowledge button.
If an message is not acknowledged after a
period of 30 seconds it is then escalated to an
Alarm.

65900012 2-23
ECDIS User Guide Getting Started with ECDIS

System Shut Down

To shut down your particular node on the system select Shutdown
System in the System menu (see Shutdown) and wait for the VisionMaster
FT application and the Windows operating system to power down. When
the software has fully powered down then switch the On/Off switch to Off.

To shut down all the nodes on the system select Shutdown All Systems.
For a multi-node system a prompt appears requesting a confirmation of the
shut down to be entered, see Shutdown for details.

CAUTION:

In a multi-node system, each workstation may be

configured to provide a connection to a sensor device or
other peripheral equipment that is also providing data to
other nodes on the system. Therefore it is important to
change to alternate data sources before shutting down a
workstation that is providing navigational data to the
system. If an active sensor is lost, an alarm is generated,
and the colour of data displayed for that sensor will
change to red, on the workstations that are still running.

2-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

This section describes the basic operation of the ECDIS. The following
topics are covered:
Selecting Transmit Mode
Own ship's heading line and ship symbols
Cursor readout
Position data
Alarm Status Indicator
Sensor Data Display
Presentation Modes
Motion Modes (including setting True Motion limits)
Vector Modes
Radar Video Mode
Scale Ratio
Chart Database & Sub Menu Selection
access to Target Display
access to AIS Display
access to Own Ship AIS messages
User interface, including Presentation options, screen navigation,
range rings and synthetics
Positioning options, including Panning Offsetting and Goto and
Centre and Maximum View
Current Date and Time
Brilliance Control
Zooming into an area
Watch Mode
Safety Checking

65900012 3-1
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Selecting Transmit Mode

When Transmit is selected, either from the Standby/Transmit button or the
Transceiver window (see Radar Settings, Transceiver), the system is
switched from Standby to Transmit mode. In Transmit mode the transceiver
starts transmitting radar pulses and the ECDIS can be enabled to show
radar video, see Radar Video Mode.
In a multi-node system switching to Transmit is only possible if the
node is selected as a Master Display, or if the node is a Slave
Display and the Master Display is in transmit.
There are three ways of selecting Transmit mode:
1. Left click on the Standby/Transmit button. The diagonal red line is
removed from the button and the system transfers to Transmit
mode.
2. Right click on the Standby/Transmit
button and select Transmit from the drop
down list
3. Right click on the Standby/Transmit
button and select Transceiver Control,
the Transceiver window appears on the
display. From this window click on the
Transmit radio button in the Operational
Mode area of the window, see
Transceiver.
When Transmit is selected and the Transceiver is a Master (see
Interswitch) the pulse length buttons and tune modes (Manual and
AFC) become active in the Transceiver window.
In Transmit the default presentation mode is North Up, see Presentation
Modes for ECDIS.
The sensor devices that have been configured for the system will make
acquired navigation data available to the operator, see Sensor Data
Display.

3-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Returning to Standby Mode

To return to Standby mode left click on the
Standby/Transmit button, or click on the
Standby radio button in the Transceiver window.
An Action Required popup window appears
prompting to confirm the switch to Standby. To
confirm click the OK button, or to return to
Transmit mode click the Cancel button.
When the Transceiver is switched to Standby
any active Radar Video is automatically switched off. In a multi node
system this applies to all nodes if a Master Display switches to Standby.

65900012 3-3
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Heading Line, Beam Line and Stern Line

The Heading Line (HL) and Stern Line (SL) are lines drawn parallel to the
ship’s fore/aft axis indicating the current own ship heading (HL) or the
reciprocal of the current own ship heading (SL). The HL and SL begin at
3
the CCRP of own ship and are drawn to the edge of the chart display. The
Beam Line is drawn perpendicular to the HL and SL at the CCRP.
The HL is always displayed. The SL may be selected for display, in addition
to the HL, from the Display Settings in the Navigation Tools menu. The SL
is shown as a dotted line.
The figure below shows own ship with HL and SL displayed.

The bearing of the HL or SL is dependent on the presentation mode.

In Course Up (C UP) mode the heading line is initially drawn
vertically and then changes dependant on the current heading
bearing.
In North Up (N UP) mode the heading line is drawn at the current
compass heading.
When own ship is off-centred, the heading line bearing is automatically
adjusted so that the scale is always referenced correctly.
For further information on own ship's heading line, see Presentation
Modes.

3
The position of the heading line and beam line within own ship's outline symbol is dependant
on the distance values applied to the CCRP in the Configuration tool (see VMFT Ship's
Manual, Chapter 4 Configuration). To position the CCRP in the centre of the ship's outline the
distance from bow must be half the configured value for ship's length. If no value is applied,
the heading and beam line will appear at the bow of ship's outline symbol.

3-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Beam Line
The beam line is a short line drawn at right angles to the heading line and
extending to each side of own ship's CCRP, the default (minimum) length is
10mm.
The beam line length can be increased from the 10mm default from the
Display Settings sub-menu in the Navigation Tools menu.

65900012 3-5
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Own Ship Symbols

There are two types of symbol used to display own ship’s position and
heading, defined as follows:
True Scaled Outline: The true scaled outline symbol is drawn
such that its length and width represent the configured length and
beam of the ship. Based on the size of the ship, the outline symbol
may be displayed if the greatest dimension of the ship is larger
than 6mm on the display. The true scaled outline symbol is
displayed in addition to the heading line and beam line.

The true scaled outline will only be displayed if Scaled Ownship

Outline is ticked in Navigation Tools, Display Settings (see
Ownship).

Circle Symbol: The circle symbol is drawn where the outline symbol
cannot be resolved at the given scale. The symbol has a 6mm diameter
for the outer circle and a 3mm diameter for the inner circle, in addition
to the heading line and beam line.

Ship's Symbol Colours

The colour of the ship's symbol and heading line/beam line is shown as
white when the Day/Night mode is set to Day Black or darker. If the mode
is set to Day Bright ship's symbol and heading line/beam line will appear as
black.
Faults in Heading and Position Data affecting Own Ship Symbol
If the position data becomes invalid, ship's outline or circle symbol are
shown in red and the system switches to water stabilised mode, (see
Sensor Data Display).The heading line and beam line remain in white (if in
Day Black or darker).
If the heading data becomes invalid, the ship's outline and heading line are
not displayed, although the circle symbol remains displayed in white. The
course vector is shown in red and only North Up Presentation Mode is
available.

3-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Own Ship Vector

The own ship vector symbol is a line indicating ship’s direction and speed.
The end of the line is shown with a double arrowhead when in ground
stabilisation mode, and a single arrowhead when in water stabilisation
mode. For a description of the stabilisation modes see Sensor Data
Display.
The vector line begins at own ship’s CCRP and is drawn with a length
corresponding to the distance on the chart display that own ship will cover,
given its current speed, in the vector time chosen, see Vector Modes.
When in ground stabilised mode, the vector line is drawn to reflect the COG
shown on the sensor data display. When in water stabilised mode, the
vector line is drawn to reflect the course through the water based on the
current heading shown on the sensor data display.
Own ship vector is not drawn if Predicted Vector is enabled (see Display
Settings, Ownship) and the stabilisation mode is ground based. In water
stabilised mode own ship vector is drawn in addition to the predicted
vector.
If own ship vector’s end point is not on the available area of the chart
display, a semicircle is drawn, centred at the point that the vector intersects
the edge of the available area.
Own ship vector is shown in red when the data received from the sensors
used to draw the vector (water or ground stabilised) is invalid or degraded.
If enabled, tick marks will be displayed along the vector length at one
minute intervals, with every sixth tick mark shown with double thickness.
The tick marks can be switched on or off, and the tick mark interval time
adjusted from the Display Settings sub-menu in the Navigation Tools menu.

65900012 3-7
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Predicted Vector
Predicted vector is a tool to indicate where the ship will go based on current
COG, SOG and ROT. Predicted Vector is turned on and off from Ownship
in the Navigation Tools menu.

3-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Cursor Readout
The cursor readout window is accessed by clicking on the
Curs button, located on the lower popup toolbar.
The readout displays the location of the cursor position relative to the
CCRP of own ship. Readout data appears when the cursor is within any
area of the chart display. If the cursor is moved to a secondary chart
window (see ECDIS Presentation Options) the readout data shown is
applicable to that chart.
The Cursor readout includes the following:
Latitude (LAT) corresponding to the
current cursor position.
Longitude (LON) corresponding to the
current cursor position.
Range - the distance between the
CCRP and the cursor position as
measured in nautical miles (NM).
Bearing from the CCRP to the cursor
position, displayed as true or relative by clicking on the T or R
toggle button.
Reciprocal bearing, defined as bearing from the cursor position to
the CCRP, displayed as true or relative by clicking on the T or R
toggle button.
Time To Go (TTG) - the geographical distance, displayed as hours,
minutes and seconds, between the CCRP and the cursor position
divided by speed over ground (when in ground stabilised mode) or
speed through water (when in water stabilised mode) . For
information on stabilisation options, refer to Sensor Data Display.
The LAT/LON readings are replaced by dashes if the following happen:
the cursor passes over popup windows or toolbars
own ship’s position is lost
the compass is unaligned
there is a compass error.
Where the LAT/LON and bearing data is acquired from a valid sensor data
source the values are displayed in green, if the position data is degraded
then the values are displayed in orange, if the position data is considered
invalid and unusable the data is shown in red. For further information on
sensor data sources see Sensors Menu.

65900012 3-9
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Position
Summary data on own ship's Lat/Lon
position is displayed in the left corner of
the lower toolbar area, also displayed is
the sensor source and quality indicator used for the position values, (see
description below).
This information in the lower toolbar is replicated in the
Position window, accessed by clicking on the Posn button
on the lower popup toolbar.
The Position window includes the following
data:
The latitude/longitude (LAT/LON)
position of the CCRP, as reported by
the Position sensor. Where the
LAT/LON data is acquired from a valid
sensor data source the values are
displayed in green, if the position data
is degraded then the values are
displayed in orange, if the position
data is considered invalid and unusable the data is shown in red.
For further information on sensor data sources see Sensors Menu
ECDIS.
The sensor source of the position data. The connected position
sensor will in most cases be a GPS receiver and should be
4
configured to send position data using the GGA sentence . When
position data is sent using the GGA sentence, the quality is
indicated as shown in the table below.
GGA - GPS Quality indicator
Indicator Description Field Acronym
0 Fix not available or invalid -
1 GPS SPS Normal
2 differential GPS Differential
3 GPS Precise Prcs
4 Real Time Kinematic RTK

4
NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data. A sentence is a self contained line
of data.

3-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

5 Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK

6 Estimated dead reckoning DR
7 Manual Manual
8 Simulated -

Indicator values 0 and 8 are degraded values. No acronym

appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).

A Loran-C device or an older GPS device may not provide position using
the GGA sentence. In this case the GLL sentence may be used. Quality
indicators when using the GLL sentence are shown in the table below.
GLL - system mode indicator
Indicator Description Field Acronym

A Autonomous Normal
D Differential Differential
E Estimated dead reckoning DR
M Manual Manual
S Simulated -
N Not valid -

Indicator values S and N are degraded values. No acronym

appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).

If a GLONASS device is providing position data it is likely to be configured

to send the data using the GNS sentence. Quality indicators when using
GNS are shown in the table below.

65900012 3-11
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

GNS - system mode indicator

Indicator Description Field Acronym

A Autonomous Normal
D Differential Differential
E Estimated dead reckoning DR
F Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK
M Manual Manual
N Not valid -
P GNS Precise Prcs
R Real Time Kinematic RTK
S Simulated -

Indicator values N and S are degraded values. No acronym

appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded
colour (orange).
The field to the right of the quality indicator denotes the datum
used for position data (defaults to WGS84). For information on
5
WGS-84 datum see `Factors affecting Chart Accuracy' in Chart
Facility.
The depth value as reported by the depth sensor. If no sensor data
is available a series of red dashes are shown in the field. The field
to the right of the depth value denotes the depth source sensor, i.e.
depth below keel (DBK), depth below transducer (DBT) or depth
below waterline (DBW).
The system time shown hours, minutes and seconds. This can be
either UTC or Local (local time may have a time offset applied),
depending on the selection of system time made in Time
Management. The current selection is shown next to the time.

5
World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) is a chart datum model used by chart makers to
map the earth’s surface.

3-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Alarm Status Indicator

The Alarm Status Indicator displays
the current alarm and warning
announcement status of the system.
The Alarm status indicator's background colour is based on the state and
status of active announcements in the system (see Alarm Status). If no
active announcements exist, the background colour shows the system
background colour and the message No Alarms is displayed. If
unacknowledged announcements exist, the background colour changes to
a flashing colour based on the highest unacknowledged announcement
category, these are:
red for alarm
yellow for warning
You can acknowledge Alarms and Warnings in one of two ways:
1. either by clicking on the message in the alarm status indicator; or
2. by clicking on the ACK ALARM button on the control panel.
The alarm is removed from the Alarm Status Indicator and, if other
unacknowledged alarms exist, is replaced by the next in order of priority.
The alarm remains listed (non flashing) in the Alarms Display list as long as
the condition exists, see Alarm Display.
When alarms have been acknowledged in the alarm status indicator but
alarms are still active, the background colour displays a steady colour
based on the highest acknowledged announcement category.
To view details on Alarms right click on the Alarm Status Indicator, the
Alarm Display window appears.

65900012 3-13
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Sensor Data Display

The VisionMaster FT system acquires data via interfaces connected to the
PCIO unit. The sensor information relating to own ship's heading, course
and speed is displayed in the sensor data display at the top left of the
upper toolbar area.

Sensors provide sensor information for the following data types:

HDG (Heading)
STW (Speed Through Water)
COG (Course Over Ground)
SOG (Speed Over Ground)
For all data types, the system automatically establishes a sensor source.
In performing this selection, the system chooses a sensor for which at least
one interface is currently providing usable data for the applicable data type.
The selected sensor source for each data type can be viewed, or where
necessary changed, from the Sensors menu.
The four data type fields are divided into three columns:
Caption
The captions are always the abbreviated data types listed above.
Readout
The readout shows the latest valid sample received by the selected sensor.
Valid sensor data is shown in green. If the data is currently invalid it is
shown in red, or orange if the data is degraded.
A readout of true heading is always displayed, unless compass alignment
6
is being prompted, or a compass error has occurred.

6
A compass error will cause the heading readout to change from green to red and a compass
alarm will be raised. If a stabilised picture presentation is in use, and the error is still present,
then after 1 minute, the picture will revert to North Up.
For certain types of compass input, it will be necessary to align the heading readout by
manually entering the current heading after the chart display is switched-on. The need for
alignment is indicated by the heading readout flashing green.

3-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Data Source
The currently selected sensor from which the readout is taken (e.g. GPS,
Gyro etc.).

Stabilisation Options
There are two stabilisation modes for target tracking, ground and water
referenced. The HDG and STW field block indicates water stabilisation and
the COG/SOG field block indicates ground stabilisation.
To toggle between the two stabilisation modes either click anywhere within
the two field blocks, or right click on the display and select from the drop
down list (the current stabilisation mode is shown ticked). The selected
block is highlighted and sensor data is extracted based on the stabilisation
mode selected.
Multi-node System
In a multi-node system all nodes on the system provide the same indication
of selected sensor source for each data type, regardless of the node from
which the operator makes selections.

65900012 3-15
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Presentation Modes
The currently selected presentation mode for the chart
display is shown on the presentation mode button on the
upper toolbar area. The following modes may be available for selection:
North-Up (N Up)
This is the power up default presentation
mode for vector charts. True north is at
the top of the chart window with the North
arrow pointing vertically. The ship’s
heading marker is shown at the
appropriate bearing.
North Up is the only presentation mode
that can be selected when a usable source of heading data is
unavailable.
Course-Up (C Up)
On selection of Course-Up mode, the ship’s
bearing at the time of changing to course-
up is shown at the top of the chart display
with the North arrow pointing in the
direction of true north. A usable source of
heading data is required for Course Up
mode.
In this mode the orientation of the display remains constant even
as the ship's heading changes.
To change the presentation mode, do the following:
1. Click the presentation mode button. This will cycle through the
available choices for the presentation mode.
Or:
1. Right click on the presentation mode button. A list of
available presentation modes will be shown in a drop
down menu (unavailable modes will be greyed out).
2. Left click on the presentation mode you want to use.

3-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Presentation Mode dictated by Raster Charts

If raster charts are being displayed the presentation mode is dictated by the
orientation of the currently loaded chart. If the displayed chart is a north
oriented raster chart then North Up will be the only available presentation
mode. If the raster chart is not north oriented then Chart Up will be the only
presentation mode available.
If the secondary window is displaying a vector chart then the vector chart is
displayed with the same orientation as the raster chart.
For more information on raster charts, refer to Using Raster Charts.

65900012 3-17
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Motion Modes
The motion mode determines how the trails of moving targets are shown
across the screen relative to own ship and how chart information is
updated.
The currently selected Motion Mode is displayed as an
abbreviation at the top right of the screen. The power on
default motion mode is True Motion (TM). In TM own ship moves over the
chart, in relative motion the chart moves under own ship.

Currently the only motion mode available for the VisionMaster

ECDIS is True Motion. Relative Motion (RM) mode will be shown
as greyed out if you right click on the motion mode button.

The primary and secondary chart windows are always displayed with the
same motion mode.

3-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

True Motion
In TM, own ship moves across the screen by the system applying Lat/Lon
positional updates to it. All stationary items (i.e. items with constant Lat/Lon
coordinates) remain in a fixed position on the screen and all targets move
according to their true course and speed.
When own ship reaches the edge of the TM limits box, and true motion
reset limits are enabled, it is repositioned to the edge of the box, such that
a line drawn from own ship's CCRP in the direction of the current course
passes through the centre of the TM Limits box (see figure below).

The TM limits box default size is approximately 90% of the chart window
size (90% being the maximum size of the box). The box size can be
redrawn by the operator, see Setting True Motion Limits.

65900012 3-19
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Vector Modes
Vectors are shown on the display to indicate the velocity (speed and
direction) of own ship and moving targets. The length of the vector
indicates speed and its bearing indicates direction. On an ECDIS vectors
are shown in both Standby and Transmit modes. For information on own
ship vectors, see Own Ship Symbols.
Target vectors are drawn using the same colour as the target symbol,
based on the following conditions:
Target with no alarm condition : Non-flashing green
Target with unacknowledged alarm : Flashing red
Non-dangerous target with
acknowledged alarm : Non-flashing green
Dangerous target with
acknowledged alarm : Non-flashing red

Selecting the Vector Mode

The vector mode determines whether the vectors represent the true
velocity of targets or their velocity relative to own ship.
On an ECDIS the vector mode defaults to True. Relative vector may be
selected but the vector button will be displayed in the warning colour
(amber). The vector mode will revert to True to match True Motion after
about 30 seconds.
True Vectors
All moving targets and own ship have a vector representing their
movement (speed and direction) over the water/ground. Stationary
targets do not have a vector.

3-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Relative Vectors
If own ship is moving, all targets, both moving and stationary, have
a vector representing their movement (speed and direction) relative
to own ship. Own ship will not have a vector in this mode.

To select a Vector Mode, do the following:

A true (T) or relative (R) Vector mode can be selected as follows:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Vector mode selection field.
2. Consecutive left clicks will toggle the mode
between True (T) and Relative (R) vectors.
3. Or right click on the current vector mode and
select from True or Relative from the drop
down menu.

65900012 3-21
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Vector Time
The Vector Time selected will determine the length of the vectors shown on
the radar display. The length of a vector represents the distance the ship or
target will travel in the vector time. For example:
Vector Time 5 minutes
Speed (of ship or target) 12kt
Length of vector 1NM
The optimum vector time will depend upon the scale ratio that is in use.
Extending the vector time will help you predict closest point of approach
(CPA) of targets to own ship and other targets.
To change Vector Time, do the following:
Either:
1. Position the screen cursor over the vector time field.
2. Left click to edit. The text becomes green
(editable).
3. Move the trackball left to decrease or right to increase the time.
4. Left click to accept the re-entered time.
Or:
1. Right click over the vector time field. The numeric
keypad appears.
2. Enter the revised vector time field using the
keypad's numeric keys. If a value entered is
incorrect press the Back key. With the required
values enter click the OK key.
3. The keypad is removed from the screen and the
revised value is entered at the vector time field.

Extending the vector time lets you visually check on CPAs of

targets by projecting their movements further into the future.

3-22 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Radar Video Mode

The following radar video controls can be accessed from the radar video
icon at the top of the fixed toolbar area:
Video On or Off
Video transparency levels
Video Settings window
Radar video can only be switched on when the system is in Transmit mode,
see Transmit and Standby Modes.
Switching the Video On
When video is switched off the radar video icon is shown with a
red diagonal line through it.
If the system switches to Standby, or the current scale ratio is outside the
radar video limits when radar video is on, the button is
displayed with a yellow background, in addition to a red
diagonal line.
To turn the video on, left click on the icon, or right click
and select Video On. The red diagonal line is removed
and radar video is shown on the chart display.
In primary and secondary presentation mode (see
ECDIS Presentation Options) radar video appears in
the primary chart window only.
Radar video is removed from the chart window if the
scale ratio is 1:500,000 or more or 1:3,000 or less, see
Scale Ratio.
Setting Video Transparency Levels
The radar video icon enables the transparency level of
video to be set. The default transparency level setting at power up is 60%.
To change the transparency level right click on the icon and select from the
pre-set values (20%, 40%, 60% or 80%) or 100% for opaque. The
transparency of video shown on the display will increase or decrease
dependant on the level selected.
The settings made for the level of video transparency are persisted after a
system restart.

65900012 3-23
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Video Settings
To access video settings right click on the radar video icon and select
Video Settings.. The Video popup window appears on the chart display.
The Video window includes controls and settings for the following:
Video Processing Controls (Gain, Rain, Sea)
Auto Anti-Clutter and Enhance
Trails (control of video trails).
For information on setting video controls see Video in Chapter 12, `Radar'.

3-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Scale Ratio
The scale ratio includes two selection modes: Automatic (Auto) and
Manual.
The system defaults to Auto scale selection on
first use. In Auto mode the scale ratio button on
the upper toolbar shows the letter A after the scale.
Automatic Scale
In Auto Scale mode, the system periodically checks
the current scale of each display area for ownship
position against the compilation scale of the largest
chart cell. If the scales differ, the scale ratio is
automatically changed to the match the complication
scale of the chart cell.
To view or select the current compilation scale, right
click on the scale ratio button.
The drop down window shows the current scale
selection mode ticked.
1. For vector charts the manual scale ratios
that may be selected range from 1:500 to
1:8,000,000 and include a Compilation
Scale, which in Auto Scale will be ticked.
For a description of a chart's compilation
scale, see Chart Facility.
2. For raster charts a
smaller range of scale
ratios are available. The
scales will be dependant
on the raster chart set
currently selected, see
Using Raster Charts.

Auto scale cannot be applied if True Motion limits are off, for example in
panning or zoom mode.

65900012 3-25
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Manual Scale
The scale mode is switched from Automatic to Manual as a result of the
following actions:
Manually changing the scale, the scale can be changed in one of
following ways:
1. Clicking on the button to decrease the scale, or the button to
increase the scale.
2. Clicking on the Up/Down Range buttons on the Control Panel to
decrease or increase the scale.
3. Right clicking on the Scale Ratio button and selecting a scale ratio
from the drop down list.
Switching the system to panning mode.
Selecting a different chart set from the Chart button in the upper
toolbar.
When the scale mode is in Manual the letter A is removed from the scale
ratio readout.
When the ECDIS is in secondary chart window mode (see ECDIS
Presentation Options) you can select different scale ratios for the primary
window and secondary window.

Auto scale selection is not available in a secondary chart window.

Zoom Window
The zoom feature enables the operator to zoom into a specified area on the
chart display. The zoom feature can be applied independently on the
primary and secondary chart windows, see ECDIS Presentation Options.
To use the zoom window feature, do the following:
1. Select Zoom Window from the Scale Ratio drop down
list. A dotted zoom box appears around the cursor. If the
cursor is not moved for about five seconds the box
disappears.
2. Move the cursor to the area on the chart display where you want
the zoom window to originate from.
3. Left click to fix the centre of the zoom window and move the
trackball left or right to expand the zoom box.

3-26 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

4. With the zoom box shown at the required size left click to set the
parameters. The chart display is centred on the zoom window, the
scale ratio automatically decreases to the zoom window
parameters and the TM limits are switched off, see Setting True
Motion Limits.
5. To re-apply TM limits to the chart window either click on the TM
Limits Off button or the Centre button. The chart window is re-
drawn with own ship in the centre of the display and the motion
indicator button displays TM.

The scale ratio will remain at the size specified for the zoom
window after TM limits have been re-applied.

65900012 3-27
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Chart Database & Chart Sub Menu Selection

The Chart button on the upper toolbar displays the
currently selected chart database format and the
chart depth in use (i.e. meters). The ECDIS has the capability of switching
between chart databases.
The chart databases available in the system are defined by which chart
engines are configured and what chart data has been installed.
For information on configuring chart engines, see VisionMaster FT Ship's
Manual, Chapter 4 `Configuration'.
For information on installing charts on to a node via the Sperry Marine
Chart Installer program, see VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual, Chapter 6
`Chart Installation'.
The Chart button enables the operator to
switch between chart databases and
available chart sets, or to switch charts off.
The button also enables access to the
Chart sub menus.

If automatic database selection is

enabled in Databases, then the system
will periodically search all enabled
databases and automatically change
the selected database to be the one
which provides the largest scale chart.

1. Left click on the Chart button to

display a drop down list.
This list displays the available chart
databases (e.g. S-57 – SevenCs).
The currently selected chart
database is indicated by a bullet
point.
If the system has been configured
to display raster charts the available chart sets are displayed in the
drop down list under the SevenCs - ARCS chart engine. Each
raster chart set includes a brief description of its coverage. For
information on raster charts, see Using Raster Charts.

3-28 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Listed below each chart database are all the available chart sets
within an area of own ship, or if own ship isn't on the display, the
charts available at the centre of the screen. The chart sets
currently being displayed are indicated with a tick mark. The chart's
compilation scale (see Chart Facility) and its status (i.e. Official) are
included with the chart name.
2. To suppress all chart information in the display area select
Planning Sheet at the top of the list. The message No Chart is
displayed on the chart button and the ECDIS will appear as an
Radar, with only radar video, navigational tools and mariner objects
displayed (if enabled).
3. To select another chart set click on the chart set line in the list. The
scale ratio change to the selected chart set’s compilation scale (for
a description of Compilation Scale. If the selected chart set is not
provided by the currently selected chart database, the selected
chart database will be changed to that which contains the selected
chart set.
4. To select a different chart database, without affecting the system
scale ratio, click on the chart engine line, e.g. SevenCs - ARCS or
C-Map - ENC.
5. To access the chart sub menus, select the
options from the bottom of the drop down
list. The selected sub menu will appear as
a movable window on the display.

65900012 3-29
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Target Display Button

The target display button, located on the upper toolbar, enables you to
quickly access the Target Display window by left clicking on the button.
The Target Display window enables the display
of targets to be switched on and off and the
target priority changed between AIS and
tracked targets. When Tracked Priority is
selected the target display button is shown in a
lighter tone colour; when AIS Priority is
selected the AIS button is shown in a lighter
tone.
For information on the Target Display sub menu and other target facilities
see Target Display in Chapter 10 `Targets'.
To access other options right click on the button, a
drop down list appears from where you can open
the following target facility windows:
Selected Target
Multi Targets
Target Display
Limits and Settings

3-30 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

AIS Display Button

The AIS button, located on the upper toolbar,
enables you to quickly access the AIS Display
window by left clicking on the button.
The AIS Display window enables the AIS input
to be switched on and off. AIS targets are
tracked and displayed on the chart window
when AIS input is enabled.
When the Enable Input check box is ticked the AIS Display button is
displayed as shown. The AIS Display button is shown in a lighter tone
when AIS Priority is selected from the Target Display window.
When AIS input check box is un-ticked, a red
diagonal line appears through the AIS button
and all AIS targets are removed from the chart
window. AIS transmissions will continue to be
stored so that known targets can be rendered
quickly when the AIS display is re-enabled.

If an AIS target infringes the closest point of approach and bow

crossing limits defined in Limits and Settings, the AIS display is
automatically switched back on.

The default setting for AIS target filter settings is for class A
and class B targets to be displayed. If either class A or class B
targets are not enabled the AIS button is displayed as shown.
For information on AIS display settings and other AIS related data, see AIS
Display in Chapter 10 Targets.
Access to Own Ship AIS
To access the Own Ship AIS sub menu right click on
the AIS button. The drop down list enables you to
select AIS Ownship and AIS Messages, in addition
to AIS Display.

65900012 3-31
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Messages
AIS messages are used to convey to the operator information
that requires attention. The messages are generated from an
external source, for example another ship in the area. When
a message has been received the Message envelope icon on the upper
toolbar is displayed in orange, with a white outline, an audible indicator is
given.
To access the message left click on the icon, the Own Ship AIS window
appears below the message icon.
For information on AIS messages, see Own Ship AIS in Chapter 10,
`Targets'.

3-32 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

ECDIS Presentation Options

The ECDIS can be viewed as a primary display only (where one chart
covers the whole display area), or a primary and secondary display.
The chart presentation options available are:
Primary (secondary presentation off)
Primary and Secondary, vertical split screen
Primary and Secondary, horizontal split screen
Primary, with secondary screen as popup window (picture in
picture mode)
The chart presentation controls are located on the lower popup
toolbar with the current presentation mode in highlight.

65900012 3-33
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Picture in Picture Mode

When the system is first switched into picture-in-picture mode, the
secondary chart window is shown as a popup window over the primary
chart window. The secondary chart window can be moved and resized
within the maximum and minimum limits.
To change the secondary window size, do the following:
1. Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the window. The
cursor changes to the following symbol .
2. To resize the window hold down the left key and move the trackball
left or right to reduce or enlarge the window. When the required
window size is shown release the left key.
Split Screen Mode
When the system is first switched into a split screen mode, the primary and
secondary chart windows occupy an equal amount of area on the display.
To change the split screen size do the following
1. Move the screen cursor to the dividing line between the primary
and secondary windows.
On a vertical split screen the cursor changes to the following
symbol.

On a horizontal split screen the cursor changes to the following

symbol.
2. To move the split screen hold down the left key and move the
trackball left or right for a vertical split screen, or up and down for a
horizontal split screen. When the required screen split is shown
release the left key.
On subsequent reversions back to split screen mode, the system divides
the primary and secondary window to match the last specified division.

3-34 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Functions Available in Secondary Chart Windows

The following functions are available in secondary chart windows and can
be changed independently of the current settings in the primary display.
Scale Ratio - the Auto scale ratio, which may be selected in the
primary chart display, is NOT available in a secondary window. If
the primary chart display is in Auto Scale the scale of the
secondary chart window is shown to the nearest manual scale.
Centre
Max
GoTo - a separate Lat/Lon and location may be defined for own
ship within the secondary chart window.
Chart Database and Chart Set - a different vector chart database
and chart set than the one displayed on the primary display may be
selected for display in the secondary chart window.

ARCS charts, if configured, are not available for selection in a

secondary window.

65900012 3-35
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Off Centre, Pan and Goto

The following positioning options are available from a semi-transparent
window when you right click within the chart display:
Off-centre Own Ship - moves own ship to a selected position
within the True Motion (TM) limits, with all chart and target
positions also moved in accordance.
The Off-centre Own Ship action can be applied separately to the
primary and secondary chart displays.
Pan - moves a selected chart position (navigation marker or object)
to the centre of the chart display. Own ship's position, chart data
and target positions are all moved in accordance. Panning mode
can be applied independently to the primary and secondary chart
displays.
Goto... - moves a specified location to the centre of the chart
display by using the location's LAT/LON coordinates, or by
selecting a previously saved location.
When Pan or Goto positioning is selected the TM limits are disabled and
the message TM limits off is displayed in the Motion Mode button.
Off Centring Own Ship
To off centre own ship do the following:
1. Move the cursor to a position within the
chart display where you want the off
centre position to be and right click. A
semi-transparent window appears at
the selected position.
2. Select Off-centre Own Ship from the
window. Own ship's CCRP is moved to
the position selected, (see note below).
All chart and target positions are also
moved in accordance.

If the position selected is outside the TM limits the Off centre

position will be limited to the edge of the TM limits box, nearest to
the selected position, see Setting True Motion Limits.

3-36 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

3. To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen,
select Close Menu.
Panning
The Pan function enables you to pan the chart display to view neighbouring
chart areas by positioning a selected point at the centre of the display.
In Panning mode TM limits are switched off and the motion mode button
displays TM Limits Off. TM limits are re-enabled when the following are
selected:
Off Centre, Centre or Max View
TM or Reset TM Limits from the Motion Mode button.
To pan the picture do the following:
1. Move the cursor to either a specific
point on the chart (for example, a
mariner object or a chart location), or to
a selected position within the chart
display and right click. A semi-
transparent window appears at the
selected point.
2. Select Pan from the window. The
selected position is moved to the centre
of the chart display. Own ship and all other chart and target
positions are also moved in accordance.
3. To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen,
select Close Menu.
Goto
The Goto.. function enables the centre of the chart display to be moved to
known locations or a specific location on the chart. Any geographic
location on the chart display can be designated by its LAT/LON
coordinates. Locations that may be needed repeatedly can be saved by
name, and then selected from a drop-down list, which is sorted
alphabetically. When a designated position is accepted, the chart display
shifts to show the desired location.
When a Goto location is applied TM limits are switched off and the motion
mode button displays TM Limits Off. TM limits are re-enabled when the
following are selected:
Off Centre, Centre or Max View
TM or Reset TM Limits from the Motion Mode button.

65900012 3-37
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

To create a new location do the following:

1. Right click at a selected position within the chart display and select
Goto.. from the popup window.
2. The Goto control window displays the LAT/LON position selected.
To display the list of previously saved locations click on the drop
down arrow to the right of the Locations field.
3. To create a new location based on the LAT/LON position click on
the Create.. button, the new location name field shows { Auto-
Generate Name }.To generate a location name based on the
current date and time click the OK button.
4. To generate the location under another name click in the new
location name field, a keypad appears below the location field.
Enter a location name using the keypad, and when complete click
the OK button.
5. The Goto.. control window reappears
with the saved location name in the
Location drop down list.
6. To enter revised coordinates for the
new location click in the LAT/LON
fields, a numerical keypad appears
on the menu area from where you
can enter the new LAT/LON
coordinates.
7. To assign the coordinates to the
location click the Update button.
8. To move LAT/LON position to the centre of the chart display click
the Go button. Own ship along with all other chart and target
positions are moved in accordance.

3-38 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

To rename or delete a location do the following:

To delete a saved location:
1. Select the location name to be
deleted by clicking on the Locations
drop down arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field,
click the Delete button. The location
and its coordinates are deleted from
the list.
To rename an existing location:
1. Select the location name to be
renamed by clicking on the
Locations drop down arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field, click the Rename button.
3. The Goto.. window prompts to rename the current location's name
and includes the option of automatically generating a name based
on the current date and time {Auto-Generate Name}.
4. To auto generate the name click the OK button, or to create
another name click in the field and enter a name using the screen
keypad. When the location has been renamed the new name
appears in the location drop down list.

65900012 3-39
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Centre & Maximum View Options

The Centre and Max view actions can be independently
applied to a specified chart window. A secondary display (see
ECDIS Presentation Options) will include its own Centre and
Max view controls.
Centring
If own ship's CCRP has been off centred or panned, left click on the Centre
button to redraw. The CCRP will be redrawn centered within the TM limits
box, see Setting True Motion Limits.
Maximum View
Clicking on the Max button positions own ship's CCRP at the edge of the
TM limits box, so that a line drawn from it in the direction of the current
course passes through the centre of the box (see figure below).

3-40 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

True Motion Limits

When a chart window is first displayed, the TM limits for that chart window
is centered with a default maximum width and height of approximately 90%
of the chart window’s width and height.
When own ship's CCRP reaches the edge of the TM limits box and TM
reset limits are enabled, own ship is repositioned to the opposite edge of
the box such that a line drawn from own ship in the direction of the current
course passes through the centre of the box, see Motion Modes.
Own ship may be moved outside the TM limits box when TM reset limits
are disabled (either in panning mode, or when Goto.. Lat/Lon values are
applied). In this case, the message TM Limits Off is displayed in the
Motion Mode field. To move own ship back to the centre of the TM limits
box left click on the Motion Mode button, TM limits are re-enabled to the
display.
Displaying the TM Limits
The effective ship box is hidden on the chart display. To
temporarily display the box right click on the Motion Mode
button and select Show TM Limits, the effective ship box is
displayed for about three seconds.
Setting the TM Limits
The size and location of the TM limits can be set
independently on primary and secondary chart displays.
To set the TM limits do the following:
1. Right click on the Motion mode button and select Set TM Limits
from the drop down list. The current TM limits appear on the chart
display with a movable square box in hatched line, representing the
minimum size of the TM limits. See Figure below.
2. With the cursor inside the box left click to specify the centre of the
TM limits box. You can then re-size the box by moving the trackball
across or down.
3. When the required parameters are displayed left click. The TM
limits are re-sized and own ship is moved to the centre of the box.
4. To change the TM limits in a secondary chart window select Set
TM Limits, move the screen cursor inside the secondary window
TM box and repeat steps 2 and 3 above.

65900012 3-41
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

5. To reset the TM limits back to the default parameters right click on

the Motion mode button and select Reset TM Limits from the drop
down list. The TM box is resized to its maximum parameters and
centred in the chart display for both primary and secondary chart
windows.

When TM limits are reset own ship remains in the position

previously set when the box was resized. Click on the Centre
button in the lower toolbar to move CCRP to the centre of the chart
display.

3-42 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Automatic resizing of the TM Limits box

The system automatically adjusts the position and/or size of the TM limits
box if the extents of a secondary chart window encroach the edges of the
box. See figure below.

When the chart window size is increased and no longer constrains the TM
limits box, the box regains the size of its previously specified parameters.

Current Date and Time

The current date and time are displayed in
the lower popup toolbar area.
The field displays the date, year and the current time in hours, minutes and
seconds. The current date and time shown are displayed as either UTC or
local time, dependent on the current time selected in Time Management.
To access the Time Management popup window left click on the date and
time field. For information on setting time parameters see Time
Management in the System menu.

65900012 3-43
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Range Rings
The Range Ring button enables you to toggle the
display of range rings on or off. When range rings
are switched on the button shows the current scale
in nautical miles (NM).
The range rings are centred on own ships CCRP and are equally spaced.
Range rings are drawn out to the edge of the display, irrespective of the
scale ratio or any offsetting of the CCRP.
The range ring interval is dependant on the currently selected scale ratio. If
the scale ratio is 1:2,000,000 and over the range rings are disabled.
The table below lists when the range ring interval changes at a particular
scale ratio.
Range Ring Interval
Scale Ratio
(NM)
1:500 0.025
1:3,000 0.05
1:5,000 0.10
1:8,000 0.25
1.30,000 0.5
1:80,000 1
1:150,000 2
1:300,000 4
1:500,000 8
1:1,000,000 16

3-44 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Brilliance Control
The Brilliance Control icon, located on the lower popup toolbar area,
provides quick access to the current day/night settings and sub menu
functions for the Brilliance menu.
To view the options right click on the icon, the
following selections are available from the list:
Change of day/night settings, with the
current setting ticked, see Day and Night
Modes.
Access to the following sub menu windows:
Day and Night Modes
Brilliance Groups
SENC data (color diagram)
Brightness Check
On a multi-node system changes to the Brilliance
settings on one node affect all nodes on the system.

65900012 3-45
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Zoom Window
The zoom window function enables the operator to adjust the scale and
geodetic centre of a chart window by zooming into a specific area of the
chart display.
A zoom window can be independently applied to both primary and
secondary chart windows.
When a zoom window has been selected TM limits are switched off and the
motion mode button displays TM Limits Off.
To access the zoom window function do the following:
1. Right click in the area of the chart display where you want to zoom
into.
2. Select Zoom Here from the semi-
transparent window. A dotted rectangle
box appears, centred where the right
click action was made. The proportions
of the zoom box are directly proportional
to the chart window.

3. To cancel the zoom action right click, the box disappears from the
screen. The box will also disappear from the screen if the cursor is
not moved for a period of about five seconds.
4. Set the zoom box size by moving the trackball. When the box is
displayed at the required size left click. The window zooms to the
selected area, the scale ratio changes in accordance with the size
of the zoom area and the TM limits are switched off.
5. To re-apply TM limits click on TM Limits Off in the upper toolbar,
or to re-apply TM limits and centre own ship click on the Centre
button in the lower toolbar.

3-46 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Scale Bar
At most scale ratios a vertical bar indicating the
current scale in nautical miles (NM) is shown on the
left side of the screen. The scale of the bar changes
dependant on the following scale ratios selected:
1. At scale ratios between 1:8,000 to 1:50,000
the bar shows the length of one NM, divided
into 10 equally spaced units
2. At scale ratios between 1:80,000 to 1:5,000,000 the bar
shows the length of 10 NM divided into 5 equally
spaced units
3. At scale ratios of 1:5,000 and below, and 1:8,000,000
and above the NM bar is not shown.

Synthetics Button
All synthetics on the screen can temporarily
suppressed, other than chart data, radar video and
own ship symbol for both primary and secondary chart windows.
To suppress synthetics:
1. Move the cursor to the lower popup toolbar area, left click and hold
the left key down on the Synth On button. The button changes to
Synth Off and all target, range ring and heading line data is
removed from the chart display.
2. To restore all synthetics release the left key on the Synth button.

65900012 3-47
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

Watch Mode
The Watch Mode button at the top right of the screen enables the operator
to change the console view if the system is configured as a Total Watch
To view or change the watch mode right click on the
button. The drop down list shows the watch modes
available with the currently selected watch mode
ticked.
Watch modes unavailable for selection are listed in
orange lettering.
The following Watch Modes are supported:
Chart Radar
ECDIS
Conning Information Display (CID)
The availability of the product presentations listed above is dependant on
the product type installed at initialisation.
Products not available from the Watch Mode list can be purchased from
your VisionMaster FT supplier.
Total Watch Features
When a watch mode is changed on a Total Watch product, certain settings
made that are common to Radar/Chart Radar and ECDIS are retained
across modes. These common settings include:
Transmit/Standby
Target Display and Target Tracking
AIS On/Off
Acquisition Zones
Chart Depths
EBLs and VRMs
Functional aspects that are specifically not shared across watch modes
include stabilisation mode (water/ground based) and presentation settings,
including presentation mode, motion mode, centre and max view.
If CID mode is selected the display retains the Alarm Status Indicator and
the Watch Mode button. Alarms can be raised when in CID mode that may
not relate directly to the CID. For information on the CID, see Chapter 7,
Conning Information Display in the VisionMaster Ship's Manual.

3-48 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Safety Checking
The safety checking facility provides the
operator with advanced warning that
own ship may be headed towards
objects that could endanger the safety
8
of own ship, as indicated in the ENC or
mariner object database.
The system periodically searches the
chart database and mariner objects
database for objects that could
endanger the safety of own ship.
Contours, prohibited areas, and areas with special conditions are
considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety depth or
no depth is defined for that object.
All objects above the water are considered dangerous if their clearance is
less than own ship safety height. When an object currently not in the list of
dangerous objects intersects own ship's safety region, the object is added
to the dangerous objects list, which defines dangerous objects as either
`Chart Dangers' or `Chart Cautions', see Dangers.
The safety depth and height for each object are checked against the default
depth, height and contour settings in the Chart Depths/Heights window, see
Chart Depths/Heights.
The proximity of dangers to own ship is indicated by the safety
check icon at the top right of the upper toolbar. When there are no
dangerous objects in the Dangers list the background colour of the icon is
shown in the system colour; when one or more items are added to the
Dangers list the icon colour changes to red (for Chart Dangers) or yellow
(for Chart Cautions).
In addition to the safety check icon, when items are added to the Dangers
list the Alarms button shows the message Chart Dangers on a red flashing
background colour (see Alarm Status Indicator) if the items are defined as
dangers. If the Dangers list defines the items only as cautions the Alarm
Status Indicator will not raise an alarm unless the Alarms On Cautions
check box has been ticked in the Dangers sub menu, see Dangers in
Chapter 3 Charts.

8
Electronic Nautical Chart. Chart data conforming to specification published in IHO Special
Publication No. 57 (S57). Charts complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.

65900012 3-49
Basic Operation of ECDIS ECDIS User Guide

WARNING!

The ability to detect chart dangers is reliant on the quality

of the data contained in the loaded and enabled chart
database. The operator needs to be aware of the quality of
the database presently loaded and enabled for the
operating area, and always keep the database updated. In
addition the operator must always set the look ahead time
to an appropriate value considering operational
parameters such as ship's speed, stopping distance and
general ability to manoeuvre. In addition to the own ship
based safety checking the operator should review the
dangers list provided on the Dangers tab of the Monitor
Route menu whenever a new route is loaded, and
periodically during the route when progressing to new
legs, see Monitor Route - Dangers. The route-based region
checked uses the XTE alarm limit which is typically much
wider than the ownship safety region, and therefore can
indicate the available corridor for safe deviation from the
route on either side of the track line.
It is particularly important that the operator be aware that:
1. The ownship based safety checking is the only
safety checking provided when making a deviation
on a temporary route. The temp route does NOT
apply a safety checking region based on the XTE
limit as the saved/named route does. The dangers
list provided on the Route Monitor 'Dangers' tab
are for the permanent route only.
2. The ownship safety checking is done periodically,
and a new search for dangers may not occur for as
much as 30 seconds after adjusting the look ahead
time. Therefore the operator needs to allow time
for the checking to be performed, before re-
adjusting the setting. In particular the operator
should avoid increasing the setting and then very
quickly decreasing the setting because the search
using the longer look ahead may not execute, and
the list of dangers would not update to reflect the
longer search.

3-50 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Basic Operation of ECDIS

Multi-node Support
For any set of communicating nodes, the system chooses one of the nodes
in the set to perform own ship safety checking. The following safety
checking parameters can be specified on any node and then synchronized
between all nodes:
Safety depth (see Chart Depths/Heights)
Safety height (see Chart Depths/Heights)
Look ahead time (see Dangers)
Each node in the system only lists the objects of concern detected by own
ship safety checking the charts on that node. The periodic own ship safety
checking is triggered on all nodes at the same time.

65900012 3-51
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chapter 4 Charts
This section covers all aspects of chart information. The following topics
are covered.
a description of charts, including chart types, chart rendering,
factors that may affect chart accuracy and indications of chart
overscale, see About Charts.
using charts in raster format, see Using Raster Charts.
match the chart with the radar video, display update summaries,
install charts from an installer utility, and display chart permissions,
see Tools.
configure the display settings for the chart, see Settings.
change default chart contour and depth settings, see Chart
Depths/Heights.
specify the order in which charts engines are used for rendering, or
disable configured chart engines, see Databases.
view detailed read-only information about the chart currently
displayed, see Legend.
manage manual updates to charts, see Manual Chart Update.
highlight and view information on specific chart areas and
geographic objects, see Chart Query.
view and mark a list of potential chart dangers that own ship is
headed towards on present course, see Dangers.
access to the Chart 1 Catalog and Color Diagram.

65900012 4-1
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Accessing Charts Menus

You can access the charts sub-menus in one
of two ways:
Left click on the Charts button in the
main menu list to display the sub menu
options.
Or:
Click on the Chart button in the upper
toolbar (see Chart Type & Sub Menu
Selection in Chapter 3, Basic
Operation). The Chart button identifies
the currently loaded chart engine (e.g.
C-MAP or S-57) and the chart depth
units used (i.e. meters). From the drop
down list select the chart sub-menu
required, which will appear as a movable
window on the display.

4-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

About Charts
Chart Types
The VisionMaster ECDIS has the capability of displaying charts in a
number of formats on all presentation windows.
Chart types are divided into two basic categories:
Vector charts: vector chart data is stored in a chart database. The
chart is drawn on screen based on processing of the various stored
data elements. Vector chart types include S57 ENC (SevenCs) and
C-MAP charts.
Raster charts: the chart shows a scanned version of a traditional
paper chart, with the chart images stored as graphic files. Raster
chart types include ARCS (supported by the SevenCs chart engine).
When S57 charts are installed, the ENC data undergoes a conversion
process. The result of this conversion is the creation of the System
Electronic Nautical Chart (SENC) database. It is this database that is
accessed and displayed by ECDIS.
Chart Rendering
9
The rendering of Chart data adheres to the z-order guidelines, allowing for
radar video to be inserted in the proper z-order such that `suppressed'
chart objects appear below the radar video, and `over radar' chart objects
appear above the radar video.
Factors affecting Chart Accuracy
A position plotted on a navigational chart is only as good as the accuracy of
the chart. Therefore it is important to understand the factors which may limit
the accuracy of both raster and vector charts. These factors are detailed
below.

9
The term `Z-order' refers to the order of objects along the Z-axis. In coordinate geometry, X
typically refers to the horizontal axis (left to right), Y to the vertical axis (up and down), and Z
to the axis perpendicular to the other two (forward or backward). One can think of the windows
in a display as a series of planes parallel to the surface of the monitor. The windows are
therefore stacked along the Z-axis, and the Z-order information thus specifies the front-to-back
ordering of the windows on the screen.

65900012 4-3
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Survey Data
Vector charts are generally based on recent hydrographic survey data.
However, depending upon the geographic location, these charts may
sometimes use old survey data where more recent surveys do not exist.
Chart Datum
The chart datum is the mathematical model used by a chart maker to map
the earth’s surface. VisionMaster FT uses the datum known as World
Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) Ellipsoid Earth model. Charts and all
chart objects are displayed using the WGS-84 datum whenever possible.
While WGS-84 is the present standard for accurate mapping and display of
position information, there are hundreds of datums in use, and each makes
different assumptions about the exact size and shape of the earth. This
means that a given latitude and longitude can correspond to different
locations when plotted on charts that are derived from different datums. It is
therefore important to be aware of the datum of the displayed chart.
If a chart is based on another datum, the system offsets the chart to WGS-
84, if the offset to WGS-84 is known and provided in the chart file. Offset
correction values used for the chart are computed as average values for
the entire chart. These correction values may not be perfectly accurate
throughout the geographical area covered by the chart. Datum
discrepancies become more important when using larger-scale charts.
When displaying a chart that was created using a datum other than WGS-
84, a warning displays information about the chart’s datum. The Chart
Legend window also shows the datum of the displayed chart, see Legend
Component.
Codes used to identify various known chart datums are listed in Appendix B
– Chart Datum Codes.
Compilation Scale
Chart data is compiled at a specific scale, based upon the hydrographic
data from which the chart was created. This scale is called the chart’s
compilation scale, indicating the level of detail that is available on the chart.
When chart sets are first selected for display, they are displayed at their
compilation scale.
A chart set's compilation scale is shown in the drop down list of the Charts
button (see Chart Database & Sub Menu Selection in Chapter 3), the
Component tab folder of the Legend menu, (see Legend Component)

4-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

under Chart Usage/Scale, and Chart Index, which shows the scale and
other details of all chart sets in a selected chart database.
When the scale ratio is selected at a larger scale than the chart's
compilation scale a permanent prompt appears with the message `Chart
Overscale', see `Navigation Purpose’ below.
Navigational Purpose
In addition to the compilation scale, the level of detail and expected
accuracy available on a chart is also related to its navigational purpose. For
example, Harbour, Approach, Coastal or General. A chart's navigational
purpose is shown in the Component tab of the Legend sub menu, (see
Legend Component) under Chart Usage/Scale, and under Chart Index.
Chart Overscale
There are two ways in which the system indicates that chart data is being
displayed at a larger scale than its compilation scale: the overscale prompt
and the overscale pattern.
Overscale Prompt
The Chart Overscale prompt is shown
when the scale of the display is larger
than the compilation scale of the displayed chart at the screen centre. For
example, the chart overscale prompt will be shown if the scale ratio is set to
1:20,000 and the displayed chart at screen centre has a compilation scale
of 1:25,000. The scale of each chart can be viewed in the Chart Index
window, see Tools.
In most cases, the display is covered by several chart sets. The chart
overscale prompt is based on the largest scale chart set under the centre
point of the display, which is displayed in parentheses in the prompt.
Overscale Pattern
The overscale pattern is displayed over
charts if the scale ratio of the display is more
than double the compilation scale of any
charts in the display. For example, if the
compilation scale of the displayed chart set is
1:75,000 and the scale ratio is set to
1:30,000 or less.
The overscale pattern is a series of closely
aligned dotted vertical lines across the whole
of the chart display.

65900012 4-5
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Chart One Presentation Library

The Chart One Presentation Library contains an index of chart symbols, as
used on vector charts, see Chart 1.

Using Raster Charts

Description
Raster-format charts are produced by scanning paper nautical charts, with
the chart images then stored as electronic files. Multiple charts are
generally distributed on a single CD-ROM, with each disk representing a
chart volume, covering a large geographic area. Each individual chart
within a chart volume is identified separately by name.
Since a raster chart is based on an image of a paper chart, the electronic
version of the chart shows all information, such as buoys, lighthouses, and
pilot stations that appear on the paper chart. Because the chart is not
based on an underlying database, individual chart features cannot be
turned on and off.

4-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Selecting Raster Charts

The selection of raster charts is available from the Chart button on the
upper toolbar, providing raster charts have been configured in the
Configuration tool (see Chapter 4, `Configuration' in the VisionMaster FT
Ship's Manual) and a set of raster charts installed on the system via the
Chart Installation facility (see Chapter 6, `Chart Installation' in the
VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual).

Raster charts are available in the ARCS format under the SevenCs chart
engine.
Listed below the SevenCs - ARCS database are all the available chart sets
within an area of own ship, or if own ship isn't on the display, the charts
available at the centre of the screen.
Each chart is defined with a fixed scale ratio and a brief description of the
area the chart covers. When a raster chart is selected the chart is ticked on
the drop down list, the chart button shows the chart type and depth unit, i.e.
ARCS - Metres and the chart is displayed on screen.
A permanent prompt `Primary Display in RCDS mode' is displayed when
raster charts are enabled.
The following functions are available when a raster chart is displayed:
Centre and Maximum View
Off Centre, Pan and Goto
Chart Query
Manual Chart Update - Vector chart symbols may be superimposed
over a raster chart. These chart symbols may be edited and
queried in the same way as on vector charts.

65900012 4-7
Charts ECDIS User Guide

The following functions are NOT available when a raster chart is displayed:
changing Presentation Mode - North Up will be the only available
presentation mode when raster charts are selected.
changing the shallow/deep shading values, see Chart
Depths/Heights.
Notes on the displayed raster chart may be accessed and viewed via the
Notes tab in the Legend sub-menu. For information, see Legend, Notes.
When raster charts are displayed, the Details tab of Chart
Legend can be quickly accessed by left clicking on the STD
button in the lower popup toolbar.

4-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Tools
Tools is the opening sub-menu on the Charts
menu. From Tools you can select the
following functions:
Chart Match - correct the display of
any discrepancies between the radar
video and the chart, see Chart
Match.
Chart Updates Summary - display a
chart updates summary in a separate
window, see Chart Updates
Summary.
Chart Installation - enables the
installation of C-MAP and/or
SevenCs charts onto the system
from a separate chart installer utility.
Charts can be installed from a DVD,
CD or a USB key. If the chart type
supports network installation, then
charts can be installed from any
node of the system.

For information on the Chart Installer

Utility see Chapter 6 `Chart
Installation' in the VisionMaster Ship's Manual.

CAUTION:

Switching to the Chart Installer utility requires shutting

down the VisionMaster FT system.

Chart Permissions - displays chart license and permit expiration

on installed charts, and enables an S-63 permit file or a 7Cs
hardware ID or an ARCS user permit to be exported to an external
drive, see Chart Permissions.
Chart Index - displays details of all chart sets for a selected chart
database, see Chart Index.

65900012 4-9
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Tool Functions
Chart Match
The Chart Match facility allows the operator to correct a discrepancy
between the radar video and the chart display. By selecting the radar
object and the chart object to be matched, an offset can be created that is
applied to the chart display. This offset persists until the chart match is
cancelled, or until all the chart cells displayed on the screen at the time of
the selection are no longer on the screen.
Chart Match includes the capability to specify a range and bearing
adjustment to be applied to any loaded chart in order to alter the chart’s
relative position to the own ship’s CCRP plotted position.
The operator specifies the range and bearing adjustment by selecting two
points on the chart display.
To reposition the chart do the following:
1. Click on the Select Points button in
the Chart Match area. The fields below
prompt to click on a chart object and
the Select Points button changes to
Cancel Selection.
2. To cancel the chart match click on the
button, or to proceed move the cursor
into the chart display, the cursor
displays CM below the cross hair.
3. Click on the required chart object. The lower field in Chart Match
prompts to click on a Radar Object.
4. Click on the radar object (return). The
Chart Match fields change to displaying
the position (nautical miles and bearing)
of the chart object and the Chart Match
Applied tick box becomes active.
5. Tick the Chart Match Applied check
box. The chart is shifted so that the
radar return and the chart object are
displayed at the same location on the display.
6. To return to the previous chart position untick the Chart Match
Applied box.

4-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart Updates Summary

The Chart Updates Summary enables update
information on SevenCs chart databases, and
updates made by the operator using manual
chart update to be displayed in a separate
window.
To access the window click the Show Summary button. A Charts Update
Summary window appears displaying details (if any) of chart updates on
the currently loaded SevenCs chart database. Click on the drop down list to
select another SevenCs database.

The information shown in the summary report for each of the update files is
dependant on the chart database selected. For an S-57 database the
following columns are shown:
Reference name of the chart
Issuing Authority
Chart issue date
Application date and time
Chart edition number
Chart update number
Number of actions associated with a chart update
Chart update type (Manual or Automatic)
Status of the update (Applied, Rejected, or Deleted)
Chart errors detected.
For ARCS charts the name and issuing authority columns are replaced with
a Chart column, which lists the chart set description and reference number.

65900012 4-11
Charts ECDIS User Guide

If an update is not properly applied or the update is out of sequence the

update is terminated, the update rejection is logged by the system and a
warning of this action is shown.
To sort the list into required priorities click on a column button. For
example, to sort by issue date click on the Issue Date button, all chart
updates are displayed from either the earliest or latest date.
Viewing Manual Chart Updates

To view a summary of chart updates made by the operator, select Manual

Chart Update from the drop down list. The subsequent window shows the
following columns:
Chart Name
Chart Edition
Update Date
Update Type
Update Action
Status
Click the Refresh Updates button to update the list to include in the list
chart updates made on other nodes.
C-MAP Updates
For CMAP charts, the system provides automatic registration of the
databases and a record of updates is kept in the CMAP database.

4-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart Permissions
The Chart Permissions area includes the
following access buttons:
Show Permissions
Export S-63 Permit
Export 7Cs Hardware ID
Export ARCS User Permit
Show Permissions
Information on chart license and
permit expiration can be viewed by
clicking on the Show Permissions
button. A tabular window appears
over the chart display with the
following columns:
License
Expiration Date
Region (C-MAP only)
License Type (ARCS only)
The term License is applicable for CMAP charts only, for S-63 charts the
term Cell Permit is applicable.
A SevenCs S-63 permit and an ARCS User Permit are pieces of
information that are intended to provide additional system protection and
authorisation for the chart database. The operator is required to send the
permit file to a chart data provider (e.g. UKHO) in order to activate an S-63
or ARCS account. Both permit numbers are based on the Sperry Security
block PIN.
When a chart license or permit is about to expire a warning is generated. If
the CMAP license has expired the system stops displaying the respective
charts. The system will accept new licenses and cell permits using
electronic media. For details on installing charts see Chapter 6 - Chart
Installation in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.

65900012 4-13
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Export S-63 Permit

To export an S-63 permit file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a memory stick, into a USB port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export S-63 Permit button.
The subsequent window displays the
external disk drive and prompts to
choose the location to export the S-63
permit.
3. Navigate to the location where you want
the permit exported to by clicking on the
+ button to the left of the directory
folder.
4. To enter a filename for the permit click
in the Filename field and enter a name
using the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted and
a name entered click the Export button,
the S-63 permit is exported to the
location as a .txt file. If successful a
temporary prompt is displayed
confirming that the permit has been
exported with the selected location detailed in the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.
Once installed S-63 charts will be displayed even if cell permits have
expired.

4-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Export 7Cs Hardware ID

To export a 7Cs Hardware ID file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a memory stick, into a USB port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export 7Cs Hardware ID
button. The subsequent window
displays the external disk drive and
prompts to choose the location to
export the hardware ID file.
3. Navigate to the location where you
want the file exported to by clicking on
the + button to the left of the directory
folder.
4. To enter a name for the ID file click in
the Filename field and enter a name
using the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted and
a name entered click the Export
button, hardware ID file is exported to
the location as a .txt file. If successful a
temporary prompt is displayed
confirming that the file has been
exported with the selected location detailed in the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.

65900012 4-15
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Export ARCS User Permit

To export an ARCS User Permit do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a memory stick, into a USB port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export ARCS User
Permit button. The subsequent window
displays the external disk drive and
prompts to choose the location to
export the permit file.
3. Navigate to the location on the external
drive where you want the file exported
to by clicking on the + button to the left
of the directory folder.
4. Enter a name for the ID file by clicking
in the Filename field and enter a name
using the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted and
a name entered click the Export
button. The ARCS user permit is
generated based on information in the
Sperry security block. The user permit
is a 16 character text file. If successful
a temporary prompt is displayed confirming that the file has been
exported
6. To cancel the export operation click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.

4-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart Index
Chart Index catalogues each chart set for all loaded chart databases. The
Index facility includes the option to move the display location to any
selected chart set.
To access the Chart Index click on the Show Index button. A tabular chart
index window appears over the chart display.

The chart sets are listed in their respective databases. The database list in
the Chart Index may be reversed by clicking on the Database field. The
index shows the name of each chart set. Vector chart names (SevenCs, C-
MAP etc.) are based on their ENC alphanumeric code; raster chart names
(ARCS) include a short description of the location covered. Other details
include the chart set's compilation scale (see Chart Facility) and their usage
level, e.g. Overview, Berthing etc.
When the Chart Index window is first opened
no chart outlines are displayed unless Draw
Chart Outlines is updated.
To display the chart sets for a specific
database, click on the Draw Chart Outlines
drop down arrow and select the required chart
database from the list. The display will show
the coverage of the chart sets within the
current display area as a series of red chart
boundary rectangles.

65900012 4-17
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Go To Chart
The Go to Selected Chart feature works in a similar way to the GoTo
function (see Off Centre, Pan and Goto), which enables the centre of the
chart display to be moved to known locations or a specific location.
To display a particular chart set, select the chart by clicking on its selection
box to the left of the list. The selected chart set is highlighted in the Index.

The Go To Selected Chart button only changes the displayed

location. It will not necessarily display the selected chart if its
database is not currently enabled. If a different chart database is
enabled, the operator will need to select the desired chart from the
Chart button drop down list.

Click on the Go To Selected Chart button, the

display is re-drawn to the selected chart and the
chart set boundary is shown as a cross hatch.
TM limits are switched off and the motion mode
button displays TM Limits Off.
TM limits are re-enabled and the navigation
chart displayed when the Centre button or
motion mode button are is clicked.

4-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Settings
The Settings sub-menu enables you to select the following functions:
Filter - choose the chart feature set (Base, Standard or Other) to
display, see Feature Set.
Select Custom Features - choose from a list of chart format
features, additional to those displayed on the currently selected
feature set, Setting Custom Chart Features.
In addition to the access options described in Chart Facility,
the Settings sub-menu can be quickly accessed by right
clicking on the STD button in the lower popup toolbar.
Feature Set
The selection in the Features Set defines the
behaviour used by the chart engine when
rendering chart data.
VisionMaster FT includes the following three
types of chart feature filters:
Base
Standard (default feature filter)
Other.
Some features are common across chart formats, while others are
particular to a specific format. A chart feature set can be customised by
applying specifically selected features. To apply custom features to any
chart set tick the Apply Custom Features check box and select the chart
features to be applied from Setting Custom Chart Features.
Base
The Base feature filter is the minimum allowable feature, permanently
retained on the display, consisting of:
Coastline (high water);
Own ship's safety contour;
Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the
safety contour which lie within the waters defined by the safety
contour;

65900012 4-19
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Indication of isolated dangers which lie within the water defined by the
safety contour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc. Isolated dangers
include buoys, beacons and whether or not these are being used as aids to
navigation.
Traffic routing systems;
Scale, range, orientation and display mode; units of depth and
height.
Standard
The Standard feature filter includes all features defined by Base plus
additional features, consisting of:
Drying line;
Indication of fixed and floating aids to navigation;
Boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.;
Visual and radar conspicuous features;
Prohibited and restricted areas;
Chart scale boundaries;
Indication of cautionary notes.
Other
The Other feature filter allows the display of all remaining chart features.
The following features are examples of those allowed by the Other filter,
additional to those allowed by the Standard filter:
Any Standard set features;
Spot soundings;
Submarine cables and pipelines;
Ferry routes;
Details of all isolated dangers;
Details of aids to navigation;
Contents of cautionary notes;
ENC edition date;
Geodetic datum;
Magnetic variation;
Graticule;
Place names.

4-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Setting Custom Chart Features

The custom features area of the Settings
menu lists the features available for all
configured chart databases. If the system is
running both C-MAP and SevenCs chart
engines, then custom features applicable for
each chart database in the chart engine may
be selected.
To enable a custom feature on the chart tick
the Apply Custom Features check box. The
screen briefly refreshes and the list of
custom features below the check box can be
selected.

When the Apply Custom Features

check box is not ticked, the default
features for the selected filter are
used.

To expand the list click the + button next to

the chart engine name, or to contract click
the - button.
The list of custom chart features in
Settings is reflected in the Selection
tab folder when a profile has been created from the current settings
in the System, User Profiles menu, see User Profiles.
When the cursor moves over a feature it is highlighted and a brief
description of the feature appears at the bottom of the window.
SevenCs Specific Features
In the SevenCs chart databases (e.g. S-57, S-63 and VPF), custom
features include the selection of a text scale, which defines the size of the
text on the chart.
The chart text scaling defaults to 2:0. To change the scaling click in the
Text Scale field and move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase
the scaling. The text scale values range from 1:0 to 2:5.

65900012 4-21
Charts ECDIS User Guide

CMAP Specific Features

If CMAP chart format is enabled the custom features includes the selection
of lights visible sectors and range units.
Lights visible sectors enable the display of visible sectors and range of
coastal lights, for example lighthouses and harbour lights. The selection of
light colour display is available in white, red, and green, a combination of
the three or all colours.
To change the lights visible sectors from the
default None, click in on the drop down arrow
and select from the colour list. If All is
selected then all colours in the range will be
displayed.
The light sector will be shown only if the actual
light source is visible on the chart display. For
example, on a higher scale ratio where the
coastline is visible, the light sectors emanating
from coastal lighthouses will be shown on screen; at lower ranges where
the light source is not shown on the chart display the light sector will not be
visible.

4-22 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart Depths/Heights
The chart depths/heights window enables you
to change the default settings of own ship's
safety depth/height and shallow/deep shading
contours.
On a multi-node system any changes made in
Chart Depths/Heights are distributed and
persisted across all nodes.

CAUTION:

Changes made to shallow/deep shading values are highlighted on

vector charts only (e.g. C-MAP or S-57). Raster charts contour
areas cannot be adjusted in this way.

Safety Depth and Height

The safety depth is the minimum depth required by an underwater object
for own ship to pass over safely. The minimum depth is the distance from
the water surface to bottom of own ship's keel plus own ships safety buffer
(usually calculated at half the ship's beam). The defined safety depth value
is reflected in the Legend Detail tab folder.
The safety height is the minimum distance required by an overhead
obstruction for own ship to pass under safely. The minimum height is the
distance from own ship's highest point to the lowest point of the overhead
obstruction. The default values for Safety Depth and Height are 30 metres.

65900012 4-23
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Shallow and Deep Contours

The Deep Contour and Shallow Contour areas are highlighted on the Chart
display by colour shading, with the shallow water areas indicated by lighter
shades. Contours, prohibited areas, and areas with special conditions are
considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety depth or
no depth is defined for that object.

WARNING!

The chart shading based on the defined contours may not

always be accurate due to the geometry of the depth
contours in the area, as well as limitations in the system
chart data at any given time. These limitations may include
non-availability of user-specified depth contours,
variances between data content on overlapping chart
cells, and other data issues. The operator must take these
factors into account and use all available sources of
information regarding depth, as appropriate to the
navigation area.

For an illustration of deep and shallow contour areas on a chart display,

refer to Legend Chart.
The default value for shallow contour is 2 metres
(maximum value = default Safety Depth).
The default value for deep contour is 30 metres
(minimum value = default Safety Depth).

If the Chart Depths/Heights settings are changed the new values

are persisted and used as the start-up values from that point on.

When own ship's safety depth is changed the deep/shallow contour colours
may change although the contour outlines will remain on the chart display.
Changing Chart Depth/Height Values
To change the default values click in the required field and move the
trackball left to decrease the value or right to increase. Click the left key
again to set the value.
The contour and depth values set for the selected chart set are also shown
in the Legend sub menu, see Legend Chart.

4-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Databases
The Databases window lists all the currently
enabled and (if applicable) any disabled chart
databases. It also enables the system to
automatically select the most suitable chart
database for the display area.
When the system is in its initial state, i.e. the first
time the system is run, all chart databases that
have been configured for the system are listed
as enabled.
Enabling and Disabling Databases
The chart databases are listed in the Enabled
field in the order in which they will be used for
rendering chart data. The databases with the
highest priority are listed at the top of the
Enabled field and the lowest priority at the
bottom. The higher a chart database appears in
the enabled list the sooner it will be selected for
rendering.
To change the chart database priority, or to
disable or enable a chart database do the
following.
To change the chart database order of priority:
1. Click on a chart database in the Enabled list, if the database is
neither at the top or bottom of the list then both the Up button and
Down button to the right of the list become available.
2. Click on the Up or Down button to move the position of the chart
database within the list.
To disable or enable a chart database:
1. To disable, click on the database in the enablement list and click
the Down button between the Enabled and Disabled fields. The
database is moved to the Disabled list.
2. To enable a previously disabled chart database click on the
database in the disablement list and click the Up button between
the Enabled and Disabled fields. The database is moved to the
Enabled list.

65900012 4-25
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Enabling Auto Scale Preferences

When automatic chart database selection is enabled for a display area, the
system periodically searches all enabled databases and automatically
changes the selected database to be the one which provides the largest
scale chart at own ship position. When multiple enabled chart databases
provide a largest scale chart with an identical scale, the chart database with
the highest priority is selected.
To enable Auto Scale Preferences to operate the display must be in Auto
scale mode, see Chapter 3, Scale Ratio.
To enable tick the Allow Automatic Database Selection check box.
Manual Database Selection
When a display is in manual database selection mode, the display area
uses the selected chart database specified in the Chart button, see Chart
Database & Sub Menu Selection
The chart display automatically switches from automatic database selection
mode to manual database selection mode as the result of the following:
The operator manually changes the selected chart database.
Automatic scaling mode becomes disabled.
Supported Chart Engines and Chart Databases
The VisionMaster system supports CMAP and SevenCs chart engines.
The CMAP chart engine supports the following chart databases:
11
CMAP Professional (CD version)
12
CMAP ENC
13
CMAP Professional+ (Upgraded DVD)
The SevenCs chart engine supports the following chart databases:
14
S63 (encrypted S-57)
15
S-57

11
CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format.
12
Official S-57 charts converted to CMAP's proprietary chart database format.
13
Professional+ is an extended version of CM93v3 charts supplied on DVD.
14
Encrypted official chart format, implementation is based on IMO S63 standard.
15
Unencrypted official chart format, implementation based on IHO S57 standard.

4-26 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

16
ARCS (raster format charts)
17
VPF (vector product format)
DirectEnc (ChartWorld).

Official and Unofficial Chart Data

Chart databases may be classified as Official or Unofficial chart data.
Official chart data is known as Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) data. All
official ENC chart data must comply with data standards set by members of
the International Hydrographic Organisation (IHO) and published in their
document S-57, Edition 3.
An unofficial chart database is data which does not comply with the S-57
Edition 3 document.
An Unofficial Data permanent prompt is displayed whenever chart data
from an unofficial source is displayed. Unofficial data is not certified for safe
navigational and the operator should refer to paper charts for unofficial data
regions.
SevenCs supports both official and unofficial data. The official boundary
line is always displayed to distinguish official and unofficial data, unless it
has been explicitly disabled by the operator using the `Official Boundary'
custom chart setting for the SevenCs engine, see Settings.
All C-Map data is considered unofficial.
The unofficial data prompts are as follows:
Unofficial Data in Primary Display
Unofficial Data in Secondary Display

16
Admiralty Raster Chart Service. Suppliers of raster format electronic charts with world
coverage, in the HCRF format.
17
Unofficial chart format. The content, format, and structure of VPF are specified by the MIL-
STD-2407.

65900012 4-27
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Legend
The Legend sub menu enables you to view read only information on every
chart cell currently visible on the screen.
The Legend window is divided into four tab folders:
Select
Detail
Update
Notes
Legend Select
The Select folder displays the names of all
the chart sets currently displayed on the
screen. From this folder you can choose the
chart set whose legend information will be
displayed in the Detail folder, see Legend
Detail.
The available chart sets are listed in Chart engine (C-MAP or SevenCs)
folders.
The set of chart cells displayed in the Select folder will automatically update
itself to match the cells most recently displayed on the screen.
Legend Detail
The Detail folder displays all the chart legend
information on the chart cell selected from
the Select folder, see Select.
The information displayed in the Detail folder
is divided into the following sections:
Chart Usage/Scale
Contours/Depths
Format/Date/Provider
Geodesy
Units
To view the read-only information on each section click on the + box.
If there is no chart data available for the geographical region being viewed,
all component fields show No Chart Available.

4-28 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart Usage / Scale

The chart usage scale displays the
navigational purpose (e.g. Harbour) and
scale of the selected chart set (see
Compilation Scale in Chart Facility).
Contours / Depths
The Contours/Depths information includes
depth and contour values for the selected
chart set based on the requested values from
the Chart Depths/Heights window.
The contours of the chart set will always
increase to a higher value than the minimum
values set in Chart Depths/Heights. For
example, if the Deep Contour value is
increased from the default of 30 metres to a
value ranging from 31 to 50 metres then the
Deep Contour read-only value will display 50.
Deep Contour and Shallow Contour
All vector charts contain information about the contour and shape of the
sea floor at a particular depth, this information is called Depth Contour.
Each chart contains depth contour information with varying levels of detail
based on the survey that was originally performed to create the chart. One
chart may have a set of contours for 3 metre, 5 metre, 8 metre, 10 metre,
and 15 metre depths. A less detailed chart might only have contour
information for 5 metre and 30 metre depths.
The deep and shallow contour values are only applicable when four depth
shades are enabled in Setting Custom Chart Features (i.e. Two Shade
Depths is unchecked in Custom Features). When four depth shades are
used there are different shades for `very shallow' waters and `very deep'
waters. The deep contour and shallow contour define where the shading
on the chart image will change.
Safety Contour
The safety contour value defines which of the depth contours available in
the chart will be selected as the actual safety contour that is displayed in
the chart legend. This safety contour is displayed on the chart with a
bold/emphasized line; this line defines the area that the ship can never
safely cross. For further emphasis the water that is deeper than the actual
safety contour is displayed in a different colour to the water shallower than
the actual safety contour.

65900012 4-29
Charts ECDIS User Guide

The safety contour value is defined by the operator selected safety depth
value in Chart Depths/Heights. The actual safety contour value is always
greater than or equal to the requested safety depth value. If the defined
safety depth value is not available in the chart, the next deeper contour is
selected. If no contour is available in the chart that is equal to or deeper
than the requested safety depth, there is effectively is no applicable safety
contour for that chart and the legend shows No Contour Available.
Safety Depth
The safety depth is the depth threshold at which spot soundings should be
displayed with or without emphasis. The Safety Depth value set in Chart
Depth/Heights is reflected in the Safety Depth field.
The illustration below shows a typical chart annotated with contour areas
and safety depth areas.

Format / Date / Provider

The Format / Date /Provider displays data on the chart set's data format,
data provider, edition and update information.
Geodesy
The Geodesy section provides datum information (WGS84) and WGS84
shift Lat/Long data. A warning is displayed if RNC data is not referenced to
WGS-84 geodetic data.
Units
Units shows the chart depth and height units (defaults to metres).

4-30 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Legend Updates
The Update folder displays the date and time
of any updates applied to the selected chart
cell.
Each update can be expanded by clicking on
the Edition + box, respective update actions
will be shown in the update tree.
Details for a particular chart update action
can be viewed by selecting it in the tree.
The action details are listed at the bottom of
the window.
On CMAP ENC charts, the chart object
associated with the update action can be
highlighted on the display by ticking the
Highlighting On check box.

Notes
The Notes tab in the Legend sub menu
is a raster specific feature. It is used to
browse pictorial metadata available for
the raster chart being viewed.
With a raster chart displayed, click on
the Notes tab, a list of data relevant to
the chart is shown.
To view the specific data on each note
(for example, information from a tidal
streams station) click on the item in the
list. A popup Chart Note Viewer window
appears displaying details on the
selected note.

65900012 4-31
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Manual Chart Update

The manual chart update facility enables the
operator to add chart objects to the currently
enabled chart.
Added chart objects are displayed using the
same symbology as ENC chart data but
with a manual update symbol
superimposed.
An example of a manual update symbol on
a chart object is shown below.

The Manual Chart Update sub-menu

includes the following tab folders:
Display - enables the selection of
chart update types and layers to be
displayed.
Edit - enables you to Create a
Chart Update and Modify a Chart Update.
Layers - enables the management of layers used for grouping
manual chart updates.
I/O (import/export) - enables importing or exporting of chart
updates.
Archived - enables updates that have been deleted in the past
three months to be restored.
Multi-node Support
On a multi-node system manual chart updates are saved and retrieved
from a database and may be distributed and available among all system
nodes.

4-32 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Manual Chart Update Functions

Chart Layers
The Layers tab enables you to create, edit, and delete layers. Layers
provide a way to group sets of related manual chart updates, see Create
Chart Update. Groupings may be made based on different criteria such as
geographic region, time period, navigational mode, or danger classification.
The display of chart updates within layers can be controlled from the
Display folder, see Displayed Chart Updates.
Chart updates can also be imported or exported based on their layer
grouping, see Importing or Exporting Chart Updates.
To create, rename or delete a chart layer do the following:
To create a new layer:
1. Click in the Layer Name: field, the screen keypad appears.
2. Using the keypad enter a name for
the layer and click the Add New
Layer button. The layer name
appears in the Layers list. If more
than one layer is created the field
lists the layers alpha-numerically.
3. To enter a description of the layer
click in the Layer Description field
and enter a description using the
screen keypad.
To delete a layer:
1. Select the layer from the list and
click the Delete Selected Layer
button, a delete confirmation window
appears.
2. To confirm layer deletion click the
Yes button, or to cancel the deletion
click the No button. The layer is
removed from the list when deleted.
To rename a layer:
1. Select the layer from the list enter the new name in the Layer
Name: field as described above, and click the Rename Selected
Layer button, a rename confirmation window appears.
2. To confirm the layer rename click the Yes button, or to cancel click
the No button. The selected layer is renamed in the list.

65900012 4-33
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Edit Chart Update

The Edit tab folder is divided into two areas:
Create Chart Update and Modify Chart
Update.
The Create Chart Update area includes the
following links:
Create New object
Add Annotation Mark
Add Deletion Mark
The Modify Chart Update area includes the
following links:
View/Edit Chart Update
Delete Chart Update

Create and Modify Chart Updates

Create Chart Update
The Create Chart Update area of the Edit tab
folder enables you to do the following:
Create New Object - creates a new
chart object on an existing chart
Add Annotation Mark - adds an
annotation mark to an ENC chart
object
Add Deletion Mark - adds a deletion mark to an ENC chart object.
Create New Object
To create a new chart object onto an existing chart do the following:
1. Click on the Create New Object button. The following screen
allows you to specify details about the object to be created.
2. To associate the update to the chart, tick the Associate with Chart
check box.

Updates that are associated with a chart are only displayed when
that chart is being displayed. Updates that are not associated with
the chart are displayed based on their geographic location,
regardless of which charts are currently loaded.

4-34 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

3. To associate the update to a layer

click on the Layer drop down arrow
and select the from the list. If no chart
layers have been created the update
will associate to the default layer.
4. To select the object type click on the
Type drop down arrow and select
from the list.

The following object types are assigned:

Arcs
Areas
Beacons
Buoys
Danger Points
Lines
Other Points
5. With the object type selected click on
the Symbol/Description drop down
list and select the object symbol. The
field directly underneath the
Symbol/Description drop down list
includes a brief description of the
selected symbol.
6. Move the cursor into the chart display,
the screen cursor displays MO EDIT.
7. Click in the area where you want the object positioned. The object
appears with a white highlighting. Objects with point geometry are
highlighted with a white box, line or area objects are highlighted
with small white circles at their individual points. When the object is
created, more editable fields will become available in the window
such as Position and Notes.
8. To change the object's parameters click in the respective fields.

65900012 4-35
Charts ECDIS User Guide

9. To create the same object, or to add points to a line or area object,

move the cursor to another area of the screen and left click. Each
left click results in a new object of the selected type being created,
or points added to the line or area.
10. If the object type created was an area or a line the window includes
the option of starting a new area or line by clicking on the Start
New Area/Line button.
11. To create a new object with a
manually specified position, click on
the Manually Create... button. The
screen prompts for a LAT / LON
position.
The Manually Create… button can also be used to manually
specify the position of additional points for a line or area objects.
12. Click in the LAT/LON fields, enter a position using the screen
keypad, and click the OK button. A symbol is created in the
position specified.
13. To exit Create New Object click the Done button, the objects
created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Manual
Chart Update menu.
Add Annotation Mark
The Add Annotation Mark feature allows you add a note to an ENC chart
object. The following steps are required:
Select the ENC chart object to annotate using Chart Query
Add a note to the object.
To annotate a chart object do the following:
1. Click on the Add Annotation Mark button, the following screen
prompts to select the chart object to annotate.
2. Click the ENC chart object you want to annotate on the chart
display, and select the object in the Chart Query window. For
details on using the query feature for selection, see the Chart
Query.

4-36 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

3. With the correct object selected click

the OK button, a white box appears
around the chart object with a
symbol next to the object (see below).
The Chart Update View/Edit menu
confirms the annotated symbol status.
Update the Notes field in the window
with the desired annotation
information.

4. To exit Add Annotation Mark click the

Done button, the objects the view
returns to the Edit Chart Update
menu.

Add Deletion Mark

The Add Deletion Mark facility operates in the same way as Add
Annotation Mark. The difference being that the deletion mark is
symbolized with a diagonal orange line through the object.

65900012 4-37
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Modify Chart Update

The Modify Chart Update area of the Edit tab
folder enables you to do the following:
View or Edit a chart update
Delete a chart update
Viewing or Editing a Chart Update
To view or edit a chart update, do the following:
1. Click on the View/Edit Chart Update button. The window prompts
to left click on the object to view/edit.
2. Navigate to the chart object, as the
cursor moves over the object it
changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator.
3. Click on the chart object to be viewed
or edited. The subsequent window
lists the selected object type, symbol
description and its current position.
To edit the object's attributes:
1. Chart updates are associated with the
current chart by default. To
disassociate from the chart, untick the
Associate with Chart check box.
2. To move the object to another layer
click on the Layer drop down arrow
and select from the list of layers.
3. To change the group type click on the
Type drop down arrow and select
from the following:
Arcs
Areas
Beacons
Buoys
Danger Points
Lines
Other points
As the type is changed its graphic symbol also changes in the
symbol/description field and on the display.

4-38 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

4. To change the symbol click on the drop down arrow and select
from the list. The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description
field includes a brief description of the selected symbol.
5. To change the object's position either:
a. click in the LAT/LON fields and enter a position using the
screen keypad; Or
b. When editing a line or area object. Select the specific point
to be edited by moving the cursor over the point and left
clicking. The currently selected point is distinguished by a
red highlight circle.
6. If required, enter notes in the Notes field using the screen keypad.
7. If applicable, other editable fields such as Rotation, Time Label,
and Display Label will be available in this window. Edit these
values by clicking in the desired field.
8. With all object editing complete click on the Done button. The chart
object is updated.
Deleting a Chart Update
To delete a chart update, do the following:
1. Click on the Delete Chart Update
button. The folder prompts to select the
object you wish to delete with a Confirm
on Delete check box. To receive system
prompts to confirm deletion before any
object is deleted tick the check box. If
the box is unticked then objects are
deleted without confirmation.
2. The cursor displays DEL when moved into the chart display. Move
the cursor over the object to be deleted, the cursor lines change
from horizontal and vertical cross hairs to diagonal cross hairs,
indicating a delete action can now be performed.
3. Click on the object to delete it. If the Confirm On Delete check box
is ticked then the screen will prompt you to confirm the deletion. If
the Confirm check box is unticked the object is immediately deleted
from the screen.
4. Click the Done button to return to the Manual Chart Update Edit
sub menu.

65900012 4-39
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Display Chart Updates

The Display tab enables you to select the
layers and object types to be displayed on the
currently enabled chart. Each layer and type
currently displayed will have their check box
ticked.
The Displayed Layers area lists the default
layer and all the operator defined layers
created in Layers.

Objects that were not associated with

a created layer are automatically
associated with the Default layer.

The Displayed Types lists all the object types

that can be selected from the Type drop down
list in the Chart Update Creation window, see
Create Chart Update.
All manual chart updates will be displayed
when all check boxes are ticked. To suppress
the display of a manual chart update for a particular layer or type untick the
respective check box.
To select all chart layers and types for display click the Select All buttons,
to deselect all for display click the Deselect All buttons.

4-40 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Importing or Exporting Chart Updates

The I/O (Import/Export) tab folder enables you to import or export manual
chart updates to and from VisionMaster workstations.
Chart updates not currently on a workstation can be imported from an
external drive, such as a USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk. Manual chart
updates that have been produced on a workstation can be exported to
other workstations via the external drive.
Importing Chart Updates
To import chart updates do the following:
1. Insert a USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk adaptor into the PC. If no
external device has been inserted the window prompts to insert
removable media.
2. Navigate to the directory where
the chart updates reside. The field
below the directory tree will show
any valid object files in the
selected folder.
3. Click on the file to import. The file
identity appears in the Filename
field.
4. Click the Import button to import
the selected file's contents to your
Workstation. If successful a
temporary prompt appears
confirming the import.
5. When complete click the Eject
button before removing the external device.

65900012 4-41
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Exporting Chart Updates

To export chart updates do the following:
1. Select the external drive where the update is to be exported to.
2. Select the export option required by
clicking on the drop arrow in the
Export field, the export options
available are:
All Objects - all manually created
chart update objects on your workstation.
Objects in Area - manually created chart update objects within
a specified geographic area.
Objects in Layer - all manually created chart update objects
on a specific layer.
3. If Objects in Area is selected, the
LAT/LON fields for Southwest corner
and Northeast corner appear with all
values defaulting to zero. Define the
geographic area you want to export
from by clicking in the LAT/LON
position fields and entering values
from the screen keypad.
4. If Objects in Layer is selected, a
layer field with a drop down list
appears, select the layer to be
exported from the list.
5. When the required export options
have been selected name the file to
be exported in the Filename field and
click the Export button. If successful a temporary prompt appears
confirming the export.
6. When complete click the Eject button before removing the external
device.

4-42 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Archived
The Archived tab displays all manually
created chart objects that have been
deleted within the past three months. An
object will only be listed in the Archived tab
folder if it was associated with a Chart, see
Create Chart Update.
The Archived list shows the chart object and
its associated chart cell. To view a detailed
description of each object, highlight the
object line.
To restore objects to the chart tick the
object's Restore check box and then click
the Restore Checked Updates button. The
selected objects are restored to their
original position on the chart.

65900012 4-43
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Chart Query
The Chart Query facility enables the operator to highlight and view detailed
information on specific chart areas and geographic objects in the chart
display.
A chart query can be activated from the Chart
Query Results folder, or by right clicking on a
chart object in the chart display and selecting
Query Chart from the semi-transparent
window. When Query Chart is activated in
this way the query is performed at the right
click position, based on the current set of filter
options, see Query Options. The Chart Query
Results folder will automatically display the
object information when Query Chart is
activated.
When a query is activated the selected object, line or area is highlighted
with a suitable graphic. For a description of the different object types see
Query Results.
The Chart Query sub menu includes the following controls:
display the results of the query and navigate to the next object
start a new query or clear an old query
set the query options.
In addition to right clicking on a chart object the Chart Query
window can be quickly accessed by clicking on the Query
button in the lower popup toolbar area.

4-44 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Query Features
Query Results
The Query Results folder includes an
objects list, information panel, and
navigation controls.
Objects List
The objects list displays a tree view of all
the chart objects. The objects are divided
into the following groups:
Point - includes buoys, beacons,
point dangers, lights, etc.
Area - includes depth areas, land
areas, prohibited areas, anchorage
areas, fishery zones, etc.
Line - includes depth contours,
coastlines, submariner cables, etc.
Cluster - includes echo sounding
spots
To display a listing of all the objects
assigned to each group click on the object
group box in the list.

Information Panel
The information area contains detailed read-only information for the
currently selected object. This includes a description of the type of chart
object selected, its chart position, and its Dataset reference number (the
chart cell displayed at the query position).
The information changes as other objects are selected from the Objects
list.

65900012 4-45
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Selecting an Object for Query

To select a chart object for query, do the following:
1. Right click in the chart display and select Query Chart, the chart
object groups appear in the Results folder with the group the object
is assigned to in highlight.
2. To open the highlighted group list click on the down navigation
arrow.
To navigate from group to group, or within the group list click on the
up/down navigation arrows .
3. The object selected in the Results folder is highlighted on the chart
display with a graphic dependant on the group type selected.

For Points an eight line graphic is drawn around the

selected object with the eighth line being a red
arrow pointing to the centre of the selected object.
Areas are outlined in red and filled with a red
crosshatch pattern, lines are highlighted in red, and
cluster sounding spots are shown as a red circle
with a white outline.
At the bottom of the menu, two controls are provided to control the display
of query results and highlighting. The Query Off button toggles between
On and Off, when activated the screen cursor changes to a ? below the
cross, the next left click enables you to query objects directly on the screen.
After approximately 15 seconds of inactivity, the Query On cursor
times out and reverts to Query Off.
4. To clear all query results from the query menu and also clear any
highlighting from the chart display click the Clear Query button.
Query results and objects highlighted will be cleared automatically
if the scale ratio is changed, or another function is selected.
5. If the selected chart object has an embedded text file or picture file
the Show File button becomes enabled. To view the file click on
Show File, the text file or picture file appears in a separate window
on the chart display

4-46 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Query Options
The Chart Query Options control allows you
to set the following query options:
Filter - search by geometry type
(points, lines, areas and/or 3D and
cluster points)
Area Size - search area as a factor
of scale (small, medium, large)
To include the basic geometry types in chart
queries tick their check box. At least one
check box must be ticked in order to receive
query results.
The Query Area Size control allows you to
select from three different sizes of query
region, all three of which are based on the current selected scale ratio of
the chart display.
The default values for query area size are as follows:
Small = 10% of the scale ratio
Medium = 20% of the scale ratio
Large = 30% of the scale ratio

65900012 4-47
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Dangers
A safety checking feature periodically searches the chart database and
mariner objects database for objects that could endanger the safety of own
ship. For a description of this feature, see Safety Checking.
Safety Checking must be configured as an optional feature in system
configuration before the operator can view chart dangers, see Chapter 4
`Configuration' in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.
When safety checking detects a dangerous object a red flashing `Chart
Dangers' alarm appears in the Alarm Status Indicator and the Dangers icon
to the right of the Alarm Status Indicator is displayed with a red
background.

A list of dangerous objects is shown in the

Dangers window, which can be accessed by
either left clicking on the Dangers icon in the
upper toolbar, or by clicking on Dangers in the
Charts sub menu list.
The list of dangerous objects is divided into
Dangers and Cautions. The objects are
displayed in order of age, with the most recently
to least recently discovered.
Dangerous objects in the list can be viewed in a
number of ways, either:
1. Click on the individual items within the
list;
2. Navigate up and down the list using the
up/down arrows;
3. To mark all listed objects as viewed click on the Mark All As
Viewed button.
As each object item is highlighted its red
background is removed, a detailed
description is given below the list and the
danger object is highlighted in the chart
display area.

4-48 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

When all dangerous objects have been acknowledged in the Dangers

window the red background is removed from the Dangers icon, although
the objects will remain listed. The system will remove objects from the
Dangers list if it has been 120 seconds or more since own ship's safety
region and a particular dangerous object last overlapped.
Dangers Information
The chart dangers information area at the bottom of the window gives
detailed information on each dangerous object selected. This information
will include the following:
Object Type - e.g. Depth Area, Caution Area
Latitude/Longitude position of object
Dataset - the reference number of the nearest chart set to the
dangerous object.
Depth area information will additionally include the
following data:
Depth Range Value 1:
Depth Range Value 2:
The figure shown with Value 1: usually represents
the minimum depth in metres of the Depth Area.
This value may be 0 or a negative value if the
depth area represents height above water (e.g.,
land mass or a harbour wall).
The figure shown with Value 2: usually represents the maximum depth in
metres of the Depth Area.

65900012 4-49
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Changing the Danger Settings

A number of Danger settings can be enabled or adjusted by the operator.
To change the Danger settings do the following:
1. The default setting for the generation of
Caution alarms is off. To display alarms
for cautions tick the Alarm On
Cautions check box.
2. The default setting for the display of
own ship safety region is off. To display
the safety region tick the Display
Safety Region check box. The safety region is indicated by a white
line following the course over ground (COG) from own ship, as own
ship moves across the screen the line is redrawn every 30
seconds. The length of the safety region line is controlled in the
Look Ahead field.
3. The look ahead time defines the safety region line length. To
change the time click in the field and move the trackball right to
increase the time (up to 60 minutes). As the look-ahead time is
increased the safety line lengthens. As the look-ahead time is
increased the safety line lengthens and the area the system checks
for dangers increases.

As the safety checking is done periodically there is a delay of a few

minutes for dangers in the dangers list to time out after the look
ahead time has been adjusted. This prevents the same dangers
from being added or removed form the list, and re-alarming due to
fluctuations in the ship's course.

On a multi- node system the look-ahead time is distributed and

persisted across all nodes.

4-50 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Charts

Chart 1
The Chart 1 facility provides access to the
Chart 1 catalog and the SENC color diagram.
Chart 1 Catalog
This feature provides a Chart 1 symbol
catalog as described in the S-52
Presentation Library. The catalog acts as a legend so the mariner can look
up specific information, such as names and descriptions, about symbols on
the chart.

The Chart 1 Catalog is only available when using the SevenCs

chart engine. When running with C-Map chart engine this feature
is not available.

To access the Chart 1 catalog, do the following:

1. Click on the Chart 1 Catalog button. The Chart 1 Catalog appears
as a moveable window, which can be resized to occupy as much of
the screen as required.
2. The catalog is alphabetically divided into symbol categories. To
access the categories click on the arrow to the right of the Chart 1
Category field and select from the drop down list.
3. To view information on a particular symbol click on the chart
symbol. Information for that symbol appears in the Symbol
Information field.

65900012 4-51
Charts ECDIS User Guide

Color Diagram
The color diagram ensures that any adjustments made to the brightness
and contrast settings on the VisionMaster monitor will enable the SENC
data, such as coastlines, safety contour and other objects to be adequately
displayed. To access, click on the Color Diagram button.
For a description of the SENC color diagram, see SENC data in Chapter 8,
Brilliance.

4-52 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Chapter 5 Navigation Tools

This section covers the creating, editing and deleting of the following
navigation tools:
Navigation Marks
Parallel Index Lines
Display Settings
History Tracks
Parallel Cursor
Trial Manoeuvre

65900012 5-1
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Navigation Marks
Navigation marks (Nav Marks) are generated by the operator to
indicate positions of interest on the chart display. The Nav Mark is
displayed as an orange information note symbol in a square box.
When a nav mark is created a vertical orange line with a dot at the
end is displayed below the symbol box.
To create a Nav Mark do the following:
1. Right click anywhere within the chart
window, a semi-transparent window
appears at the position selected.
2. Select Create Nav Mark from the
window. A Nav mark is created at the
selected position.

To view data on the Nav Mark do the

following:
1. Right click on the Nav Mark and
select Query Chart from the semi
transparent window. The Chart
Query window opens on the display.
2. In the Results tab click on the Point +
box and then click on Navigation
Mark in the directory tree. The
selected nav mark is highlighted on
the chart display with an eight line
graphic drawn around it with the
eighth line being a red arrow pointing
to the centre of the nav mark. The
Description area of the Chart Query
window shows Lat/Lon position
information and all other data
relevant to the Nav Mark.

5-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

3. To de-select the nav mark click on the Clear Query button. The
highlight is removed from the nav mark and the data in the
Description field is cleared.
For further information on Chart Query see Query Results and Query
Options in Chapter 11, Charts.
To delete a Nav Mark do the following:
1. Right click on the Nav Mark, a semi-
transparent window appears at the
position selected.
2. Select the Delete Navigation Mark
from the window. The Nav Mark is
deleted from the system without
confirmation.

65900012 5-3
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Parallel Index Lines

The Parallel Index (PI) Lines facility allows up to five index lines to be
displayed simultaneously. The lines span the entire chart window in both
primary and secondary display modes, irrespective of the scale ratio in use.
Each PI line is defined by the range of its closest point to own ship, its
bearing, line type and which side of the ship the line is on.
Selecting PI Lines
To access PI lines left click on the Parallel
Index Lines field from the Nav Tools menu
list. The PI Lines sub menu window opens
with the Select tab folder displayed.
When the PI lines Select folder is first
accessed, the Selected Set shows <Default
Set> and Display On is unticked. To select a
previously created set of PI lines click on the
drop down arrow to the right of the Selected
Set field and tick the Display On check box
to display the PI lines in the chart display
Creating a new set of PI Lines
To create and name a new set of PI lines do the following:
1. Click on the Add Set button. The screen prompts to enter a name
for the new set of PI lines with the current date and time highlighted
in the set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time as the
PI name click the OK button, or to edit the
name click in the field, the text changes to
green (editable) and the screen keypad is
displayed immediately below the field.

5-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

3. Enter a new name using the screen keypad, press the Back button
to delete characters or the space button to create a space. With
the required name entered press the OK button.
4. When a new set is created the set name is entered in the system
and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list.
5. You can now add PI lines to the set name, see Adding or Deleting
PI Lines.
Adding PI Lines or Deleting Sets
To add a PI line or delete a Set do the following:
1. With the PI set name entered click the
Add Line button. A line is created and
the default line values are shown in the
Line Data area. A PI line is always
initially created with its axis through own
ship’s CCRP and the bearing angle the
same as the current heading line of own
ship.
2. To create further PI Lines click on the
Add Line button. On the screen the
previously created line is displayed as
orange and the new line shown as
magenta. A further set of Line Data
values are displayed with default values and the last line created is
highlighted in Line Data.
3. You can edit the display of PI lines by
unchecking the tick boxes next to each
Line button. When a tick box is unchecked
the line's values remain but the line is
removed from the screen.
4. To delete a line set select the set name by
clicking on the Selected Set drop down list
and with the set displayed click on the
Delete Set button. A window appears
prompting to confirm the deletion. Click OK to confirm, the set is
deleted and the PI Lines window reappears with <Default Set> in
the set field.

65900012 5-5
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Copying or Renaming PI Line Sets

To copy or rename a PI line set do the following:
To copy a PI Line set:
1. Highlight the set name from the
Selected Set drop down list and click
on the Copy Set button. The
window prompts to enter a name for
the newly copied Pl line set with the
current date and time highlighted in
the set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time
as the PI name click the OK button,
or to edit the name click in the field,
the text changes to green (editable)
and the on-screen keypad is displayed immediately below the field.
3. Enter a new name using the keypad, press the Back button to
delete characters or the space button to create a space. With the
required name entered press the OK button.
4. When a new set name is created the set name is entered in the
system and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list.
To rename an existing PI line set:
1. Highlight the set name from the Selected Set drop down list and
click on the Rename Set button. The window prompts to rename
the selected Pl line set with the current date and time highlighted in
the set field name.
2. To enter the current date and time as the PI name click the OK
button, or to edit the name click in the field, the text changes to
green (editable) and the on-screen keypad is displayed
immediately below the field.
3. Enter a new name using the keypad, press the Back button to
delete characters or the space button to create a space. With the
required name entered press the OK button.
4. The PI line set is renamed in the Selected Set list

5-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Editing PI Lines
To edit a PI line do the following:
Selecting a different line style enables you to clearly identify each PI line.
1. To change the line style click on the
drop down list next to the current line
style (defaults to Solid), the PI line is
automatically selected and a list of line
styles are displayed as numerical
indicators.
2. Select the preferred line style from the
list, each style is a variation of line
dashes.
3. The line's style is changed to the selected option on screen.
You can edit the line bearing and range in either of the following ways:
a. Move the cursor over the PI line, the cursor changes to the

following symbol
b. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to
pivot the line around own ship’s CCRP, the bearing
angle value in Line Data automatically changes as
the line bearing is moved.
c. To adjust the line range move the cursor over the
middle of the line where a small centre line bisects at the
CCRP. The cursor changes to the following symbol
d. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to
adjust the range of the line to either side of the CCRP.
Or:
a. Click on the line bearing and range fields in the Line Data area,
the values change to green (editable). Move the trackball to
change the data values, the NM range value denotes the
distance of the line to the CCRP (defaults to 0.0) and the
bearing values denote the angle from 000°.
To change which side of the ship a PI line is displayed:
1. From the Line Data area click on the Toggle Side of Ship button to

the right of the line bearing

2. The selected PI line changes to the other side of own ship, without
changing its bearing value.

65900012 5-7
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Changing the Bearing Type

The PI lines menu defaults to displaying the
PI lines in true bearing, which is valid for a
correct ‘stabilised’ display. If the heading data
becomes invalid the display is 'unstabilised’
and the PI Lines are not displayed. To display the PI lines on an
unstabilised display select Relative from the Bearing Type drop down list.
The PI line displays a T or R to the side of the line, depending on the
bearing type selected.
Truncating and Deleting a PI Line
Each PI line may have its forward endpoint and back endpoint graphically
adjusted.
To adjust the end points of a PI line do the following.
1. With the Display On, select the PI line to be truncated, either by
clicking on the line in the chart display, or by clicking on the line
button (Line 1 etc.) in the Line Data section. When a line is
selected the Truncate Front and Truncate Back check boxes
become active.
2. To adjust the line's end points tick the
Front and End check boxes. The
Truncate Front and Back values both
default to a distance of 2.0 NM either
side of the line's centre point.
3. The front and end points of a PI line may be edited in one of two
ways. Either click on the line's end point in the chart display, hold
down the left key and drag the end point to the required distance;
or click in the Truncate Front and Truncate Back fields, the text
becomes editable (green), move the trackball left or right to
decrease or increase the truncated values. The front and back
endpoints may be different values.
When a truncated PI line is selected a
short line is drawn perpendicular to
the PI line's axis at the truncated end.
To delete a PI line, select the line as
described above and click the Delete Line
button. The line is removed from the chart
display and it's data removed from the Line Data section.

5-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Importing and Exporting PI Lines

A set of named PI lines can be saved to an external device and imported or
exported via the import/export (I/O) tab
To import or export a set of PI lines do the following.
To export PI lines:
1. Choose whether to export the currently
selected set, (i.e. the set shown on the
screen) and the Select tab, or all sets
listed in the Select Set drop down list
by clicking on the Export drop down arrow.
2. Navigate to the directory folder where you want to export the files
to (this is usually an external device
such as a USB key).
3. Enter a filename for the PI lines in the
Filename field using the screen
keypad.
4. Click on the Export button. The
filename entered appears in the field
below the directory tree as a .piline file
and a temporary prompt appears
confirming the exported file and folder
name.
To import PI lines:
1. Navigate to the file in the directory tree,
the selected file appears in the field
below the directory tree.
2. Click on the Import button, the file is
imported and a temporary prompt appears confirming the imported
file and folder name.
If the PI lines have been imported or exported from a 3 ½ floppy disk click
on the Eject button to remove the disk from the PC.

Multi-node Support
Sets of parallel index lines are saved and retrieved in a database, shared
between all nodes. The set of parallel index lines that is displayed on a
particular node may be specified independently for each node.

65900012 5-9
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

History Tracks
History tracks are lines indicating the past
locations of position sources. Two history
track lines may be displayed simultaneously;
primary and secondary.
The primary and secondary history tracks
are shown as solid lines in the same colour
as the heading line, indicating the past
location of own ship from data provided by
the selected position source.

Secondary history tracks may be selected if

the Position sensor source is changed, see
Position Values in Chapter 4 `Sensor Management’.
Event marks may be added to the primary history track, with each event
mark time-stamped adjacent to the event symbol.
Primary History Track
The display of the primary history track defaults to off with the History
Tracks window showing time marks and track length data greyed out. To
turn the primary history track on tick the Display History Tracks check
box, the display controls become editable.
The time of day that own ship was at specific position is displayed regularly
along the track against time marks (e.g. against every 10th time mark).
The time value is indicated in UTC or local time, depending on the selection
made for current time in the Time Management window.
Time marks are small lines drawn perpendicular to the history track. Time
marks may be turned on or off by ticking or unticking the Display Time
Marks check box.

5-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Changing the Track Length

The track length value is the maximum amount of time that the history track
will be displayed on the screen. The history track period is variable from 0.0
minutes to 8.0 hours. The default period is the maximum history track
length of 8 hours.
The `Ignore Before' feature defaults to off (0 minutes). If a value is entered
(maximum 8 hours) any history track prior to this time will not be displayed.
Once selected, the start time of the track remains fixed and the elapsed
time increments automatically.
To change the track length and `ignore before', do the following:
1. To change the track length click in the field and move the trackball
left or right to decrease or increase the track length time. As the
value is changed the tick marks and time data on the history track
change accordingly
2. To change the `Ignore before’ time click in the field and move the
trackball right to increase the time. As the value is changed the
history track shortens depending on the value entered.
Secondary History Tracks
The position sources available for history track display include the
following:
configured position sensors (e.g. GPS)
manual position sensor
dead reckoned position sensor.
To select a position source for a secondary history track tick the source
check box.
When a position source is changed, the primary history track transitions to
the newly selected position source, while maintaining a smooth continuous
line.
Position sources for secondary tracks can be individually selected and
turned off.

65900012 5-11
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Event Marks
Event marks may be applied to the primary
history track. These are displayed as an event
mark symbol with a time stamp. The time value is
indicated in UTC or local time, depending on the
selection made in the Time Management window.
To generate an event click the Add Event button. An orange rectangular
marker is shown on the history track at the current CCRP position, with the
current time in hours, minutes and seconds, adjacent to the mark.
The display of events can be toggled on and off by ticking the Display
Events check box. When an event is added to a history track the marker
will appear at its original position whenever Display Events is switched on.

If the display of history tracks is off when an event is added, the

history tracks display is switched on automatically.

5-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Trial Manoeuvre
Trial Manoeuvre is a facility that allows the effect of a proposed
manoeuvre, based on rate of turn for own ship, to be displayed, both
graphically and alpha-numerically. This gives the operator the ability to
evaluate the possibility of collisions, by observing the theoretical relative
target vectors that would be produced.
The manoeuvre course and speed can be either ground referenced or
water referenced, depending on the currently selected stabilised mode, see
Sensor Data Display.
However it is recommended for Trial manoeuvres that water speed (STW)
is selected. When current speed is over ground (COG) a warning is given
when the Manoeuvre On check box is ticked that the trial course, speed
and vectors will be ground referenced.
Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters
The following parameters can be specified to define the proposed
manoeuvre:
A true course to follow after the
manoeuvre.
A true speed to be maintained during
and after the manoeuvre.
A delay time before the manoeuvre is
to start.
A rate of turn for the manoeuvre.
The ranges and default values for trial manoeuvres are shown in the table
below.
Parameter Ranges Power on Default
0 to 359.9°, in 0.1°
Final True Course 000.0°
increments
Manoeuvre Speed 0.0 kt to 75 kts 15 kt
0 to 30 minutes in 0.1
Time to Turn 0.0min
minute increments
1°/min. to maximum set Own ship's commissioned
Rate of Turn
rate of turn in initialisation standard rate of turn

65900012 5-13
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

To enter trial manoeuvre values do the following:

The following trial manoeuvre values may be edited:
Trial (STW or SOG) - the proposed speed of own ship to be
maintained during and after the manoeuvre.
Final (CSE or COG) - the proposed course of own ship to be
followed after the manoeuvre.
Time to Turn - the figure representing the time in minutes between
switching the trial manoeuvre on and actually starting the
manoeuvre.
Rate of Turn - the value in degrees per minute to be maintained
during the manoeuvre.
To change or enter a value:
1. Left click on the current value to activate, the text turns green
(editable).
2. Move the trackball left or right to set the required speed.
3. Left click to accept and exit edit mode.
Turn Radius
The turn radius figure is generated from the manoeuvre speed and the rate
of turn and is therefore not editable.
Delay Countdown
To set up the manoeuvre delay countdown tick the Timer check box, the
time value previously entered in the Time to Turn field starts to count down
to zero in real time, whether or not Manoeuvre On is enabled.
When the Time to Turn countdown reaches 30 seconds a Manoeuvre
Display warning is displayed.
When the delay countdown reaches zero the Timer check box is
automatically unticked.
Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre
Tick the Manoeuvre On check box to display the trial manoeuvre.
Whenever Manoeuvre On is ticked a large flashing T is displayed in the
lower half of the screen.
The manoeuvre vectors are displayed until the manoeuvre is switched off
by unticking the Manoeuvre On tick box.
The manoeuvre speed, course, rate of turn, time to turn, vector type and
length can be changed at any time during the trial.

5-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

If true (T) vectors are selected, the trial vector shows own ships proposed
true course during the manoeuvre.
The Rate of Turn and the manoeuvre speed determine the radius of the
turn based on data entered. Effects due to tidal stream and leeway are not
taken into account.
If relative (R) vectors are selected, the trial vectors are applied to every
tracked target or activated AIS target, with own ship’s vector suppressed,
and show the course and speed of the targets relative to own ship.
Display of Vectors
Trial manoeuvre vectors are displayed in all presentation modes and all
motion modes when the following conditions are satisfied:
The Manoeuvre On check box is ticked.
The heading is valid.
The scale ratio is valid for the display of target synthetics.
The display of True or Relative vectors for
trial manoeuvre is determined by the
selection on the upper toolbar.
Enter the proposed vector time by left clicking in the value field and moving
the joystick left or right to increase or decrease the vector time.

The trial manoeuvre vector lengths displayed are dictated by the

selected vector time. Entering a longer vector time will allow you to
see further into the trial manoeuvre. If the vector time is not long
enough to cover the entire manoeuvre then only a part of a trial
manoeuvre vector will be displayed.

65900012 5-15
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Trial Manoeuvre Vector

Own ship’s trial manoeuvre vector consists of
the following three sections:
The first section is a straight line
continuing on the own ship's current
course and speed. The vector length is
calculated using the own ship’s current
speed and the trial manoeuvre delay
time.
The second section consists of a
circular arc between the end of the first section and start of the third
section. The arc radius is determined by the manoeuvre rate of turn
and the manoeuvre speed.
The third section is a straight line showing the final course of the
own ship at the manoeuvre speed.
Trial CPA and TCPA
It is possible to display target trial CPA and TCPA values predicted using
the trial manoeuvre parameters.
Any trial CPA and TCPA data is labelled TRIAL CPA and TRIAL TCPA
respectively and does not obscure the actual target data.
Trial CPA and TCPA data is displayed for selected target in the Target
Data window, see Target Data.

5-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Parallel Cursor
The Parallel Cursor facility enables a rotating
parallel cursor centred on own ship’s CCRP
to be displayed.
The parallel cursor graphics consist of two
dashed orthogonal lines (axes) extending to
the edge of the chart display with their axis
crossing point at CCRP, the end points of
each line are marked with a semi-circular
marker at the edge of the chart display . A
series of equally spaced dashed parallel
lines, spaced at the currently set range ring
interval, are shown on either both sides of
the CCRP (full mode) or one side of the CCRP (half mode).

To access the facility click on the Parallel Cursor field from the Nav Tools
menu list. The Parallel Cursor window is displayed.

65900012 5-17
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

To turn on the Parallel Cursor and change settings do the following:

1. To turn the parallel cursor on tick the Display On check box. The
first time the parallel cursor is displayed, one cross axis runs
parallel to ship’s heading and the display mode is in full.
2. When the parallel cursor is displayed the Interval field changes
from Cursor Off to displaying the line interval in nautical miles
(NM). To increase or decrease the NM interval change the scale
ratio.
3. To toggle between Full and Half mode click on the Display Mode
drop down arrow.
4. From the Bearing Type drop down arrow select between Relative
and True. When True is selected the parallel cursor is azimuth
stabilised (i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to
north). When Relative is selected the parallel cursor is unstabilised
(i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to ship’s
heading). When True is selected and the heading becomes invalid
the parallel cursor is not displayed.
5. To rotate the parallel cursor either click on one of the four semi-
circular markers, hold down the left key and move the trackball left
or right to change bearing.
Or:
1. Click in the Bearing field, the text becomes green (editable). Move
the trackball left or right to change the bearing degree, the parallel
cursors move dependant on the values entered.
2. To realign the parallel cursor along ship's heading click on the
Reset to Ship Heading button.

5-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Display Settings Features

Display Settings
The Display Settings menu includes the following tab folders:
Ownship
EBL
Grid

Ownship
The Ownship tab folder enables the display of
synthetics data for own ship to be controlled.
The folder includes the following options:
Beam Line Length adjustment
Own ship display settings, including:
True Scale Ship
Stern Line
Antenna Position
Predicted Ship
Own ship vector settings, including:
Vector tick marks display
Vector tick marks interval time
Vector arrowheads display
Predicted Vector/Path, including:
Predicted vector display
Predicted path display
Beam Line Length
The length of the beam line defaults to 10mm,
this is the minimum length the line extends
each side of own ship's CCRP.
To lengthen the beam line left click in the Beam Line Length field, the
value figure changes to green (editable). Move the trackball right to
increase the length, or if the length has been increased previously, left to
decrease. Left click again to exit the editing process.

65900012 5-19
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Own Ship Display Settings

True Scale Ship
When the Display True Scale Ship check box is ticked the screen shows a
true scale outline of own ship (see Own Ship Symbols) when the range
scale is set at suitably lower scale (usually below one nautical mile).
The true scale outline is based on the size of the ship (entered as Own
Ship Static Data in the Configuration tool). The true scale outline may be
displayed if the greatest dimension of the ship is larger than 6mm on the
display. The true scale outline is displayed in addition to own ship
minimised symbol (heading line and beam line).
Stern Line
When the Display Stern Line check box is ticked the
screen shows own ship's stern line, in addition to the
heading line. The stern line is drawn from the CCRP, i.e.
where the heading line joins the beam line.
The stern line is drawn reciprocal of the current heading
line. For example, if the presentation mode is Head Up
the heading line is at 000° and the stern line at 180°.
Antenna Position
The antenna position may be displayed when own ship is in true scale only.
The antenna position is shown as a pair of small
crossed lines, between 1mm and 2mm long, centered
at the location on the display corresponding to the
position of the radar antenna. Note that the antenna
position may be in a different location to the CCRP, as
shown in the figure to the right. For information on
setting the antenna position and CCRP, see Chapter
4, `Configuration' of the Ship's Manual.
Predicted Ship
The predicted ship indicates a series of predicted
position and heading samples of own ship based
on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
Predicted ship is drawn as a series of true scale
own ship symbols, shown as orange dotted
outlines displayed along the length of the ship
vector. The true scale outlines are drawn
regardless of range scale.

5-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

The spacing between each symbol is equal to the Vector Tick Marks
Interval setting. The number of ship symbols drawn is equal to the vector
time (see Vector Modes) divided by the tick mark interval setting, rounded
down to the nearest whole number.
Predicted ship will be displayed regardless of whether the display setting is
in predicted vector, predicted path or COG vector. When predicted vector is
enabled the location of each predicted ship CCRP is shown as a small dot
on the vector line.
If the system is in water stabilised mode and predicted vector/path is
switched off, the predicted ship outlines continue to follow the ground
stabilised vector path.
Own Ship Vector Controls
Vector Tick Marks
Tick marks can displayed along the vector length at one minute intervals,
with every sixth tick mark is shown with double thickness, for more details
see Own Ship Symbols.
To turn vector tick marks on or off tick or untick the Display Vector Tick
Marks check box.
To change the default tick mark interval time from 1.0 minute, left click in
the interval field, the value figure changes to green (editable). Move the
trackball left to decrease the time (0.1 minute minimum), or right to
increase the time (60 minutes maximum). Left click again to accept the
value and exit the editing process.
Vector Arrow Head
When the Display Vector Arrowhead check box is ticked the screen shows
the own ship's vector arrowhead (double arrowhead in ground stabilised
mode; single arrowhead in water stabilised mode).
Predicted Vector/Path
To turn predicted vector and predicted path off click on the Off radio button,
the display shows own ship vector. The vector line is drawn dependant on
the current stabilisation mode; water or ground based, for details see Own
Ship Symbols.

65900012 5-21
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Predicted Vector
The Predicted vector tool is used to indicate where
own ship will go based on current speed, course,
and rate of turn. Predicted vector is NOT intended
to access risk of collision.
Predicted vector is a vector arc drawn from own
ship's CCRP with a radius based on the selected
Rate of Turn sensor and the current ground
stabilised course and speed. The vector may be
drawn as an arc, or a straight line, depending on
ship's current course. The vector is drawn up to six minutes long with a dot
indicating each minute, but is restricted by the time of the target vector.
Target vectors and own ship vectors can be water stabilised or ground
stabilised, but the predicted vector is always ground stabilised. If the
system is in water stabilised mode (see Sensor Data) ship's vector is drawn
along the heading line, in addition to the predicted vector.
A warning `Predicted Vector Mismatch' is raised if the current speed is
water stabilised when the predicted vector is displayed.
To turn predicted vector on tick the Predicted Vector check box.
Predicted Path
Predicted Path is used to indicate the area that the ship will pass through
based on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
The predicted path are two arced lines
originating at the inside fore corner and the
outside aft corner of own ship. A true scale
ship is drawn at the end of the predicted
path.

Fore and aft are relative to the direction that own ship is moving
and do not necessarily relate to bow and stern.

Predicted path is drawn to a maximum vector time of six minutes. The

predicted path is decreased from its maximum length if the vector time is
decreased below six minutes.
If the system is in water stabilised mode the predicted path continues to
follow the ground stabilised vector path.

5-22 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Navigation Tools

Next Turn EBL

The system supports the input of a Next Turn EBL sentence that transfers
data from a VMS, this data can then be represented graphically on screen.
In order to display Next Turn EBL graphics an input must have been
previously configured, see `Nav Tools' in Chapter 4 Configuration of the
VMFT Ship's Manual.
The Next Turn EBL is used while own ship is planning and executing a
turn.
To turn the EBL on or off tick the Next Turn
EBL check box.
A valid compass input is required to display
the Next Turn EBL graphics; if the heading is
unusable then the graphics will not be
displayed.
The system uses the following VMS information to display the Next Turn
EBL:
Bearing of initial line, degrees with respect to north
Length of initial line (can be zero if initial line is not to be drawn)
Radius of arc
Bearing of final line, degrees with respect to north
Display status of Next Turn EBL, on or off
Position of origin of Next Turn EBL, fore/aft and port/ starboard,
with respect to the centre of the ship
The final line is always drawn to the edge of the chart window.

65900012 5-23
Navigation Tools ECDIS User Guide

Grid
A latitude/longitude (LAT/LON) grid can be displayed on the chart window.
The LAT/LON grid values are taken from the latest valid position of own
ship’s CCRP, as reported by the Position sensor, see Position.

The grid display will vary between two latitude and three longitude lines,
and four latitude and four longitude lines, based on the selected scale ratio
of the display.
The LAT/LON grid will not be displayed when the chart orientation is 45° to
135° and from 225° to 315°
To turn the grid on or off tick the Display
Lat/Lon Grid check box.

5-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Chapter 6 Routes
This section describes route editing, monitoring, display and storage. The
following topics are covered.
A description of Routes.
Creating and editing routes graphically on screen, see Creating a
Route.
Editing a route from a menu, see Edit Route.
Monitoring a validated route, see Monitoring a Route.
Calculating the time, speed and distance between waypoints on a
monitored route, see ETA Calculator.
Importing and exporting a route, see Importing and Exporting a
Route.
Displaying route information, see Route Display Settings.
You can access the Route sub-menus in one of two ways:
1. either click on Routes from the Main
Menu list; or
2. click on the Route button in the
upper toolbar.
The Routes sub menu list includes the
following:
Monitor Route
ETA Calculator
Edit Route
Temp Route
Route Status
File Import / Export
Route Display Settings

The Routes sub menu list will also include

External Route, if configured at initialisation.
Refer to Chapter 4 `Configuration' in the
VisionMaster Ship's Manual.

65900012 6-1
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Routes
A route consists of a number of defined waypoints
18
and adjoining lines (legs). Waypoints are marked
by small circles; legs are displayed as straight
lines between two waypoints. If a waypoint has
both an approaching leg and a departing leg, the
system automatically generates a turn at the
waypoint to indicate the planned path of the ship.
19
Wheel-over marks are represented by short
lines, in the same colour as the route, which cross
the track at a relatively short distance before the
turn begins. The distance is configurable to be
appropriate for the ship’s turning characteristics.
Waypoint legs are represented as thin dashed lines. The route plan is
represented as a thick long-dashed line.
There are three types of routes:
Internal Route Plans - An internal route can be created and saved
at a single VisionMaster FT console, or it may have been created on
another ship’s VisionMaster FT system and copied using the file
Import/Export function.
External Routes - These are routes created by and stored at an
external device, which can then be transmitted and distributed to all
nodes on a network for display and monitoring, see External Routes
Temporary Routes - A temporary route is a route that starts at own
ship’s CCRP, and can be edited quickly on the chart display, see
Temporary Route. Temporary routes are intended for one-time
manoeuvres and deviations from pre-planned internal routes. On
ships installed with VisionMaster FT track control, temporarily routes
can also be used to steer the ship onto a planned internal route.
When a route has been imported or created all the details of the route can
be viewed and edited from the Edit Route sub menu. The saved internal
route can be monitored from the Monitor Route sub menu.

18
A geographical Lat/Lon location on a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s
planned route (for example, course alteration point, calling in point, etc.).
19
The geographic location, represented by a line where rudder movement should be activated
to accomplish a planned turn. The wheel-over (WO) line may be displayed perpendicular to
the approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn.

6-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Multi-node Support
On a multi-node system internal routes are saved and retrieved from a
database.
Routes saved to the database can also be loaded for monitoring from any
node on the network, only one route may be monitored in a multi-node
system. The same route monitoring information and monitored track is
displayed on all nodes, regardless of which node the operator began
monitoring.
Unlike a monitored route, a route that is opened for editing from the Edit
Route sub menu may be edited independently on each node. In addition,
an external route that is displayed on a particular node may be specified
independently for each node.

65900012 6-3
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Creating a Route
To create waypoints you must first select Edit Route,
either by clicking on the Routes button on the upper
toolbar (before a route is loaded this button will
display the message No Route Loaded), or by
selecting from the Routes menu.
When Edit Route is selected waypoints can be
created anywhere within the chart display (routes are
not limited to the True Motion limits).
Adding a Waypoint
There are two screen options initially available
when adding waypoints:
Add Waypoint; or
Add Waypoint to Beginning.
If the waypoint to be added is the first in the route,
then either waypoint option can be selected.

You can select to annotate routes on

screen (with waypoint and wheel-over
numbers, planned leg speed and leg
bearing data) by selecting the display
options from Route Display Settings.

To add a waypoint do the following:

1. With Edit Route displayed, right click in
the chart display at the point where the waypoint is to be placed. A
semi transparent window appears at the
point where the selection was made.
2. Click on either the Add Waypoint or Add
Waypoint to Beginning field from the
window.

6-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Add Waypoint
Add Waypoint is selected where the insertion of a new waypoint is to be
made after the last waypoint, e.g. if the last waypoint on the route was W5
then the appended waypoint will be W6.
To add a waypoint to a route, do the following:
1. Select Add Waypoint from the semi transparent window. The
screen shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the
waypoint selection was made. To view the waypoint LAT/LON
position select the waypoint and click on the Edit Routes Waypoints
tab, see Editing a Route.
2. To add an additional waypoint, position the cursor at the required
point and select Add Waypoint again. An additional waypoint is
created.
When two or more waypoints are created a straight route leg is drawn
between each waypoint.
When three or more waypoints are created the system displays the turn
radius at each waypoint (except first and last) using the system default
radius, or a radius value modified by the user, see Editing a Route.
Add Waypoint to Beginning
Add Waypoint to Beginning is selected where the insertion of a new
waypoint is to be numbered before the first waypoint in the route e.g. the
new waypoint becomes W1 and all other waypoint references are moved
up one digit accordingly.
To add a waypoint to the beginning of a route, do the following:
1. Select Add Waypoint to Beginning from the window. The screen
shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the waypoint
selection was made. To view the waypoint details click on the Edit
Routes Waypoints tab, see Editing a Route.
2. To add another waypoint before the first waypoint, position the
cursor at the required point and select Add Waypoint to
Beginning again. The new waypoint becomes W1 and the first
waypoint changes to W2.

65900012 6-5
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Inserting a Waypoint
A new waypoint can be inserted at a selected point along the straight
segments of a route leg. A wheel-over line is automatically created with the
waypoint.
To insert a new waypoint, do the following:
1. Right click on the route leg where you
want to insert a waypoint and select
Insert New Waypoint from the semi-
transparent window. A new waypoint is
created at the selected route leg position,
together with a wheel-over line.
The wheel-over line is a short orange line drawn
across the route leg immediately preceding a
planned turn. The distance between the wheel-
over line and the start of the turn depends on
ship turning characteristics as configured in the
system. The wheel-over line moves in accordance with any changes made
to the waypoint location.
The new waypoint and its wheel-over are automatically numbered
depending on their position on the route, e.g. if the waypoint is created on
the leg between waypoints W3 and W4 then the new waypoint becomes
W4 and all subsequent waypoints on the route are re-numbered
accordingly.
The position of inserted waypoints can be modified as described in
`Changing a Waypoint's Position'.
Changing a Waypoint's Position
A waypoint's position can be changed directly on screen, or by entering a
Lat/Lon value in the Waypoints tab folder.
To change a waypoint's position on screen, do the following:
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint to be edited. The cross hair
cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
2. Left click on a waypoint to select. When a waypoint is selected the
waypoint circle, adjoining legs and turn radii change to an editable
colour.

6-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

3. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to move the waypoint
around the screen; the route's attributes change as the waypoint is
moved. Release the left key when the waypoint is at the desired
location.
To numerically specify an exact LAT/LON position for the waypoint refer to
Editing a Route Plan.
Delete a Waypoint
A waypoint's position can be deleted either directly on screen, or in the
Waypoints tab folder, see Edit Route.
To delete a waypoint from a route, do the following:
1. Right click on the waypoint to be deleted
and select Delete Waypoint from the
semi-transparent window.

When a waypoint is deleted all

waypoint references are adjusted
accordingly.

Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius

A waypoint's turn radius can be manually
changed, either on screen or in the Waypoints
tab folder, see Edit Route.

When the turn is created, its turn radius is set to either the previous
turn’s radius, or, if this is the first turn, it is set to the default radius.

To change a turn radius do the following:

1. Click on the small dot at the centre of the radius.
The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator.
2. With the dot highlighted hold down the left key
and use the trackball to drag the radius dot to the
desired position. The route and wheel-over lines
are redrawn as the turn radius is changed.
3. The route data shown in the Waypoints tab folder also changes to
reflect the revised co-ordinates. The radius can also be adjusted
numerically, or as a result of numeric adjustment of the turn rate,
see Editing a Route.

65900012 6-7
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Editing a Route
Edit Route
The Edit Route sub-menu includes the following tab folders:
Route
Waypoints
Critical Points
Dangers
Internal routes are opened, saved, validated and managed from the Route
tab folder.
The Waypoints tab folder enables all the route's attributes (waypoint, leg
and turn data) to be edited.
The Critical Points tab folder allows the operator to insert alerts, in the form
of alarms and warnings, along a route.
The Dangers tab folder lists objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the route currently opened from the Route tab.

The Dangers tab will only appear if Safety Checking has been
selected in the system configuration. Refer to Chapter 4
`Configuration' in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.

6-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Route Tab Folder

Routes are managed from the Route tab folder
of the Edit Route sub-menu. The folder is
divided into the following areas:
Route
Total Distance and Duration
Description and Notes
Route
From the Route area of the folder you can
perform the following route management
functions:
Save - save a newly created route, or
save changes to the route under the
same name, the previous version of the
route is overwritten and the revised date
for the route changes accordingly as
indicated in the list of available routes (if
displayed).
Validate - check the validity of any
changes made to a route. If the system
cannot validate a route the Validate
button is yellow and the route name is shown as orange. If the
button has not changed colour validation will occur automatically
when saving a route.

A route can be saved even if it does not validate. However the

route must be correctly validated before it can be loaded for
monitoring.

Save As - used when either creating a new route, or to rename an

existing route. The route name and current date are added to the
Load Route list.
Open - load a previously saved route for editing.
Clear/New - clear an existing route from the screen prompting the
user to save an unsaved route if necessary.
Delete - delete a route from the list of previously saved routes.

65900012 6-9
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Editor Table - enables the operator to edit all waypoint and leg
attributes for the edited route via a separate movable window, see
Route Editor Table.
Print - if a printer is connected to the system (either local or
network) a print of the currently loaded route can be made.
To manage a route do the following:
To save a route:
1. If changes to a route have been made the route name shows an
asterisk after the name (e.g. Route 2*).To save a route click on the
Save button, or if the changes made to a route are to be saved
under a new name, click on the Save As button. A window appears
prompting to enter a name for the route.
2. Enter a name using the screen keypad and click on the keypad OK
button.
3. The route name is entered, the current time/date is listed in the
Open Route window and a temporary prompt appears confirming
that the route plan has been saved.
To validate a route:
1. If changes to the route's attributes are not
validated by the system the screen
displays the Validate button in yellow and
the route plan's name in an invalid colour
(orange).
2. To check the validation failure(s) click on
the Validate button. A Validation
Messages window is displayed. Any faults
on the validation of the route appear in the
messages field; if no messages appear
the route is correctly validated and can be
loaded for monitoring when required.
3. To check the validation failure(s) click on
the Validate button. A Validation
Messages window is displayed. Any faults
on the validation of the route appear in the
messages field. Click the OK button to
confirm.
If the route has been successfully validated by the system the message
{No validation messages} appears. The route is correctly validated
and can be loaded for monitoring when required.

6-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

The validation process only checks the geometry of a route. To

check the route against dangers, refer to Edit Route - Dangers.

To open a previously saved route:

1. Click on the Open button. The Open Route
window appears prompting to select a route
to open and displaying a list of existing
routes on the workstation with the last
modified date of each route. Routes shown
in orange are routes that have not been
correctly validated. Below the list the
Description field contains a description (if
any) of the selected route.
2. Select the route to be opened from the list,
scroll down the list if necessary, and with the
route selected click on the OK button. The
route data appears in the Route folder and a
graphic representation of the route appears
on screen, assuming the displayed location
contains the route.
To clear a route from the chart display:
1. With the selected route displayed click on
the Clear/New button.
2. If unsaved changes have been made to the
route, a Close Confirmation window appears
prompting to Save, Don't Save or Cancel the
closure.
3. Select the required option, the route is cleared
from the screen.
To delete a route from the route list:
1. Click on the Delete button. The Delete Route
window appears prompting to select a route to
delete and displaying a list of existing routes
on the workstation with the last modified date
of each route. Below the list, the Description
field contains a description (if any) of the
selected route.
2. Select the route to be deleted from the list,
scroll down the list if necessary, and with the
route selected click on the OK button.

65900012 6-11
Routes ECDIS User Guide

The screen prompts to confirm deletion of the selected route.

3. Click the Yes button to confirm deletion. The route is deleted and
the file name removed from the list.
Total Distance and Duration
The Total Distance and Duration area calculates the total route distance,
the total route duration in days (if needed), hours and minutes and the
average planned speed made by own ship over the entire route.
The Time Zone is displayed as UTC. If the current time is set to local and a
time zone offset has been applied in Time Management that time offset is
shown as a plus or minus figure after UTC.
The route distance, time, and average speed are read only values which
are recalculated as the route is changed. For example, if the speed for a
leg is increased, the total route time will decrease and the route's average
speed will increase accordingly.
The ETD displays the current date and time and the ETA displays the total
route time value added to the current date and time as the estimated time
of arrival. These values are updated each time the Clear/New button is
clicked.
To change the ETD/ETA data do the following:
1. Click inside the ETD or ETA field on the
specific data to be changed. The field data
changes to green (editable) and the
specific data is highlighted. An editing
window appears directly below the
selected field.
2. To move the date or time back click on the
Down arrow, to move the date or time
forward click on the Up arrow. To move the highlight back or
forward (e.g. from Month to Year) click on the side arrows.
3. With the correct ETD/ETA data displayed click on the OK button.
Description and Notes
To add a description of the route or create notes do the following:
1. Move the cursor inside the respective field and left click. A screen
keypad appears from where you can enter text.
2. With the required text entered click on the keypad OK button. The
text is saved in the Description or Notes field.

6-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Waypoints Tab Folder

The Waypoints tab folder displays all the
waypoint and leg attributes for the route being
edited. The folder is divided into the following
areas:
Route
Waypoint
Approaching Leg
Turn
Departing Leg
Route
The Route area enables the currently monitored
route to be saved and validated. When a route
has been saved its name is displayed above the
Save/Validate buttons.
The Save and Validate functions in the
Waypoints tab folder are the same as described
previously in the Edit Route - Route Tab.
Waypoint
The Waypoint area enables you to quickly
navigate between waypoints and includes the
following editing functions:
create a new waypoint
delete an existing waypoint
enter a waypoint label
change the LAT/LON position of a waypoint

To edit the Waypoint data do the following:

The Waypoint area displays the waypoint currently selected (e.g. W3). To
select the previous waypoint in the route plan click the < button, to select
the next waypoint in the route plan click the > button. To select the first
waypoint in the route plan click the << button, or to select the last waypoint
in the route plan click the >> button.

65900012 6-13
Routes ECDIS User Guide

To enter a label for the waypoint:

1. Left click in the blank field to the right of the currently selected
waypoint, the screen keypad appears.
2. Enter an identifying label using the keypad and click OK. The name
appears in the label field, and if the Waypoint Label tick box is
enabled in the Route Display Settings, also on the route plan.
To create a new waypoint:
1. Navigate to the location in the route where you want the new
waypoint created and left click on either the previous waypoint or
the next waypoint and then click the New button. The system
creates a new waypoint on the route leg midway between the
selected waypoint and next waypoint i.e. if W1 is selected then the
new waypoint becomes W2 and all subsequent waypoints are
automatically re-numbered.
2. Move the waypoint to the required position, either directly on
screen, or by specifying its LAT/LON position numerically, see
below.
To delete a waypoint:
Navigate to the waypoint to be deleted using the navigation buttons
and click the Delete button. The system deletes the selected
waypoint from the route, the route is re-drawn and all subsequent
waypoints are automatically re-numbered.
To specify a waypoint LAT/LON position:
1. Navigate to the waypoint using the
navigation buttons. Click in the LAT/LON
data fields, the text becomes editable
(green) and the numerical keypad appears.
2. Enter the required LAT/LON position from
the keypad and click on the keypad OK key.
The waypoint is positioned on screen at the
entered position.

Clicking the Goto button centres the display

on the selected waypoint.

6-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Approaching Leg
The Approaching Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of
the leg approaching the selected waypoint:
21 22
Rhumb Line or Great Circle
Leg Speed - estimate average speed for the route leg (maximum
speed 99 Kt.)
Off Track Limit - the distance the ship can stray from the route leg’s
track line, before the system raises the Off Track alarm.
The following leg attributes are read-only which automatically change if the
route data is changed:
Leg Distance - the leg distance between each waypoint.
Leg Bearing - the bearing of the leg in degrees.
To edit the Approaching Leg data do the following:
1. To change the leg speed or off track limit click in the relevant field,
the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right
to change the values.
2. To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to
Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field
and make the desired selection.
Turn
The Turn area enables you to edit the following turn attributes:
Turn Rate - the maximum turn rate is 1200°/minute.
Turn Radius - the maximum turn radius is 10 NM.
Speed - speed of turn, the maximum speed is 99 Kt
Off Track Limit - the distance the ship can stray from the route leg’s
track line, before the system raises the Off Track alarm.
To change the turn rate, turn radius or speed of turn click in the relevant
field, the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to
change the values.
The turn rates for each turn must be less than or equal to the Own Ship’s
configured maximum turn rate.

21
A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same angle; the path taken by a ship or
plane that maintains a constant compass direction.
22
A circle drawn around the Earth such that the centre of the circle is at the centre of the
Earth. Following such a circle plots the shortest distance between any two points on the
surface of the Earth.

65900012 6-15
Routes ECDIS User Guide

The speed for each leg shall be less than or equal to the Own
Ship’s configured maximum speed.

The speed of turn is used to calculate the turn rate based on the displayed
turn radius data. However if the turn rate data is modified the turn speed is
used to calculate new turn radius data. Often the turn speed will be the
same as the approaching and/or departing leg. However, the system
provides the flexibility to enter different values. This is useful when it is
important to strictly adhere to a specific turn rate due to vessel type or
conditions.

Departing Leg
The Departing Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of the
leg of the route, which departs from the selected waypoint:
Rhumb Line or Great Circle
Leg Speed - estimated average speed for the route leg. The
maximum speed is 99 Kt.
Off Track Limit - as in turn attributes
The following leg attributes are read-only values which automatically
change if the route data is changed:
Leg distance - the leg distance between each waypoint.
Leg Bearing - the measured angle of the leg in true degrees.
To edit the Departing Leg data do the following:
1. To change the leg speed or off track limit click in the relevant field
the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right
to change the values.
2. To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to
Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field.
Default Leg and Turn Attributes
The first leg of a route inherits planned speed and off track limit attributes
from system configurable default values. Subsequent legs inherit attributes
from the preceding leg.
The first waypoint of a route inherits turn radius from a system configurable
default value, and turn speed from the preceding leg’s planned speed.
Subsequent waypoints inherit turn radius from the preceding waypoint, and
turn speed from the preceding leg. Turn rate is calculated based on turn
radius and turn speed, but turn rate may also be used to adjust turn radius.

6-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Critical Points
The Critical Points tab folder enables the
operator to create specific LAT/LON positions on
a route which are defined as critical points.
An alarm or warning alert is generated when
own ship is in the proximity of each critical point
on the route (the alert can be triggered by either
a specified distance or time).
The Critical Points tab folder is divided into the
following areas:
Route
Critical Point
The Route area enables the currently monitored
route, displayed in the route name field, to be
saved and validated. For a description of the
Save and Validate functions see Edit Route -
Route Tab.
Critical Point
To generate critical points on a previously saved route open the route plan
from the Route tab of the Edit Route sub menu. The selected route will
appear on screen.
To create critical points on a route do the following:
1. Move the cursor to the position on the route where you want the
first critical point to be placed. As the cursor moves over the route
the letters ADD CRTP are displayed
below the cross hair.
2. Click on the required position, a blue
square is drawn at that position on the
route and the window shows the
abbreviation CP1 with its LAT/LON co-
ordinates. If the critical point label check
box is ticked in the Route Display
Settings, the CP number is also shown on
screen.

65900012 6-17
Routes ECDIS User Guide

3. To change a CP label from the default CP1,

CP2 etc. select the CP, either by
a. clicking on the < or > buttons in the
Critical Routes tab folder;
Or:
b. by moving the cursor over the CP
(the cursor shows SEL CRTP) and
left clicking.
4. Left click in the field to the right of the label, the screen keypad
appears. Enter a label name using the keypad and click the keypad
OK button. The label appears next to the selected CP (if the label
tick box is enabled in the Route Display Settings).
5. To create more critical points continue to click on the required
positions on the route. As each CP is created the blue square of
the previous CP is displayed as a smaller orange square and the
Critical Points window shows each CP's label and LAT/LON
position.
6. To select a previous CP in the route click the < button, to select the
next CP click the > button. To select the first CP in the route click
the << button, or to select the last CP click the >> button.
To change a CP's position do one of the following:
1. Move the cursor over the CP in the route, hold down the left button
and move the trackball. The CP can be moved either up or down
the length of the route, or away from the route. When the required
CP position is shown on screen release the left button.
Or
1. In the Critical Points tab navigate to the CP
using the navigation buttons, and with the
required CP label shown click in the
LAT/LON fields, a numeric keypad appears
below.
2. Enter the required LAT/LON co-ordinates
and click the keypad OK button. The CP is
moved to the new position.

If a CP is moved away from the route, its colour changes from blue
to turquoise.

Clicking the Goto button centres the chart display on the selected
CP.

6-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

To delete a critical point do the following:

1. In the Critical Points window navigate to the CP to be deleted using
the navigation buttons and click on the Delete button. The CP is
removed from the screen and list.
Or:
1. Move the cursor over the CP to be
deleted, right click on the CP and select
Delete Critical Point from the semi-
transparent window. The CP is removed
from the screen and list.

Although Critical points are associated

with a route they are not associated with
route track segments. When a route track
segment is moved or deleted, the critical points that were on that
route track segment remain in their original place.

The CP alert trigger defaults to distance; with the trigger being the proximity
of own ship to a CP, shown in metres. When own ship's proximity to a CP
is less than the distance shown an alert is raised.
To change the alert trigger to time, click on the
drop down arrow to the right of the field and
select Time. The Ownship proximity changes to
displaying the trigger value in minutes. To
change the proximity time click in the field and move the trackball left (to
decrease) or right (to increase).
Each CP can be assigned a type of alert (Alarm or Warning) with the
default alert set to Warning. To change the alert setting to a Alarm click on
the Generate Alarm radio button.
The operator can define the text to be displayed when an alert is raised
during route monitoring. To generate alert text click in the Description
field, a screen keypad is displayed. Using the keypad, enter the required
alert message and when finished click the OK button on the keypad.

65900012 6-19
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Dangers
The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to
view objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the edited route.
When a route is opened for editing or monitoring
the system continually searches the chart
database and mariner objects database for objects
and areas that intersect the route plan safety
region.
Route dangers are listed in a directory tree, with
the dangers separated into the number of leg and
turn segments on the route, the number being
dependant on the number of waypoints on the
route. Each leg and turn of the directory tree is
further divided into the Dangers and Cautions
related to that segment.

WARNING!

Temporary routes are not separately safety checked. The

operator must rely on own ship safety region for detecting
dangers while own ship is on a temporary route.

To view route dangers do the following:

1. Navigate to the required route segment by
clicking on the + box. Each Leg or Turn
segment is further divided into Dangers and
Cautions sub directories.
2. To view a route segment's dangers click on the
Dangers + box. Any dangers related to that
segment are listed in the directory.
3. To view the dangers on the chart display click
on each danger in the list. A graphic
representation of the danger is displayed across
the affected area of the route and a description
of the danger, including its LAT/LON position,
appears in the Dangers tab.

6-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

4. To navigate to the next danger in the list click the arrow. To

move up the list click the arrow. As each danger is highlighted
it is shown on the chart display.
5. To view cautions on the route repeat the procedure above.
Display Safety Regions
The Dangers tab folder also includes the option of displaying the route
safety region.
To display tick the Display Safety Regions
check box, the safety region is displayed
along the length of the route.
The route safety region is divided into segments and is defined as follows:
Route safety region buffer = cross track error limit + ½ ship beam.

65900012 6-21
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Editor Table
The route editor table enables the operator to monitor and edit all aspects
of the route that has been opened from the Edit Route folder and is
displayed on screen.
To open the route editor table click on the Editor Table
button in the Route tab of the Edit Route sub menu.
The route editor table displays the edited route's name
and lists all the route's waypoint attributes and leg attributes as fields in a
spreadsheet.

The three check boxes at the top of the table enable the following display
options:
Waypoint Data - tick this box to only display columns containing
waypoint specific data
Leg Data - tick this box to only display columns containing leg
specific data
Auto Scroll - tick this box to automatically scroll the table to
display selected waypoint data.

The four buttons to the right of the check boxes enable the following route
editing actions:
Add - adds a new waypoint to the end of the route.
Insert - inserts a new waypoint between two existing waypoints
Delete - deletes the selected waypoint from the route and redraws
the route
Reset - resets selected waypoint data to default values
To edit waypoint or leg data directly on screen:
1. Click on a waypoint, the waypoint and its adjoining legs are
displayed in white.
2. To move the waypoint hold down the left key and use the trackball
to drag the waypoint to the desired location.

6-22 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

3. To change the waypoint's turn radius click on the small dot at the
centre of the radius, hold down the left key and use the trackball to
increase or decrease the radius.
As edits to the route are made the data in the table
automatically changes. If waypoints are added or deleted the
table will redraw. To re-size the table to automatically fit all current
waypoint data click on the Auto Fit button.
If changes to the route result in validation errors the Validate
button at the top of the table will display a yellow background
and the route name shown in an invalid colour (orange). Click on the button
to view the validation errors, for more information see Waypoints Tab
Folder.
If changes to the edited route have been made the route name
shows an asterisk after the name (e.g. Route 2*). To save
any changes to the currently edited route click on the Save button, the
route is saved and the asterisk removed from the name.
Waypoint Data on Route Editor Table
The following waypoint data can be edited on the route editor table:
Label, the name given to the waypoint
Latitude/Longitude values
Turn rate through wheelover, shown in degrees per minute
Turn radius of wheelover
Turn speed of own ship
Turn cross track error (XTE) - the distance by which ownship's
position can deviate left or right from the route plan.
The following waypoint data is read-only on the route editor table:
The estimated time of arrival (ETA) showing the date and time to
the wheel-over, if a wheel-over exists for the waypoint, otherwise
the ETA to the next waypoint.
Leg Data on Route Editor Table
The following leg data can be edited on the route editor table:
Speed - planned ground speed of ownship along route leg
XTE - the limit of deviation from the planned route at which
activation of an automatic off-track error alarm occurs, shown in
metres
Leg Type - a rhumb line or great circle

65900012 6-23
Routes ECDIS User Guide

The following leg data is read-only on the route editor table:

Distance - the leg distance between each waypoint
Bearing - the bearing angle of each leg
Leg Time - the estimated time for leg traversal (in days, hours and
minutes)
Editing Data on the Route Editor Table
To edit route data in the route editor table do the following:
To change the waypoint label:
1. Click in the label field for the selected waypoint, the text changes to
green (editable) and the screen keypad appears.
2. To clear the existing label click the Clear button. Enter a label
name using the keypad and click the keypad OK button. The label
entered appears next to the selected waypoint (if the Show
waypoint labels tick box is enabled in the Route Display Settings).
To change the LAT/LON values:
1. Click in the field of the selected LAT/LON, the
text changes to green (editable) and the numeric
keypad appears.
2. Navigate to the values to be changed using the
keypad navigation buttons. Enter the revised
values and click the OK button. The route will
change dependant on the values entered.
To change the turn waypoint data, or speed and XTE leg
data:
1. Click in the required field, the text changes to
green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the value.
Left click in the field to set the revised value. The route will change
dependant on the values entered.
To change the leg type:
The leg type defaults to Rhumb Line, to change to
Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the
right of value and select from the list.

6-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Monitoring a Route
Monitor Route
The Monitor Route window enables you to monitor all aspects of a route
against own ship's course. The monitored route must be initially saved and
validated in the Edit Route sub menu.
The Monitor Route window contains the following tab folders:
Route - displays read only data monitoring own ship's progress
against a route plan.
Dangers - lists dangerous objects and areas that intersect the route
plan safety region.
Critical Points - displays data on critical points that have been
added to a route.

65900012 6-25
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Route
The data shown in the Route tab folder is
calculated internally from the monitored route
and is read-only.
A summary of the active leg of the monitored
route is also shown on the Route Status popup
window.
To monitor own ship's progress against a route,
the ship's COG must be within 110 degrees
toward the planned track and within 80 degrees
away from the planned track, this is referred to
as the `bearing criteria'. If the ship’s COG
deviates more than the bearing criteria, then
route monitoring will stop.
When a route is loaded for monitoring,
monitoring automatically starts on the leg closest
to the ship that is within the bearing criteria. If
none of the route’s legs meet the criteria, then
route monitoring will automatically start when the
ship comes within the monitoring criteria of a
route leg.

In some cases the system may begin

monitoring a leg that is not the closest
leg. This will normally occur when own
ship manoeuvres abruptly toward or
away from the closest leg, so that,
temporarily, the bearing criteria are not met.

During route monitoring, the ship’s cross-track distance from the route is
displayed and whether the ship is to the right or left of the track.
Where monitoring values are not currently valid the field displays a series
of dashes.

6-26 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

The information displayed is as follows:

Route Summary

Name The name of the route currently monitored.

Distance and Duration

Distance The total distance covered by this route.

Duration The total duration of the route at planned speed in hours

and minutes

Average The average speed of the vessel over the route.

Speed

To Go
Distance Distance to go to the end of the route using distance along
legs

Time Time to go to the end of the route using distances along

legs with own ship SOG for this leg and planned speeds
for future legs.

ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at the end of the route using own
ship SOG for this leg and planned speeds for future legs.

Ship State

Ship The state of ship on route e.g. 'Sailing To W2 (2/5)'

State denotes next waypoint on route and total number of
waypoints.

XTE Cross Track Error is the distance off track.

L = ship is left of track, R = ship is right of track.

XTE An alarm is raised if the XTE exceeds the value shown.

Alarm

65900012 6-27
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Leg
Leg Bearing The bearing of the currently monitored route leg.

Leg DTG Distance to go along the leg to wheel-over.

Leg TTG Time to go along the leg to wheel-over based on

present ship speed.
Next Leg Bearing angle of next leg of route.

ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at wheel-over

Time Zone UTC, or UTC with a plus or minus figure if the

current time is set to local and a time zone offset
has been applied.

Turn

Turn DTG Distance to go along the leg to wheel-over.

Turn TTG Time to go along the leg to wheel-over based on

present ship speed.
Radius Turn radius

Plan ROT Planned rate of turn in degrees per minute.

Plan Speed Planned turn speed

Req ROT Required rate of turn based on present ship

speed

6-28 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

To monitor a route do the following

1. Click on the Load Route button in the Route Summary area. The
Load Route window appears with a list of all the previously saved
routes, their name and last modification date.
2. Highlight the route to be monitored from the list and click on the OK
button. The route appears on screen and if the route meets the
monitoring criteria, the route data is displayed in the Monitor Route
sub menu.
To clear a route:
1. With the route details shown in Monitor Route, click on the Clear
Route button. The route and its data are removed from the screen
and Monitor Route tab folder.
Alerts tab
Alerts take the form of operator messages, which
appear in the lower right corner of the screen,
above the Show Menu button.
To enable alerts to be displayed tick the Provide
Notification check box. Alerts will be displayed in
monitoring mode to alert the operator of, for
example, approaching course change. To
acknowledge the alert click the Acknowledge
button.

If an alert is not acknowledged after a period of 30 seconds the

Alert is then escalated to an Alarm.

The Alerts tab displays the following limits on

own ship's movement from the monitored route
track before an alarm or warning is raised:
Course Difference Limit - the maximum
bearing angle that own ship may move from
the route track defaults to 25.0º.
Req ROT Difference Limit - the maximum
rate of turn angle that own ship may move
from the route track defaults to 10.0º /min.
To change the values left click in the respective field and move the trackball
left (to decrease) or right (to increase), left click again to fix the value.

65900012 6-29
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Editing a currently monitored Route

When a route is being monitored the route is rendered in the non-editable
monitor colour (red). A currently monitored route can only be changed from
the Edit Route tab folder, saved and then reloaded from the Monitor Route
tab folder.
To change a currently monitored route, do the following:
1. To edit a currently monitored route, select Edit Route, and open the
currently monitored route from the Load Route window.
2. When you are monitoring a route and open the same route for
editing the system creates a duplicate route with the edit route
mode superimposed over the monitored route in the editable colour
(pink).
3. Make the required edits to the route, for details refer to Edit Route -
Waypoints Tab. As the route is changed the screen shows the
monitored route in the original position.

4. Save the changes made to the route. The system displays a

warning stating that the route being saved is the currently loaded
route for monitoring and that changes will not affect the monitored
route, click the OK button.
5. Click the Clear / New button to remove the route from the Edit
Route folder.
6. Navigate back to the Monitor Route tab folder and reload the
revised route, the monitored route on screen is replaced with the
new version.

6-30 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Dangers
The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to
view objects and areas that could endanger the
safety of own ship on the currently monitored
route.

WARNING!

Temporary routes are not

separately safety checked.
The operator must rely on
own ship safety region for
detecting dangers while own
ship is on a temporary route.

The information presented here is the same as

the information in the Dangers tab folder of the
Edit Route sub menu. For a description of
dangers and route safety regions, see Edit
Route - Dangers.

65900012 6-31
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Critical Points
The Critical Points tab folder enables you to
select and view position and alert trigger details
on critical points that have been generated in
the Critical Points tab folder of the Edit Route
menu.
Routes can be loaded for monitoring and
cleared in the same way as described for the
Route tab folder. When a route is loaded, the
Route area shows the name of the monitored
route.
No data is displayed when a route is first
loaded. To select the first CP on the route click
on the < button. The field to the right of the <
button will show the abbreviation CP1 (unless
the CP label has been changed from the
default, see Edit Route - Critical Points).

CPs are shown as red squares in

Monitor mode. When CPs are
selected from the tab folder the
screen symbol changes from a
square to a rounded triangle.

When a CP has been selected the folder shows

the point's LAT/LON position, its alert trigger
and own ship proximity trigger (distance or time), the type of alert
generated (Alarm or Warning) and any CP description that has been
generated. The bottom of the folder displays the selected CP DTG and
TTG status.
To view position and alert trigger details on further CPs, click on the >
button. The next CP in the route is selected and its data shown in the
folder.
To centre the screen on the selected Critical Point, click on the Goto
button. Own ship, along with all other chart and target positions, are moved
in accordance.

6-32 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

ETA Calculator
The ETA Calculator window enables you to calculate the time, speed and
distance between waypoints on a monitored route.
With a route loaded for monitoring, click on the
ETA Calculator sub menu from the Routes
menu. The window includes Monitor Route:
Distance - the distance own ship must
travel to the end of the monitored route.
Speed - calculated as the default speed
based on the ship's present speed for
the present leg, and planned speeds for
future legs.
Time - the estimated time (in days, hours and minutes) to travel to
the end of the monitored route.
ETA - represents the ETA (date and time) of own ship at end of
route.
If the ETA Calculator is opened when there is not a monitored route plan,
the following default values apply:
Distance defaults to 1.0NM
Speed is own ship's current SOG.
Time is the time it takes to travel the Distance based on the speed.
ETA is the date and UTC time own ship is expected to arrive at the
Distance based on the speed.
To select a different waypoint on the route:
1. Click on the WP... button, the following
Action Required window lists the
waypoints in the route and the current
distance of each waypoint from own ship.
2. Select a waypoint from the list and click
the OK button. The distance shown
against the selected waypoint appears in
the Distance field.

65900012 6-33
Routes ECDIS User Guide

To change the ETA Calculator values do the following:

1. To change the Distance or Speed values click in the respective
fields, with the value shown as green move the trackball left, to
decrease, or right to increase the value. When the distance and
speed values are changed the Time and ETA values are
automatically updated.
2. To change the Time value click to the left of
the value, a numerical keypad appears below
the field. Enter in the required time values
using the keypad and click OK when
complete.
When the Time value is changed the Speed
and ETA values are automatically updated.
3. To change the ETA value click on the value
to be changed, a navigation keypad appears. Click on the left or
right arrows to navigate to the data to be changed and with the text
in highlight click on the up/down arrows to change the values. Click
OK when complete.
When the ETA value is changed the Speed and Time values are
automatically updated.

6-34 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Temporary Routes
A temporary route (temp route) can be
created and displayed on screen, either
independently, or in addition to a currently
displayed planned route. The temp route is
edited and monitored independently of the
planned route via the Temp Route tab folder.
All temp routes originate from own ship's
CCRP. A temp route can also transition to a
previously planned route.
Creating and Editing a Temporary
Route
To create and edit a temp route do the
following:
1. Select Temp Route from the Route
menu and click on the Create/Edit
button. The first and second
Waypoints (T1) and (T2) are
automatically created with T1 located
on the beam of the ship and T2 at a straight leg distance from T1
representing the value shown in the Waypoint DTG field (default
value 2000 metres). The course taken by this route leg follows own
ship's COG. The speed value is taken from own ship's current SOG
and the turn radius is a configurable value. The temp route is
displayed as a dotted pink line.

2. To add more waypoints to the temp route move the cursor into the
chart display, in Temp Route mode the letters TMP WYPT are
shown just beneath the cross hair.
3. To select a further temp route waypoint click at the required
position on the chart display. Waypoint 3 (T3) is created with an
adjoining route leg (i.e. from T2 to T3). Further waypoints can be
created in the same way.

65900012 6-35
Routes ECDIS User Guide

4. The Overall, Selected Turn or Waypoint DTG default values may

be changed by clicking in the relevant fields and moving the
trackball left or right to increase or decrease the values. The
Wheelover DTG is changed by adjusting the Waypoint DTG. When
own ship has passed the wheelover DTG the field changes to
displaying Past on a red background.

Temp routes are not normally the recommended means to make

urgent manoeuvres, therefore increasing the waypoint DTG is the
preferred option when the temp route is to be used to make a
significant course change.

Monitoring a Temporary Route

The temp route must pass route validation before it can be monitored. If a
temp route is invalid, a temporary prompt appears and validation errors
must be repaired in Create/Edit mode before monitoring.
To monitor a temp route do the following:
1. With a temp route created and validated, click on the Start button
in the Monitoring Controls. Monitoring begins on the temp route
and the colour of the route changes to red. The first waypoint (T1)
is immediately dropped at the CCRP location and own ship begins
sailing along the first leg of the route towards T2. The Monitor
Route tab folder displays the same monitoring values for a temp
route as shown for planned routes, see Monitoring Routes.
2. To stop the monitoring of a temp route click on the Stop button.
3. To clear a temp route from the chart display and Temp Route folder
click on the Clear button. If there is a planned route loaded, the
monitoring window will revert to displaying the ship’s status against
the planned route.

6-36 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route

A temp route may be used to transition own ship's course to a monitored
route.
To transition a temp route to a monitored route do the following:
1. Load the route to be monitored from the Route tab folder of the
Monitor Route window, see Monitor Route - Route Tab.
2. Create a temp route as described above. In Temp Route mode,
move the cursor to the monitored route, the letters under the cursor
change from TMP WYPT to ADD RTP.
3. Click on any point on the monitored route. The system creates an
additional waypoint which smoothly transitions the temp route to
the monitored route.

4. Click Start to begin monitoring the Temp Route. The Monitor

Route, Route tab folder and the Routes button show the route
monitoring status, e.g. `Temp Route to Route 1'. When own ship
has sailed past the temp route the monitoring status changes to
show the monitored route only.

65900012 6-37
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Route Status
A summary of the active leg of a monitored
route is shown in the Route Status window.
The information in this window is also shown
in the Route tab folder of the Monitor Route
sub menu.
The information in the Route Status window
includes the following:

Name The name of the route currently monitored.

Route Status The state of ship on route e.g. 'Sailing To W3 (3/6)' denotes
next waypoint on route and total number of waypoints.

XTE Cross Track Error is the distance off track.

L = ship is left of track, R = ship is right of track.

DTG Distance to go along the leg to wheel-over.

TTG Time to go along the leg to wheel-over based on
present ship speed.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at the end of the route using own
ship SOG for this leg and planned speeds for future legs.

6-38 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

External Routes
The VisionMaster FT system can be configured to accept external routes
23
from up to five external sources (for example, a GPS system), providing
they are transmitted to the system in an acceptable format.
External Route Validation
The external route is considered invalid if any of the following apply:
The latitude of any waypoint is within one degree of a pole.
There are fewer than two waypoints in the route.
All external routes are subjected to route validation. If an ERP is
considered invalid, it is not displayed and a warning is raised notifying the
operator of an attempt to import an invalid external route.
Default Attributes
If the waypoint or leg attributes of an external route are not specified, then
system default values are used.
All attributes of external routes are read-only, with the exception of leg type
and off-track alarm limit.
Monitoring External Routes
The External Routes menu is used to select the source of the external
route, and to monitor the route. Only one external route can be displayed
and monitored at a time. The following external route attributes are
displayed on the External Routes menu:
the ship’s cross-track distance from the route and whether the ship
is to the right or left of the track.
the estimated amount of time and distance before reaching the TO-
waypoint based on the current ground speed of the ship.
24
the name of the TO-waypoint while route monitoring.
The following functions are not provided for ERPs:
track control
25
return to planned route
saving route

23
Global Positioning System. A system by which receivers anywhere on earth can obtain
accurate position data.
24
The waypoint to which the ship is approaching.
25
A return to planned route is a leg that joins a temporary route with a planned route.

65900012 6-39
Routes ECDIS User Guide

The system is designed to display the “working” portion of the route

received from an external source. This means that only a subset of
the total number of legs and waypoints in the actual route will be
displayed. This normally includes the route leg from the most
recently passed waypoint, to a maximum of 9 subsequent route
legs with their associated waypoints. The system automatically
scrolls ahead in the route each time a new waypoint is reached.

Multi-node Support
External routes and associated source selection are distributed to all nodes
on the network. Each node is able to display an external route
independently.

6-40 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Importing and Exporting a Route

The Import/Export sub menu enables you to import or export routes that
have been created on a VisionMaster FT. Routes not currently on a
console can be imported from an external drive (usually a USB device),
and existing routes can be exported to an external drive.

The import/export facility is usually done when operating from a

single node. On a multi-node system a route saved on one node
can be accessed and edited on any node on the network.

Importing Routes
To import routes do the following:
1. Navigate to the external drive where
the route resides (this will usually be a
USB device). The field below the
directory tree will show any valid route
object files on the selected device.
2. Click on the route file to select for
import, the route name will appear in
the Filename field.
3. Click the Import button to import the
selected route file to your Workstation;
if successful a temporary confirmation
prompt appears.
4. If the route has been imported from a
USB drive, click on the Eject button
before removing the device.

65900012 6-41
Routes ECDIS User Guide

Exporting Routes
To export routes do the following:
1. Navigate to the external drive where the route or routes are to be
exported to (this will usually be a USB device).
2. Enter a filename in the Filename field, this
is the name of the file the routes are
exported to, and click the Export button.
An Export Routes window appears
prompting to check mark the routes to
export with all the saved routes on your
workstation listed.
3. To export individual routes click on the
route in the list, as routes are selected a
tick box appears next to the line. Or, to
select all for export click the Check-Mark
All button, all routes are selected.
4. Click the OK button. A temporary
confirmation prompt appears displaying
the filename the routes have been exported to.
5. If the routes have been exported to a USB device click on the Eject
button before removing the device.

6-42 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Routes

Route Display Settings

The Route Display Settings sub-menu
enables you to select the graphic display of
labels associated with the displayed route.
The following display settings are available:
Display Monitored Route - displays
the route currently being monitored,
defaults to ticked.
Critical Point labels - displays a
label for each critical point (CP1
etc.)
Leg bearings - displays bearing data
of each route leg in degrees
Planned speeds - displays own
ship's planned speed between each
waypoint.
Waypoint labels - displays a label for each waypoint (W1 etc.)
Wheel-over labels - displays a numerical label for each wheel-over
(WO(2) etc.)
When all display options are ticked the route is displayed as shown below.

65900012 6-43
Routes ECDIS User Guide

The Wheel-over type section of the folder determines how the wheel-over
lines are drawn and includes the following radio buttons:
Parallel to next leg - the wheel-over line is drawn parallel to the
next leg in the route.
Perpendicular to leg - the wheel-over line is drawn at right angles to
the route leg that approaches the associated turn.
The bottom of the Route Display Settings window shows a description of
the settings as the cursor moves over each setting text.

6-44 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Alarms

Chapter 7 Alarms
The alarm management system generates announcements related to
displayed information or equipment malfunction.
The system uses three different types of announcements:
Alarms
Warnings
Prompts (permanent and temporary)
All alarms and warnings are indicated by both audible and visual means.
Alarms are initially displayed on the Alarm Status Indicator, from where
they can be acknowledged. An unacknowledged alarm displays as a
flashing colour whereas an acknowledged, but still existing alarm, displays
a constant colour, see Alarm Status Indicator.
Alarms are raised until they are acknowledged, and the visual indications of
individual alarms remain until the fault has been corrected, when the alarm
system automatically resets to normal operating condition. Alarms can only
be cancelled if the condition causing them has been dealt with successfully.
For some alarms, the system may provide the acknowledgement
automatically and clear the alarm.
Prompts are raised to communicate information that does not necessarily
require operator action. Prompts appear directly underneath the Alarms
and Warnings field, see Prompts.
In the event of a picture freeze the prompt field will freeze on a prompt or
system time, see Picture Freeze.
There are two types of announcement sources: internal and external.
Internal announcements are those announcements generated by the
VisionMaster system. External announcements are those relayed to the
alarm management system by external sources. Both internal and external
announcements are displayed and acknowledged through the same display
menu, see Alarm Display.
For a list of the alarms which can be raised by the system and any remedial
action to be taken, see List of Alarms

65900012 7-1
Alarms ECDIS User Guide

Alarm Status
There are three types of alarm status:
Unacknowledged Alarms
When an alarm condition is detected, that alarm appears with a
flashing background colour in the Alarm status indicator and the
Alarm display. If more than one alarm condition exists, the alarm
with the highest priority is shown. The alarm continues to be shown
in the indicator until it is either:
acknowledged;
automatically cleared; or
replaced with an alarm of higher priority.
If the internal buzzer is enabled, the buzzer will only sound when
there are unacknowledged alarms or warnings.
Acknowledged Alarms
If an alarm has been acknowledged, but the fault has not been
corrected, the message Alarms Present is displayed in non-
flashing red or orange in the alarm status indicator. The
acknowledged alarm remains listed (non-flashing) in the Alarms
Display area, unless the Hide Acknowledged box has been ticked,
see Alarm Display
No Alarms
If there are no alarms the caption No Alarms is displayed in the
Alarm Status Indicator and the system background colour is shown.

7-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Alarms

Alarm Display
To view a list of all the currently active Alarm and Warning announcements,
including alarms acknowledged on the status indicator, click on the Alarms
field in the menu list, or right click on the Alarm Status Indicator.
The Alarms window shows the current
alarm state, alarm status and provides a
description and a means of acknowledging
alarms.
Within the Alarms window, announcements
are divided into Alarms and Warnings.
Alarms are messages that require
immediate attention or user action, whereas
Warnings indicate less critical conditions.
To view the current list of announcements click on the + button to the left of
the Alarms and Warnings.
To acknowledge Alarms and Warnings click on the selected announcement
in the list. The announcement will change indication as follows:
An unacknowledged alarm or warning whose condition is active will
appear with a flashing red (alarm) or orange (warning) background.
An acknowledged alarm or warning whose condition is still active
will remain listed in the Alarm Display window with no background
colour.
An unacknowledged alarm or warning whose condition is no longer
active will appear with a flashing grey background.
An acknowledged alarm or warning whose condition is no longer
active is removed from the Alarm Display window.

65900012 7-3
Alarms ECDIS User Guide

Viewing Announcement Details

To view more information on a particular Alarm or Warning right click on the
announcement. Details of the announcement, including activation date,
time and description are shown below the list.
Hide Acknowledged
To hide acknowledged announcements tick the
Hide Acknowledged check box.
Acknowledged Alarms and Warnings are
hidden from the display, although if the alarm
condition is still present the message Alarms
Present is shown in red in the alarms message
field. To show all acknowledged Alarms and
Warnings, untick the Hide Acknowledged
check box.
Sort by Group
To arrange Alarms and Warnings into groups
tick the Sort by Group check box.
The system lists announcements in their
relevant group (e.g. Targets, Routes etc.), with
the exception of emergency alarms, and
prioritises the alarms within each group as
Distress, Primary and Secondary (see List of
Alarms and Warnings). Grouping reduces the
type and number of alarms displayed, by de-
classifying less critical alarms.
In addition to acknowledging individual alarms
the operator can acknowledge an entire group
of alarms by clicking on the group title.

7-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Alarms

Alarm Buzzer
An alarm buzzer is physically located in the LCD monitor. The
buzzer can be muted (either temporarily or permanently,
dependant on commissioning) by clicking on the icon to the right of
the Alarm Status Indicator. When the buzzer is muted a red diagonal line
appears through the icon.
If the buzzer has been commissioned to be temporarily mute, the system
will automatically re-enable the buzzer once the commissioned timeout
period for the mute has elapsed. To view the mute time (between one
minute and 120 minutes) go to Mute Settings tab in the Commissioning sub
menu of the System menu. When the buzzer is re-enabled the red line is
removed from the icon.
If the mute has been commissioned as permanent then the system will not
re-enable the buzzer and Mute Settings will show Unlimited in the Length
of Mute in Minutes field.

65900012 7-5
Alarms ECDIS User Guide

Alarms on a Multi-node System

Alarm management enables system features to designate announcements
(alarms and warnings) that they generate as either `System' or `Local'.
In general, an announcement generated on one node will be displayed and
audibly announced on all nodes in the system. These are known as system
announcements. When the operator acknowledges an announcement on a
node it is shown as acknowledged on all nodes in the system.
Some announcements are displayed and audibly announced only on the
node that generated it (unless the announcement is configured to be
displayed on all nodes at commissioning). These are known as local
announcements and relate to conditions that impact only the node that
generated the alarm. Examples of local alarms include: display warnings,
computer hardware problems, authorization/licensing errors, database
connection errors, transceiver and video errors, target alarms, etc.

7-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Alarms

Prompts
Prompts appear in the field directly underneath the Alarms and Warnings
field and can be either temporary or permanent.
Permanent prompts
Permanent prompts denote a state or mode of operation, provide
instruction to the operator, or may display settings.

Permanent prompts are displayed on a normal system colour background,

if more that one permanent prompt is active the prompts are shown in
rotation until the condition creating the prompt no longer exists.
Temporary Prompts
Temporary prompts are general system responses to a user interaction and
are displayed briefly for a commissioned time period, usually around 5
seconds. When a temporary prompt is active a pale coloured background
field appears below the permanent prompt field with the prompt message.

65900012 7-7
Alarms ECDIS User Guide

Picture Freeze
A picture freeze represents a failure to update the User Interface on an
operational display. If a picture freeze occurs the permanent prompt field
will freeze on the currently displayed prompt, or the system data and time if
no prompts are displayed, see Prompts.
If the VisionMaster system includes a PCIO, an alarm beep will sound
denoting an internal error, in addition to the prompt freeze. If the system
returns to normal operation then the prompt field will continue to cycle
between prompts and system time, but an internal error alarm will be
generated.
In the event of a picture freeze it is advisable to create a system fault report
(for details see Report) and to then restart the system, see Shutdown.

7-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Brilliance

Chapter 8 Brilliance
Brilliance Menu
The Brilliance menu provides access to the
following functions:
Day Night Modes
Brilliance Groups
SENC Data
Brightness Check

You can access the Brilliance sub-menus in one of two ways:

left click on the Brilliance button in the main menu list to display the
sub menu options; or
right click on the Brilliance Control icon in the lower popup toolbar
and select from the list.

65900012 8-1
Brilliance ECDIS User Guide

Day and Night Modes

The Day / Night modes function enables you
to select the correct colour setting for
optimum display purposes in various lighting
conditions. The colour modes include two
daylight settings, one dusk and two night
time settings. The current setting is shown
with its radio button highlighted.
To select a different setting click on the radio
button to the left of the setting, the screen
colours change relevant to the day, dusk or
night mode selected.
Alternatively, click on the Up/Down BRILL
buttons on the Control Panel to brighten or darken the colour setting.
When the colour setting is changed the Brightness Check window is
activated, prompting to adjust the monitor's brightness control for optimal
setting.
If the colour setting is changed from Day Bright/Black or Dusk to Night or
Night Red the system displays a warning requesting confirmation of the
change in setting. To confirm click the Yes button on the Warning window,
or click the No button to cancel. If no confirmation is given within 10
seconds the system reverts to the previous colour setting.
Multi-node Settings
On a multi-node system changes to the day/night settings on one node are
applied to all other nodes on the system.
The commissioning engineer may configure a node not to be affected or
capable of making a global day/night setting change, and in this case the
setting will be applied to the local node only.

8-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Brilliance

Brilliance Groups
This feature enables you to independently
adjust the brilliance of the following
predefined groups:
Senc Data
Mariner Objects (Nav Tools)
Alarms / Warnings
Routes
ARPA / AIS data (to extinction)
Tools (includes PI lines, rotating
cursor, constant turn radius, etc.)
Range Rings
Own Ship (heading line)
EBL / VRM
Control Panel
To adjust an individual group or all
groups do the following:
1. Position the screen cursor over the
control you wish to change.
2. Left click to make control bar active.
The bar colour will appear blue.
3. Move the trackball left or right to
move the bar to the level required.
4. Left click to set the level and de-
activate the bar adjustment. The bar
will return to its previous shaded
state and display the new level.
To reset an individual brilliance group back to the default setting click on
the group's Reset button. To collectively reset all previously edited groups
click the Reset All button at the bottom of the window.

65900012 8-3
Brilliance ECDIS User Guide

SENC
The SENC folder includes access to a colour
diagram which ensures that any adjustments
made to the brightness and contrast settings
on the VisionMaster monitor will enable the
SENC data, such as coastlines, safety contour
and other objects to be adequately displayed.
1. To adjust click on the Color Diagram button, a window appears
over the screen with 20 different background colour options and a
coloured diagonal line across each background colour.
2. While making any necessary brightness and contrast adjustments
view the visibility of the diagonal line against the background
colour. If the line becomes difficult to see the brightness/contrast
setting is inadequate for SENC data to be displayed.

8-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Brilliance

Brightness Check
The Brightness Check is a method of
accurately setting the monitor's brightness
control to an optimal setting.
The brightness check window contains a grey
box within a black rectangle. When a
brightness check is performed the operator
adjusts the monitor controls while observing
the grey box.
The LCD monitors used in the VisionMaster
system have a single brightness control. A
white index line, indicating the setting
calibrated at system installation, is marked on
the brightness control.
To perform the brightness check do the following:
1. Turn the brightness control so that the white index line is at the top
position.
2. Turn the brightness control down (anti-clockwise) and observe the
grey box in the centre of the window.
3. If the box is not visible, increase the brightness setting until it can
be just distinguished in the window; or
4. If the box is clearly visible, leave the brightness control at the
indexed setting.
After the brightness check adjustments have been made, the `black level'
of the monitor is correctly set. Use the brightness control only if further
adjustment is required for visibility.

65900012 8-5
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

Chapter 9 Sensor Management

Sensors Menu
The Sensors menu allows the operator to select the sensor source to be
used for each type of data (e.g. heading, water speed, position etc.). In
addition to the selection of a sensor source, adjustments to the heading
alignment can be made at the Heading sensor, and an offset position can
be applied to a Position sensor.
In a multi-node system, in order to apply a consistent common reference
system, all nodes use the same sensor for each type of sensor data
(position, heading, water speed, ground speed, etc.), regardless of the
node from which the operator makes the selection. As an example, if the
operator selects position from GPS1 on one node, GPS1 is selected as the
source of position on all nodes.
If for any reason a sensor is not providing usable data an alarm will be
raised and the data displayed in red.
If automatic sensor data is unavailable manually entered values may be
used in place, subject to certain restrictions.

CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

To access the sensor source for the data types on the Sensor Data Display
right click on one of the four fields and left click on the Select nnn source
line. A window for the selected data type appears below the data display
listing the available sensor data sources with the currently active sensor
source and its value in highlight.

CAUTION:

Changing the current heading, water speed or position

sensor values; or realigning the compass, should not be
done at critical points during track control, see Autopilot
Interface. The Autopilot system may calculate incorrect
values, based on computed Set & Drift, resulting in an
incorrect heading order.

65900012 9-1
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

To access the Sensors menu from the main

menu list:
1. Move the cursor to the Show Menu
button at the bottom right of the screen
and left click on the Sensors field in
the main menu list.
2. With the Sensors menu displayed,
click on the specific sensor source
button.

Sensor Data Source

The name of each available sensor data source is listed. The sensor
source currently used and its current value are highlighted in bold and the
sensor's radio button selected.

If a selection is made by the operator that is not currently allowed

by the system an Action Required window appears with a
description of the prohibited action and a confirmation button.

Heading Sensor
To change the current sensor source for heading, see Heading Source
Values.
Speed Through Water Sensor
To change the current sensor source for speed through water, see STW
Source Values.
Course Over Ground Sensor
To change the current sensor source for course over ground, see COG
Source Values.
Speed Over Ground Sensor
To change the current sensor source for speed over ground, see SOG
Source Values.
Position Sensor
To change the current sensor source for position, see Position Values.
Depth Below Keel Sensor
To change the current sensor source for depth below keel, see Depth
Source Values.

9-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

Set and Drift Sensor

To change the current sensor source for set and drift, see Set and Drift
values.
Rate of Turn Sensor
To change the current sensor source for rate of turn, see Rate of Turn
Values.
Date and Time Sensor
Shows the current date and time and its source (usually GPS), see Date
and Time.
Wind Sensor
To view the current sensor source for wind, see Wind Values.

65900012 9-3
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

Sensor Data Sources

Heading Source Values
The Heading folder is divided into two
areas; Sensors and Alignment.
The Sensors area lists the available
heading sensor sources with the active
sensor source and its current value in
highlight.
The Alignment area shows alignment
information applicable to each of the
alignable heading sensors in the system.
The Value field enables the operator to
align a heading sensor prior to selecting it.
Sensors
The system supports the acquisition of analogue heading data via synchro
and stepper interfaces and serial heading data via a serial port on the
PCIO. The Sensors area may display the analogue data (Gyro) and the
serial data (HDT - true heading) and will allow selection between the two
data values.
To change the Heading sensor source, do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the existing sensor
source and value click the No button.
3. Where the sensor is changed the heading values shown against
the selected sensor source are applied. The HDG readout shown
in the Indicator Display and the ship's heading marker also change
to reflect the new sensor value.
Alignment
Synchro and stepper compass values require alignment unless the ratio is
1:1. If alignment is required a prompt to enter the compass angle appears
when the system is powered on and the system will automatically open the
Heading folder of the Sensors menu. The power up default angle is 000.0°
and the heading readout flashes until aligned.
1. To change the alignment click in the Value field, the text turns
green (editable).

9-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

2. Move the trackball left or right to alter the value. The heading
readout changes when the alignment value changes even if the
compass is unaligned.
STW Source Values
The STW folder lists the available STW
sensor data sources with the currently
active sensor source and its value in
highlight.
If Computed is selected for the sensor data
source for STW the system continually
computes the values based on other active
types of sensor data received.
To change the STW sensor source and values, do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual sensor
data.

CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the
selected data source are applied. The STW readout shown in the
Indicator Display and the ship's STW marker also change to reflect
the new sensor value.

65900012 9-5
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

COG Source Values

The COG sensor provides information
about own ship course based on actual
position history (when a position sensor
such as GPS is providing the data). The
COG folder lists the available COG sensor
data sources with the currently active
sensor source and its value in highlight.
When Computed is selected for the
sensor data source for COG the system
continually computes the values based on other active types of sensor data
received.
To change the COG sensor source or values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual sensor
data.

CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. When the sensor being selected for COG also provides other data
types (e.g. SOG and Position), a window appears prompting to
select which of these other data types should also be taken from
manual data, with the data type's current sensor source displayed.
To update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes next to
the data source where the update should not apply. To cancel all
changes and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel
button.

9-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

4. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the

selected sensor source are applied. The COG readout shown in
the Indicator Display and the ship's COG marker also change to
reflect the new sensor value.
SOG Source Values
The SOG folder lists the available SOG
sensor data sources with the currently
active sensor source and its value in
highlight.
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for SOG the system continually
computes the values based on other active
types of sensor data received.
To change the SOG sensor source or
values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual sensor
data.

CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. When the sensor being selected for SOG also provides other data
types (e.g. COG and Position), a window appears prompting to
select which of these other data types should also be taken from
manual data, with the data type's current sensor source displayed.
To update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes next to
the data types where the update should not apply. To cancel all
changes and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel
button.

65900012 9-7
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

4. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the

selected sensor source are applied. The SOG readout shown in
the Indicator Display and the ship's SOG marker also change to
reflect the new sensor value.
Position Values
The Position folder shows geodetic position
data of own ship. The current position and
sensor source are also shown in the left
corner of the lower toolbar area, see
Position.

The position displayed for CCRP is

accurate, providing that the correct
offsets for the position sensors are
set during commissioning.

The folder is divided into two areas;

Sensors and Position Offset.
Sensors
The Sensors area lists the available
position sensor data sources with the
currently active sensor source and its
latitude/longitude values in highlight.
The area also provides computed sensor
data that supplies geodetic position based
on dead reckoning (DR) from the last valid
position received.
Dead Reckoning values
If valid position data for own ship is not received within a short period of
time from the sensor interface the system establishes a computed position
by dead reckoning from the last valid position received using own ship’s
direction and speed.
The timeout limit applied to valid dead reckoning values defaults to 30
seconds.
The system considers position data to be invalid if the most recent usable
sample data received from a position sensor is older than the timeout limit.

9-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

To change the Position sensor source do the following:

1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual sensor
data.
CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field, the text
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to enter
the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the
selected data source are applied. The STW readout shown in the
Indicator Display and the ship's STW marker also change to reflect
the new sensor value.
To change the sensor source from the current automatic source (usually
GPS):
1. Tick the DR or Man sensor button. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change.

Manual sensor data cannot be entered if the system has AIS input.

2. To enter manual data click in the Man field, the text changes to
green (editable) and the screen keypad appears.
3. Enter position data from the keypad, click the OK key to exit edit
mode.
4. Click the Man button to enter the value.

65900012 9-9
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

5. When the sensor being selected also provides other data types
(e.g. COG, SOG, UTC), a window appears prompting to select
which of these other data types should also be taken from manual
data, with the data type's current sensor source displayed. To
update all click the Apply button, or untick the boxes next to the
sensors where the update should not apply. To cancel all changes
and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel button.
6. Where the sensor is changed the values shown in the Posn tab
change and the sensor source changes to Manual.
Position Offset
The Position Offset area shows the current sensor and enables the
operator to enter a position on the chart known to correspond with own
ship’s position and enter an offset bearing value.
Offset values are applied to all data received from the applicable position
sensor.
To enter offset values do the following:
To specify offset range and bearing values:
1. If there is more than one position sensor configured, select the
relevant position sensor by clicking on the drop down arrow.
2. Click in the respective fields, the text becomes green (editable).
Move the trackball left or right to change data, or right click in the
field and enter values using the on-screen keypad.
To select an offset position on the chart display using the cursor:
1. Click on the Set Offset by Cursor button and move the cursor
over the chart display, the cursor changes to an offset arrow
graphic.
2. Click in the position on the chart display where you want the offset
to be applied. The range and bearing values selected on the chart
are shown in the Offset fields.
To apply the entered offset values to own ship tick the Offset Applied
check box.

Offset values are not applied to the chart until this check box is
ticked.

When offset values are applied the entry is highlighted in the Posn popup
window with Offset shown in orange text below the sensor source. Offset is
also displayed in the left corner of the lower toolbar area, below the sensor
source, see Position.

9-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

Depth Source Values

The Depth sensor provides information on
the current depth values:
depth below keel (DBK)
depth below transducer (DBT)
depth below waterline (DBW)
The specific sensor information available
will depend upon installed and configured sensor devices.

Set and Drift Values

The data for Set is shown in degrees; the
data for Drift is shown in knots (kt).
When Computed is selected for the
sensor data source for Set and Drift the
system continually computes the values
based on other active types of sensor data
received conventionally (via an interface).
When incorrect computed values are
suspected they can be manually set to
zero or to an estimated manual value. The system will re-calculate accurate
Set and Drift values after accurate sensor data has been restored.
To change the Set and Drift sensor source or values do the following:
1. Tick the button next to the source. Whenever the sensor source is
about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the change.
2. To confirm click the Yes button, or to return to the previous sensor
source and value click the No button.
If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual sensor
data.

CAUTION:

Using manual data is not the normal mode of operation. A

sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is
available.

65900012 9-11
Sensor Management ECDIS User Guide

1. To enter manual sensor data click in the Manual Set and Drift
fields, the text changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left
or right to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode.
2. Click the Man button to enter the value.
3. A window appears prompting to select
the data type (COG/SOG and STW)
that will be computed from the manual
set and drift sensor, with the data
type's current sensor source
displayed. To update all click the
Apply button, or untick the boxes next
to the data type where the update
should not apply. To cancel all
changes and revert to the previous
sensor source click the Cancel button.

9-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Sensor Management

Rate of Turn Values

The Rate of Turn (ROT) folder lists the
available ROT sensor data sources with the
currently active sensor source and its value
in highlight.
When Computed is selected for the sensor
data source for ROT the system continually computes the values based on
other active types of sensor data received conventionally (via an interface).
The ROT is indicated as unavailable if the Heading from the selected
source is unavailable or invalid.

Date and Time

The Date and Time folder shows the
system date and time with the currently
active date and time source and its value in
highlight.
The default selection for date/time source is
from a GPS sensor. If the time data is valid
the values are shown in green.

Wind Values
The Wind sensor provides information on the
current wind direction and velocity.
The specific sensor information available will
depend upon installed and configured
sensor devices.

65900012 9-13
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Chapter 10 Targets
The Targets facility provides information and management of all targets,
26
including locally tracked targets and AIS targets .
To open the menu left click on the Targets
button in the main menu list. The Targets
sub-menu list is displayed with the following
selection options:
Selected Target, which includes
Target Data and AIS Info
Multiple Targets
Target Display
Test Targets
AIS Display
Acquisition Zones
Own Ship AIS
Limits and Settings
The following Target sub menu functions can also
be accessed by right clicking on the Tracked
Targets icon on the upper toolbar:
Selected Target
Multiple Targets
Target Display
Limits and Settings
The following AIS sub menu functions can also be
accessed by right clicking on the AIS icon on the
upper toolbar:
AIS Ownship
AIS Messages
AIS Display

26
Automatic Identification System. A system capability which enables ships and shore stations
to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea, using an automated
transponder.

65900012 10-1
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Tracking Targets
You can manually acquire individual local targets to be tracked, providing
the targets are within the tracking range of 0.25 NM to 40 NM. The
maximum number of targets that can be tracked by the system is 100.
Local targets can only be manually acquired when radar video is
switched on, see Radar Video Mode.
Local targets can also be tracked automatically when they enter auto
acquisition zones, see Acquisition Zones.
The location of all targets on the chart display, including locally tracked
targets, can be toggled on and off by clicking on the tracked target icon on
the upper toolbar, see Tracked Target View. When switched off all targets,
including AIS targets, are removed from the screen.
Tracked targets can be cancelled, providing they are in the cancellation
range of 0.0. to 40 NM, see Cancelling Tracked Targets.
To track a target do the following
1. Left click on the target to be tracked. A green broken
line circle initially appears centred on the target’s
estimated position. A number is automatically
assigned to the target if enabled in the Identification
area of Target Display.

If good plot data is not extracted (i.e. if acquisition is attempted

over an area containing no radar video) then the target is declared
lost and the Lost Target icon is displayed, see Target Monitoring.

2. When the target is established the white broken

line square is replaced by a green dot and a
motion trend vector indicating the target’s
estimated velocity originated from the target's
position. The length of the vector is determined by
the target’s velocity and the currently selected
vector time, see Vector Modes.
If AIS is configured then the target's motion trend vector is shown
as a dotted line, if AIS is not configured then the vector is shown as
a solid line.

10-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

3. To view data on the tracked target left click on the

target dot. A solid green square appears around
the dot and the target details can be viewed on the
Target Data tab folder of Selected Target sub
menu, which appears on the chart display.

4. Tracked targets may be named in the Target

Data tab folder (providing Both is selected in
Target Display). When a target is named the
name entered appears above the assigned
number.

Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System

On a multi-node system target correlation information is distributed across
all nodes to ensure target numbering is identical.

On a Radar or Chart Radar only local tracked targets, acquired by the

operator on that node, are displayed. These tracked targets will not appear
on other Radar/Chart Radar nodes unless the operator manually acquires
the same target.

When a target, previously acquired on another node is selected to be

tracked the system may initially assign the latest target number to it,
depending on the proximity of the selection made to the target's actual
position (see Target Association values in Limits and Settings). This
number will change to the correlated number once the target is tracked,
(i.e. the number assigned to the target when it was first acquired.)
Where a target is correlated with a tracked target from an external input,
such as a BridgeMaster E, AIS and local tracked targets take priority over
the external input target, regardless of the display priority selected.

On ECDIS nodes all correlated targets in the multi-node system are

displayed in both Standby and Transmit. An ECDIS also shows the
combined activation state of AIS targets, i.e. if any node has activated an
AIS target it will be shown as activated on an ECDIS. If an AIS target which
has only been activated on one node is set to sleeping it will be shown in
this state on the ECDIS.

This will only apply when the AIS target is being tracked on one
node. If another node on the system has the same AIS target
activated then the ECDIS will continue to show that AIS activated.

65900012 10-3
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Tracked Targets Capacity

Single Node
The maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a single node is
100.
If the number of tracked targets is near the maximum allowed (95) a
warning is given. When the number of targets reaches the maximum a local
TRACKS FULL alarm is raised and no further targets may be tracked on
the node.
Multi- Node
The maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a multi-node
system is 200.
If the number of tracked targets reaches 95% of the system maximum a
warning is given. When the number of targets reaches the maximum, a
system-wide SYSTEM TRACKS FULL alarm is raised and no further
targets may be tracked on the nodes.
On a three node system each node may track up to 100 targets
individually; but if the first node is tracking 50 targets and the second node
75 targets, the third node may only track up to 75 targets. In this case, the
SYSTEM TRACKS FULL alarm would be raised for 200 targets, but the
local TRACKS FULL would not since none of the nodes have reached their
maximum.

10-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Cancelling Targets on a Multi-node System

A tracked target that has been acquired locally may be cancelled on the
node that is tracking it; the target will also be shown as cancelled on an
ECDIS node (providing the target is being
tracked on one node only).

Targets that are being tracked on a

Radar/Chart Radar node cannot be cancelled
on an ECDIS node. If a cancellation is
attempted on a target that is being tracked on
a Radar node, by right clicking on the target,
the following semi-transparent window
informs the operator that the cancel action
cannot be performed.

When a tracked target, acquired on an ECDIS is

cancelled on the ECDIS node an Action Required
message appears warning the operator that the
target will be cancelled on all nodes on the system
and that associated AIS targets will be set to
sleeping.

65900012 10-5
Targets ECDIS User Guide

AIS Targets
AIS Rendering Conditions
AIS targets are only rendered when the following conditions apply:
There is a valid position and heading for own ship
Enable Input is checked in AIS Display
The Sleeping Target filter setting is checked in AIS Display.
AIS target messages are being received and are valid.
In addition to Transmit, AIS targets are rendered in Standby. When AIS
targets are not being rendered, received AIS transmissions continue to be
stored so that known targets can be rendered quickly when conditions
indicate rendering should proceed.
For information on enabling AIS input and setting AIS filter settings,
including AIS objects, refer to AIS Display.
Target Display Capacity
The target processing capacity for rendering AIS targets (activated and
sleeping) and other AIS Nav symbols, such as Aid to Navigation (ATON),
SAR and Base Station at any one time is 200.
If the number of AIS targets and AIS nav symbols (activated or sleeping) is
near the maximum allowed (195) AIS Nearly Full is shown as a permanent
prompt.
If the number of activated or sleeping AIS targets and AIS nav symbols
exceeds the maximum of 200 an AIS Full alarm is raised.
AIS Target States
27
AIS targets are usually displayed on the chart display as triangles (unless
the AIS is a scaled ship symbol) and can be shown in one of the following
states:
Sleeping A sleeping target is smaller in size than an
activated target and is never displayed with
vectors.

27
If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned,
this name will be used and may not be changed. Names assigned to targets will be distributed
across all nodes in the system.

10-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Activated An activated target is displayed with heading

and speed/course vector. The speed/course
vector is a dashed line originating from the
centre of the triangle, the length of line being
proportional to the vector time.
If heading data is missing or invalid the
course vector is shown in place of the
heading line.
Activated When an activated target is selected a
and dashed square outline appears centred on
Selected the target origin and information on the target
is shown in the AIS window.
When an activated AIS target’s length and
beam exceed the standard AIS symbol
triangle, the AIS triangle is drawn with the
ship’s outline around it. The ships outline
symbol is not displayed if any of the following
apply:
When the reference point of the reported
position is unavailable.
When the dimensions of the ship are
unavailable.
When the beam of the outline is less
than 7.5mm.
When the targets heading is not
reported
When the AIS ship's outline is selected to
display target tote information, the dashed
square outline appears centred on the target
origin and information on the target is shown
in the AIS window.
Not used in An AIS target symbol that is not used in
collision collision avoidance calculations when SOG
avoidance and/or COG are not available is rendered as
a dotted line with no vector.

The default state for a newly acquired target is sleeping.

65900012 10-7
Targets ECDIS User Guide

The following criteria will cause a sleeping target to become activated:

When manually selected by the operator, see below.
When the target infringes the CPA/TCPA limits or bow crossing
criteria shown on the Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target
sub menu.
When the target enters an auto acquisition zone, see Acquisition
Zones.
To manually activate an AIS target do the following
1. Left click on the AIS target, an activated AIS
target will display a heading and
speed/course vector. An AIS reference and
automatically assigned target number will also
be displayed, if enabled in the Identification
area of Target Display.
2. To view data on an activated AIS target left click on the target
again. A dotted green square appears around the target and the
AIS details are displayed in the Target Data tab folder of Selected
Target sub menu.
Changing an Activated Target to Sleeping
An activated, or activated and selected target can be manually set to
sleeping.
To set a target to sleeping do the following:
1. Right click on an activated AIS target.
2. A semi-transparent window appears, left
click on Set to Sleeping
3. The target is deactivated and its heading,
speed/course data and identification data
is removed from the screen. If the target
was activated and selected the selection
box remains around the target.
4. To reactivate a sleeping target left click on the target again, all
previous target data is restored.
A target cannot be set to sleeping if it is in an alarm state, see
Target Alarm States.

10-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Target Alarm States

The following alarms states apply to any AIS target in any state, (with the
exception that sleeping targets do not raise the Lost alarm):
CPA/TCPA/BCR or Acquisition zone infringement
Lost

Dangerous When an AIS target infringes the

target CPA/TCPA/BCR criteria, or when it
enters an Acquisition zone, the target
symbol and its heading/vector are
rendered in flashing red.

When the AIS scaled ship symbol is used

the ship outline is also rendered in
flashing red.

Lost Activated targets that are deemed lost

are rendered with a red cross through the
AIS symbol. The target maintains its last
heading and COG/SOG and will continue
to be dead reckoned until the lost target
alarm is acknowledged.

The cross symbol flashes while the Lost

Target alarm is unacknowledged.

AIS targets in an Acquisition Zone will remain flashing red until the AZ
Entry alarm is acknowledged (see Alarm Status Indicator). When the alarm
has been acknowledged the AIS symbol will revert to its normal (green)
state, even when the target remains in the Acquisition Zone.
When CPA/TCPA Limit and Bow Crossing Limit alarms have been
acknowledged the AIS symbol stops flashing, but the symbol remains in
red until the CPA/TCPA and Bow Crossing infringement limits no longer
apply.

65900012 10-9
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Multi-node Support for AIS Targets

In a multi-node system, one or more nodes may be responsible for
interfacing with the device that provides AIS target and own ship AIS data.
The system will make one node (with an interface to an AIS device)
responsible for distributing the AIS target and own ship data to all other
nodes.
In a multi-node system:
AIS data will not be distributed if its repeat indicator is set or the
target data is invalid.
the AIS related controls described above will only affect the local
node.
acknowledgement of AIS alarm data can only be done on the node
that the system has made responsible for data distribution.

10-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Target Monitoring
All targets are monitored for Lost Target. Established tracked targets and
AIS targets (both activated and sleeping) are monitored for CPA/TCPA and
BCR/BCT infringements, using own ship's CCRP for reference. BCR/BCT
infringements use own ship's bow for reference.
Lost Target
If the system loses track of a target then a Lost Target alarm is raised for
that target and an appropriate flashing alarm symbol placed over the
target’s origin.
Any flashing Lost Target alarm symbols stop flashing when acknowledged
but the alarm symbol remains centred over the lost target(s).
The alarm symbol is automatically cleared if:
the target ceases to report itself as lost; or
the target is cancelled or dropped.
The Lost Target alarm automatically clears when there are no lost targets.
CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions
The conditions for a target to generate an infringement are:
Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are positive (i.e. target has
not yet reached the closest point but will do so).
Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are less than or equal to the
limits entered.
If an infringement is detected an alarm is raised and an appropriate alarm
symbol displayed flashing at the target's position.
Once the alarm is acknowledged, any flashing alarm symbols stop flashing
but remain over the target(s) infringing the limits.
The alarm symbol, flashing or not flashing, is removed when:
The target no longer infringes the defined limits, for definition of
limits see Limits and Settings.
The target is cancelled or dropped.
The alarm is cleared automatically when there are no targets infringing the
defined limits.
The CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values for a target are shown on the Target
Data tab folder of the Selected Target sub menu.

65900012 10-11
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Target Monitoring Symbols

The system shows alarm monitoring symbols used for targets. The alarm
symbols are coloured red and flash until acknowledged.

CPA/TCPA and bow Solid circle

crossing infringements Unacknowledged alarm - flashing red
see Limits and Settings Acknowledged alarm - solid red
Dashed circle.- target manually selected
Acquisition Zone - in Zone
acquiring Flashing red until Acquisition Zone
infringement is established.
Acquisition Zone Small solid circle
infringement - Unacknowledged alarm – flashing red
established
Acquisition Zone Small solid dot
infringement - Acknowledged alarm – solid green
established and
acknowledged
Crossed flashing red lines centered on
Lost Target the current target symbol.

Only one alarm symbol appears on a target at any one time. The order of
precedence is:
1. CPA/TCPA/BCR
2. Lost Target
3. Acquisition Zone infringement
Multi-Node Support
The same target monitoring limits (CPA/TCPA, bow crossing) are applied
on all nodes in the system. These values are calculated on individual
displays so that a target may, for example, have a different CPA/TCPA on
each display, depending on the results from the target tracker.
Each node evaluates the alarm conditions on the targets that have been
processed by that node. Whenever a target alarm is acknowledged on a
node, all targets of the same number on other nodes will have their alarm
condition acknowledged. If other nodes have alarms for targets not present
on the acknowledging node, the alarm condition for these targets remain
unchanged.

10-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Echo Reference Target

Echo reference is a method for generating a ground stabilised own ship’s
velocity by using a tracked target as a reference point.
Any tracked target can be selected as an echo reference, providing the
target is established (i.e. has a vector), has not been declared lost, and AIS
input is off. Once selected its velocity is assumed to be zero and own ship's
speed is calculated on this assumption.

WARNING!

1. Echo reference targets must only be used for the

calculation of true speed. Using reference targets to
calculate relative speed can be dangerous. It is
recommended that an alternative speed sensor is
selected for collision avoidance purposes.
2. The loss of an echo reference target may have a
major impact on the accuracy of the true speed and
true course values of tracked targets. The values for
own ship’s speed will also be degraded.

When a target has been selected as an echo reference, own ship’s velocity
source is automatically selected to be ground based using the echo
reference generated velocity.
Only one target can be designated as the echo reference target at any one
time.

65900012 10-13
Targets ECDIS User Guide

To select a target for echo reference do the following:

1. Right click on the AIS button on the upper toolbar and uncheck AIS
collision alarms, or from the AIS area in Target Display.
2. Right click on the target to be selected
as an echo reference and left click on
Select for Echo Reference from the
semi transparent window. R is
displayed adjacent to the reference
target, the target has its true vector
removed, and its speed is set to zero.
The ground stabilised sensor
indicators (COG and SOG) at the top left of the screen show the
source as REF, see Sensors Menu for information on sensor
sources.
3. To change the echo reference to another target right click on the
target and highlight Select for Echo Reference again. The echo
reference is moved to the other target.
To cancel an echo referenced target do the following:
1. Right click on either the COG or SOG
ground stabilised sensor indicator and
select the sensor source. The sensor
source window opens with the selected
source folder displayed and the current
sensor source (REF) in highlight.
2. Change back to the original sensor
source (e.g. GPS) by clicking its radio
button. A confirmation window
appears, click the Yes button to
confirm the data change.

10-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

3. An Action Required window appears

requesting confirmation of which other
data types should be received from the
selected source i.e. if SOG data type
has been changed then the system
prompts to change the COG data type
from echo reference to the sensor
source selected for SOG.
4. Click on the Apply button, the echo
reference data source is removed from
the selected target.
The echo reference target velocity is set to
unusable when the following apply:
the system is set to standby;
the target goes beyond the maximum
tracking range;
the echo referenced target is lost.
The echo reference target will be dropped when
the following apply:
the system is set to standby;
the target goes beyond the maximum tracking range;
the target is lost for more than 60 seconds.

65900012 10-15
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Selected Target Functions

Selected Target
The Selected Target sub menu enables real time data on a selected target
to be displayed. The Selected Target window will appear on the chart
display when a target is selected to be tracked.
When a target has been selected it is tracked and identified on screen with
a green broken line box, centred on the target origin for tracked targets and
AIS targets.
For details on acquiring and tracking targets, see Tracking Targets.
For details on activating and tracking AIS targets, see AIS Targets.
The Selected Target sub menu divides into the following tab folders:
Target Data
AIS Info
Targets are identified by number, name or both, depending on the
identification parameters selected in Target Display.
A valid heading must be provided in order for the system to track targets. If
a valid heading is not available for more than 60 seconds all tracked targets
are dropped from the Selected Target menu. Tracking is restored if the
heading becomes valid within 60 seconds.

10-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Target Data
The Target Data tab folder shows the
following tracking data on a selected target:
Range - the distance of the target
from own ship's CCRP.
True Bearing - the true bearing of
the target from own ship's CCRP.
CPA -the CPA of the target from own
ship's CCRP
TCPA - the TCPA of the target from
own ship's CCRP
BCR - the BCR of the target from
own ship's CCRP
BCT - the BCT of the target from own
ship's CCRP
If the system is in water stabilised mode (see Sensor Data Display) the
following two fields are shown:
CSE - the true CSE of target
STW - the true STW of target
If the system is in ground stabilised mode the following two fields are
shown:
COG - the true COG of target
SOG - the true SOG of target
If a tracked target is not established only the target number or name, range
and true bearing are displayed.
If the target approach point has passed, the CPA field continues to show
the actual CPA value and the passing point is indicated by a TCPA with a
minus value.
The BCR and BCT are only shown if both the crossing time and the
distance are positive, i.e. a target is projected to cross own ship's bow but
has not yet done so. If the target is NOT projected to cross own ship's bow
then both fields are shown as dashed (--.-).
If a target is lost or if a valid heading or speed for own ship is not available
then any invalid target data, except the target number/name and its type, is
shown in an orange warning colour. If the target is subsequently found or
heading/speed becomes valid, the data reverts to its normal system colour.

65900012 10-17
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Tracked targets can be named from the Target Data folder. To name a
target:
1. Click in the target name field below the target identifier. The on
screen keypad appears.
2. Enter a name for the target using the keypad, when finished click
on the keypad OK button. The name entered appears in the Target
name field, and if either Name or Both is selected in the
Identification area of Target Display the name appears alongside
the target on the chart display.
Target Data AIS
Where the target is an AIS target the Target
Data folder includes the additional display of
the target's current heading.
An activated AIS target will also include a
Show Tracked Data button, which enables the
option of toggling between displaying tracked
and AIS data.
The Show Tracked Data button is only
available when the system is in Transmit.

10-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

AIS Info
The AIS Info tab folder displays alphanumeric
information for an activated AIS target. If a
target is set to sleeping (see AIS Targets), it is
automatically removed from the folder.
AIS targets are only shown in transmit mode
shown when there is a valid position and
heading for own ship and AIS Input is enabled
in the AIS Display window.
Up to 400 AIS targets and AIS object symbols
can be displayed on the chart window at any
one time. An indicator is given when the
maximum number of AIS targets that can be
displayed has been reached. An AIS Full
alarm is raised when the amount has been
exceeded.
When AIS targets are not shown, received AIS
transmissions continue to be stored so that known targets can be rendered
quickly when conditions indicate rendering should proceed.
AIS Info target data
When an AIS target has been selected the current data is shown on the
AIS Info folder:
Target number assigned
Name of target vessel (if known)
Class A or B (targets prioritised in order of importance, see Target
Display)
Vessel MMSI
Position Accuracy
RAIM in Use Indication
Vessel Type
Call Sign (vessel identification name)
Destination (vessel route)
Navigational Status
Rate Of Turn (in degrees per minute)

The last four AIS Info data fields only appear when the AIS target is
a Class A type.

65900012 10-19
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Static information (call sign, vessel type, destination) may initially be

missing as it is transmitted less frequently that the other dynamic
information.

Multiple Targets
The Multiple Targets menu can display
information on up to eight activated AIS and
tracked targets. The following summary data for
each target, based on distance and time from
own ship, is displayed:
Target number (ID)
CPA of target
TCPA of target
If the target is an AIS the left hand column
displays an AIS triangle symbol adjacent to the
target number.
The Multiple Targets menu is divided into three tab folders:
CPA
Range
User
CPA tab folder displays only targets that have positive CPA/TCPA values,
targets with negative CPA/TCPA values are excluded from the sorted list.
The Range tab folder can list up to a maximum
number of eight targets and is sorted on the
target range from own ship.
The User tab folder lists the targets manually
acquired or AIS targets activated and selected
by the operator.
Targets are automatically removed from the tote
if they are dropped or cancelled by the operator.
A sleeping AIS target selected for the tote is
automatically set to activated.

10-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Automatic Sorting of Targets

Targets can be automatically sorted from the nearest to the furthest away
from own ship by the following criteria:
CPA (default)
TCPA
Range
To sort the targets by CPA click on the triangle symbol in the CPA button.
To sort by TCPA click on the TCPA button to activate and then click the
triangle symbol in the TCPA button.
Selecting Targets for the User Folder
Any target manually selected from the chart
display is listed in the User folder, including
targets which are not established. In this case the
CPA and TCPA information displayed for the
target is shown as dashed until a vector is
established.
Targets are automatically removed from the list if
they are dropped or cancelled by the operator.
Or, to remove a target from the User list right click on the target line and
select Remove from the window fly out.

Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets

Any target in the multiple target menu can be selected for display in the
target data window.
To select a target click on the target ID (from any of the three tab folders),
the Target Data folder from the Selected Target sub-menu is displayed with
the target's information.

65900012 10-21
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Target Display
The Target Display window shows the display
parameters for all targets.
In addition to the Targets
menu the target display
window can be quickly
accessed by right clicking
on the AIS icon on the
upper toolbar and selecting
Target Display...
If the ECDIS has video overlay, targets are only
displayed when the system is in Transmit. If the
system is switched to Standby then all targets,
with the exception of AIS targets, are dropped.
Targets can be tracked either manually or
automatically by auto acquisition, see
Acquisition Zones.
The Target Display window is divided into the
following areas:
Target Display (including Display
Priority)
Identification
Past Position Dots
Other
Number of Targets
Target Display
The Display Targets check box controls the viewing of all targets on the
display. Tick the check box to view all targets (default), or untick to remove
the targets from the display.
The display priority between AIS targets and tracked targets may be
selected. The default selection is AIS Priority. To change the display
priority to tracked targets click the Tracked Priority radio button. Any AIS
targets currently displayed on the chart display will continue to be shown
without the AIS symbol.

10-22 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Identification
The target identification is displayed adjacent to each target’s vector origin
and remains visible as long as the target origin is visible. You can select
the target identification to display one of the following:
Num Target numbers only
28
Name Target names only (the number will be displayed if no
name has been allocated).
Both Target numbers and names (the name will be left blank if
none has been allocated).
Off No identification
Past Position Dots
This area enables the display and editing of past position dots for all
targets, for information see Past Position Dots.
Other
This area enables auto drop mode for targets and vector timeout to be
checked, for information see Other Target Display Functions.
Number of Targets
The Number of Targets area includes data:
System Targets - this number represents all correlated targets
processed on the node (locally tracked and AIS).
Local Tracked - this number represents the total number of
tracked targets only on the node.
Total Tracked - appears on a multi-node system only. This number
represents all the tracked targets on all nodes of the system.

28
If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned,
this name will be used and may not be changed. Names assigned to targets will be distributed
across all nodes in the system.

65900012 10-23
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Tracking Parameters
The basic tracking parameters are shown in the following table.
Parameter Value

Tracking Range 0.25 to 40 NM

Acquisition Range 0.25 to 40 NM
Cancellation range 0.0 to 40 NM
Max number of tracked targets 100
Max tracking velocity 150 knots true
Time to display motion trend vector 12 good plots

10-24 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Past Position Dots

When past position dots are switched on, dots are displayed on the screen
indicating the past positions of all targets (with the exception of sleeping
AIS targets).

As soon as a tracked target is acquired, or when

an AIS target is activated, the past position data
starts to build up. The number of dots
displayed, up to a maximum of 4, is determined
by the length of time the target has been tracked
and the time interval selected.
Past position dots are available in all
presentation and motion modes providing the system has a working
compass.
To turn past position dots on tick the Display Past Positions check box.
A thin dotted line connecting the target and its associated dots may be
selected to be drawn. To turn the line on or off tick the Connecting Line
check box.
To select the past position time interval do the following:
1. With the Past Position check box enabled click on the drop down
arrow next to the interval time. The intervals are displayed ranging
from 15 seconds to 16 minutes.
2. Select the time interval from the drop
down list (the default time is 1 minute).
The system changes to displaying the
position dots in the selected time interval.

65900012 10-25
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Other Target Display Functions

Automatic Dropping of Targets
The operator can enable an auto-drop mode in which individual AIS or
tracked targets deemed not to be a threat to own ship are automatically
dropped by the tracker (or set to sleeping for AIS) without an alarm being
raised. The system default for auto-drop mode is enabled and the setting
stored when altered and restored at power on.
The auto drop feature is controlled from the
Auto Drop Targets check box. To toggle the
auto drop targets On and Off tick or untick the
check box.
Tracked targets are dropped automatically if
they meet all of the following criteria:
The target is not in an auto-acquisition zone.
It does not infringe the CPA/TCPA or BCR/BCT alarm criteria.
It is fully established i.e. it has a motion trend vector displayed.
The TCPA is more than 3 minutes ago.
The target is astern of own ship.
The target’s range is more than 10 NM from own ship.
In addition to the auto-drop mode, tracked targets are always dropped
without an alarm being raised if they meet any of the following criteria:
The target’s range is greater than the maximum tracking range.
No good video data has been extracted for the target for the last 60
scans.
The system has been switched to standby.
Vector Timeout
Times out a vector display that does not match the motion mode.

10-26 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Cancelling Tracked Targets

Tracked targets can be cancelled individually. When a target is cancelled
all alarms relating to the target are automatically cleared. If local tracked
targets are being displayed then the tracked target is cancelled on the
current node only.
On a multi-node system a target that has been tracked on a Radar node,
and is cancelled on the Radar node, will also be cancelled on an ECDIS
node, see Tracking Targets, `Cancelling Tracked Targets on a Multi-node
System'.
To cancel a tracked target do the following:
1. Position the cursor over the target and
right click. A semi-transparent window
appears next to the selected target with
Cancel Target in highlight.
2. Left click on Cancel Target. The
selected target is removed from the chart
display and all details relating to the
target in the Target Data window are
removed.

65900012 10-27
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Test Targets
Test targets include fixed test pattern targets
and a number of moveable test targets. The
facility is available in all presentation and
motion modes, providing the system has a
working compass and is in Transmit mode.
Test targets can be displayed and tracked in
exactly the same manner as live targets,
although the system differentiates between
test targets and tracked real targets.
Both fixed and moveable test targets are
displayed on the screen as flashing green
crosses. When test targets are on a large
stationary letter X is displayed near the bottom
of the chart display.

The Test Targets window is divided into the

following areas:
Fixed Test Targets
Moveable Test Targets

Fixed Test Targets

The Fixed Test Targets area includes a Display check box. When this
check box is ticked, test targets, which are stationary relative to own ship,
are displayed on the chart display.
The targets are generated every 45 degrees starting at 0 degrees relative
to own ship’s heading and increasing in 2 NM increments to 40 NM. The
targets are a fixed size in both azimuth and range.

10-28 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Moveable Test Targets

The number of user definable test targets is determined by the type of
radar interface board installed in your VisionMaster system.
The table below defines the number of targets each interface board
supports.
Interface Board Number of Test Targets
Defined Targets
SC2 2 1 to 2
SC3 5 1 to 5

The current moveable test target is shown in a field below the Switch All
Targets On/Off buttons, and defaults to Test Target 1. To select the next
moveable test target click the > button. If your system only includes two test
targets, as defined in the table above, the > button will be greyed out when
Test Target 2 is selected.
Before the Moveable Test Targets are activated the initial position, which
includes Range and True Bearing may be defined.
When moveable targets are active the target velocity and current position
parameters may be defined.
The table below defines the Range, True Bearing, Speed and True Course
default values and range.

Test Display Range True Bearing Speed True Course

Target (0.3 to 40 NM) (0º to 359.9º ) (0 to 75 kt) (0 to 359.9 )

1 3.0 NM from 36° 15 kt

turning unit 270°

3.0 NM from 108° 15 kt

2 180°
turning unit
3 3.0 NM from 180° 15 kt
25°
turning unit
4 3.0 NM from 252° 15 kt
90°
turning unit
5 3.0 NM from 324° 15 kt
135°
turning unit

65900012 10-29
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Using Test Targets

To switch Fixed Test Targets on, tick the Display check box. A fixed test
target pattern is displayed flashing on the chart display.
To switch on all moveable test targets, click the On button.
The Target Active check box is automatically ticked and all
moveable test targets are displayed on the chart display
with decaying video trails, showing the history of the targets'
movement.
To display only the moveable test target selected in the target field (e.g.
Test Target 1) untick the Target Active check box. Other moveable test
targets are removed from the screen, although their video trails remain.
To switch off all moveable test targets click the Off button.
Changing Moveable Test Target Parameters
When a moveable test target is inactive (Target Active box unticked), its
initial position (range and true bearing) may be changed from the default
parameters.
When a moveable test target is active (Target Active box ticked), its initial
position remains the same while its current position updates. When active
the target's velocity and current position may be changed from the default
parameters.
To change any enabled test target parameters click in the field, the value
changes to green (editable). Move the trackball left or right to change to the
required value, left click in the field to set the new value and exit edit mode.
The three buttons at the bottom of the Test Targets window have the
following functionality:
Reset - resets the currently selected test target to it's initial
position.
Reset All - resets all moveable test targets to their initial positions.
Reset All To Defaults - resets all moveable target parameters
back to their default values.

10-30 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Acquisition Zones
An acquisition zone is an area of the chart display that can be defined by
the operator. When the system is in Transmit mode, targets that enter the
area are automatically acquired and tracked. AIS targets are activated
when entering an acquisition zone in both Transmit and Standby mode.

There are two acquisition zones available. The zones can be turned on and
off and the zone parameters edited from the Acquisition Zones window.
When an acquisition zone is active the zone parameters are shown on the
screen.
The initial system zone definitions are as follows:
Zone 1 4 to 5 NM long distance units and 270° to 90°
Zone 2 12 to 14 NM long distance units and 270° to 90°
Any targets found in the auto acquisition zone are marked by a flashing
acquisition zone symbol (red triangle) and an AZ alarm is raised. Targets
that the system decides are not existing targets are automatically acquired.
The acquisition zone symbol stops flashing when the AZ alarm is
acknowledged and disappears when the target leaves the zone.
There is a limit on the number of trackable targets within all active zones.
An AZ Full alarm is raised when the next trackable target enters the zone
after the limit has been reached. The AZ Full alarm is cleared when the
number of trackable targets fall below the limit.

65900012 10-31
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Editing Zones
An acquisition zone can be edited by changing its radial position and depth,
and by changing its start bearing and end bearing within the limits defined
below.
When an acquisition zone is being edited its line colour changes from
yellow to light purple.
Acquisition Zone Limits
Parameter Min Max

End Range (in long distance units) 1.0 40.0

Start Depth (in long distance units) 0.4 2.0

Bearing 6° 354°

To create acquisition zone parameters from the Acquisition Zones

window do the following:
With the Acquisition Zones window opened
and the zone active (On) click on the Edit
button of the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or
Zone 2). You can edit both the Bearing (the
radial angle of the zone) and the Range (the
depth of the zone).
To edit the zone bearing:
1. Click inside the Start field. The start
degree number changes from white
to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left (to decrease
the numerical degree) or right (to
increase). If the zone is switched off
(inactive) the zone appears on the
display when the parameters are changed.
3. To change the End bearing repeat the procedure above.

10-32 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

To edit the zone range:

1. Click inside the Start field. The start degree number changes from
white to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left to decrease the range of the zone from
ownship, or right to increase the range from own ship. As the Start
range is changed the End range numerical degree changes
proportionally.
3. To shorten or widen the zone range click in the End field and
change the range as described above.
To create acquisition zone parameters directly on the chart display do
the following:
1. Click on the Edit button of the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or Zone
2).
2. Move the cursor into the display and left click to create the first start
point of the acquisition zone.
3. Move the cursor to the required end point of the zone, diagonally
opposite the first point, which defines the bearing and range.

65900012 10-33
Targets ECDIS User Guide

AIS Display
The AIS Display window includes the
following areas:
AIS Input
Filter Settings
Other
The AIS Display window may be quickly
accessed from the main screen by left clicking
on the AIS button on the upper toolbar.
AIS Input
AIS input and the display of AIS targets is
turned on or off by ticking the Enable Input
check box.

AIS Input can only be enabled when

valid sensor data is being transmitted.

Filter Settings
The system prioritises AIS targets into class A and class B, according to
importance. Class A targets are generally large vessels, class B targets
being smaller vessels.
Class A - only class A targets are displayed.
Class B - only class B targets are displayed.
The default setting is for both class A and B targets to be
displayed. If either class is disabled (check box unticked) the
AIS button on the upper toolbar is displayed as shown.
Filter settings also enables the display of the following AIS objects (if
enabled in the system):
ATON - will display Aid to Navigation objects
SAR Craft - will display airborne Search and Rescue Craft
Base Station - will display Base Station objects

10-34 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

AIS Nav Symbols

The icons used for AIS Nav symbols appear blue on the chart display and
are shown in the following table:

ATON

SAR

Base
Station

To view data on an AIS nav symbol left click on the symbol, the
selected object is identified on screen with a blue broken line box
centred on the object and the Target Data tab folder of the
Selected Target window appears showing tracked data on the object.
The Sleeping Targets check box enables AIS targets that targets that are
sleeping, or have been set to sleeping to be displayed, the default is ticked.
To not render sleeping targets on the display untick the check box.
This setting will apply to all nodes on a multi-node system.
Other
When the Activated AIS Lost Target Alarms check box is ticked all
activated AIS targets that are lost will raise an alarm, see AIS Target Alarm
States in AIS Targets.
This setting will apply to all nodes on a multi-node system.

65900012 10-35
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Own Ship AIS

The Own Ship AIS window includes the following tab folders:
Own Ship
Messages
Own Ship
The Own Ship AIS window displays AIS data
for own ship.
The Ownship fields display the following read
only information:
Name of vessel
Class (A or B)
Vessel MMSI
Heading (HDG) bearing
Current latitude position
Current longitude position
COG
SOG
Type
Call (i.e. ownship)
Destination
Status
IMO number.
The data for Heading, Position, COG and SOG is received from the specific
sensors.
The navigational status of own ship includes the following states:
Underway
At anchor
Not under command
Restricted manvre
Constrain draught
Moored
Aground

10-36 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

Fishing
Sailing
If one of these states does not apply the Status field displays: Unknown.
Messages
The Messages tab folder displays messages that have been generated
from an external device. The messages may for example have been sent
from another ship in the area.
AIS messages are used to convey to the operator information
that requires attention. When a message has been received the
Message icon is displayed in white, an audible indicator is given and the
message is shown in the Messages folder.
Left click to view information on the
message. The MMSI number of the vessel
that sent the message, the time the message
was received and the message detail are
displayed in the Message Info window.
When all messages have been selected the
message icon returns to the standard system
colour.
To highlight the message sender in the
target tote click on the Select Vessel button.
The vessel's details are displayed in the AIS
Info tab folder of Selected Target.
To delete a message select the message in
the received messages window and click on
the Delete button. The message is deleted
and removed from the list.

65900012 10-37
Targets ECDIS User Guide

Limits and Settings

The Limits and Settings window defines the
CPA/TCPA, bow crossing (BCR/BCT) and
target association limits.
The menu also enables the target Auto Drop
and Vector Timeout to be enabled or
disabled, see Cancelling Tracked Targets.
A target is considered dangerous if it
infringes the defined limits set in this window.
When this happens an alarm is raised, the
alarm is cleared automatically when there
are no targets infringing the defined limits.
The system default values and the
minimum/maximum infringement limits for
CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT are shown in the
table below.
Parameter CPA/BCR TCPA/BCT
System 0.2 NM 10 minutes
default value
Range of 0.1 to 20.0 1 to 99
values NM minutes

To change the infringement limits do the following.

1. Click inside the field to be changed. The value changes from white
to green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left (to decrease the limit) or right (to increase).
When the limit has been correctly defined left click to enter value
and exit edit mode.
Target Association
Target association enables the system to decide if a target tracked or
activated on one node is the same as a target tracked or activated on other
nodes.
The difference in the target's range, bearing and velocity values must be
less than the association limits for a target to be considered the same. If
targets do associate then they will be shown with the same ID on all nodes.
If targets change course, such that any of the values becomes greater than
the limits, the target association will split and each target will then have a
unique ID.

10-38 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Targets

There are two defined settings for target association: Standard and Loose.
The default values for Standard and Loose settings and the
minimum/maximum limits for Target Association are shown in the table
below.
Target Association
Parameter Distance Angle Speed
Standard Setting 0.06 NM 1.2° 5.0 kt

Loose Setting 0.18 NM 2.0° 5.0 kt

Range of values 0.05 NM to 1.00 NM 0.1° to 5.0° 1.5 kt to 10 kt

If target association settings are changed the settings defined in the table
above may be re-applied by ticking the Standard Setting or Loose
Setting check boxes.
Note that setting these values too high may result in targets which are
separate being considered the same target; whilst setting the values too
low may mean that targets that are the same are not correlated, leading to
multiple targets being displayed in the same position.

65900012 10-39
ECDIS User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Chapter 11 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Two electronic bearing lines (EBLs) and two variable range markers
(VRMs) are available and can be displayed simultaneously or separately on
the chart display. An ERBL is used to describe the combination of an EBL
and a VRM. ERBLs are displayed on both primary and secondary chart
displays.

EBLs display distance and bearing between objects and are shown as a
dashed orange line drawn on the chart display with its origin initially from
the CCRP. An EBL can be used between own ship and any chart object,
or positioned between any two objects on the chart.
VRMs are used to display a range ring on the chart, initially centred on
CCRP, or another selected origin point.
If an EBL is turned On while its associated VRM is turned Off, then a small
cross appears on the EBL where the VRM intersects.
When an ERBL is switched on the EBL bearing
value (degrees) and VRM range value (nautical
miles) associated with the ERBL are displayed to
the right of the buttons.

Each EBL and its associated VRM are identified by having the
same mark/space ratio for the line and ring.

65900012 11-1
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines ECDIS User Guide

Off-Centring, Carrying and Dropping an ERBL

The default position for ERBLs 1 and 2 is centred on own ship's CCRP.
When centred the ERBL can be Offset, Dropped or its end point dropped.
After being offset, the ERBL is carried at a constant relative bearing and
range from the CCRP. When dropped the ERBL remains at a fixed position
on the ground, regardless of the current stabilisation mode (ground or
water referenced).
The initial options available are:
Offset Origin - moves the ERBL to a location anywhere on the
chart window, when the offset position is fixed the ERBL is in Carry
mode.
Drop Origin - drops the ERBL in a fixed location. As own ship's
course and speed progresses the ERBL remains stationary at a
fixed point on the chart display.
Drop End Point -drops the ERBL's end point at a fixed location,
but carries the origin with own ship.
The range and bearing to the end point update every second..
After Offset Origin or Drop Origin has been applied the following option
becomes available:
Centre Origin - moves the ERBL back to the position centred on
own ship's CCRP.
After Drop origin only has been applied the following option becomes
available:
Carry Origin - the ERBL moves relative to own ship from the
location selected in Drop Origin.

11-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

An EBL is a dashed line initially originating from the CCRP of own ship.
The system includes two EBLs (EBL 1 and EBL 2), both of which can be
turned on or off independently. Any previous settings are remembered
when the EBLs are turned off.
When an EBL is switched On, its caption button is highlighted, the lettering
is shown as bold and its current bearing is displayed in the value field. The
EBL appears on the chart display at the defined bearing angle.
When an EBL is switched Off the lettering and button return to normal and
Off is displayed in the bearing value field. The line is removed from the
chart display.
To turn on an EBL do the following:
1. Move the cursor down to the lower popup toolbar and
click on ERBL 1 and ERBL 2 buttons to access both
ERBL movable windows. The ERBL windows appear
on the chart display with the last applied settings
shown.
2. To turn on EBL 1, left click on the caption
button. The EBL button is highlighted with
the lettering in bold and the last bearing
value entered displayed. On the chart
display the EBL is displayed as a dashed line at the bearing angle
dictated by the EBL readout.
Alternatively, turn the EBL rotary control on the control panel to switch
on EBL1.

When an EBL is switched on the value of its associated VRM is

also shown, although the VRM is switched off. A cross hair is
shown at the point where the VRM intersects the EBL.

3. To turn the EBL off left click on the EBL 1 button. The EBL lettering
and button return to normal, the bearing value and the VRM range
value are replaced by the Off caption, and the EBL is removed
from the chart display.

65900012 11-3
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines ECDIS User Guide

Changing the EBL Bearing

The EBL bearing angles may be true or relative, denoted by the letter T to
indicate true bearing, or the letter R for relative bearing.
There are two ways of changing the bearing of an EBL. Either enter the
values directly in the EBL field or manually drag the line to the selected
position using the trackball.
To change the bearing of an EBL do the following:
To change the EBL bearing angle using the trackball:
1. Position the screen cursor over the EBL, the cursor changes to the

following graphic
2. Click on any point of the EBL and hold the left button down.
3. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to
change the EBL's bearing angle. The angle readout automatically
changes in the EBL field.
4. With the bearing angle correctly set release the left button to
accept.
To change the EBL bearing from the readout:
1. Left click in the readout field. The readout text becomes editable
(green).
2. Move the trackball left or right until the required readout is
displayed.
3. Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode.
To change the EBL bearing from the Control Panel:
1. Turn the EBL rotary control clockwise to increase the EBL bearing
angle, or anti-clockwise to decrease the EBL bearing angle.

If both EBLs are switched off, turning the EBL rotary will
automatically switch on EBL1. If EBL1 is switched off but EBL2 is
on then turning the rotary will adjust the EBL2 bearing.

11-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Changing the EBL Position

To change the origination of an EBL do the following:
There are two methods of moving an EBL to an off-centre position:
1. With the EBL switched on right click on the
caption button. A floating window appears
with the options: Offset Origin, Drop Origin
(D) and Drop End Point (E). For a description
of these options see Electronic Range and
Bearing Lines (ERBLs).
Or:
2. Right click on the origin of the EBL on
the chart display. A semi transparent
window appears on the screen with the
options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop
EBL / VRM.
Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is
selected:
1. The cursor changes to a bidirectional
arrow indicator and the EBL and its associated VRM caption
displays the suffix (C).
2. When Offset is selected, the EBL is immediately positioned
wherever the cursor is on the chart display. Using the trackball
move the EBL to the required offset location. When the EBL is
offset, the origin of the EBL is indicated by a white dot.
3. Left click to position, the EBL is now in Carry mode and moves
relative to own ship. Or right click to cancel and return EBL to the
CCRP.
Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected:
1. A white dot is displayed at the origin of the EBL and the EBL and
its associated VRM caption are shown with the suffix (D). Unlike
Offset, the EBL does not move when the cursor moves. When the
cursor is positioned over the EBL origin it changes to a bidirectional
arrow indicator.
2. To move, left click and hold on the EBL origin. With the left button
held down, use the trackball to move the EBL to the required
location and release the left button to drop the EBL. The EBL
remains stationary in the selected location.

65900012 11-5
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines ECDIS User Guide

To re-position the EBL back to own ship's CCRP

either right click on the EBL caption and select
Centre Origin from the drop down window, or
right click on the EBL dot and select Centre EBL
/ VRM from the semi transparent window.
When Drop End Point (E) is selected from the EBL readout:
1. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). As the
ship moves, the EBL/VRM range and bearing are continually
updated to the dropped end point.
2. To move the line or marker relative to own ship with the EBL/VRM
range and bearing static select Carry End Point.
3. Or to drop the EBL/VRM at the current position select Drop Origin
(D) from the drop down window, or right click on the EBL origin and
select Drop EBL / VRM.

11-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Variable Range Marker (VRM)

Each VRM is a ring of long dashes. The first and second VRMs have
different mark/space ratio of line dashes. The VRMs default position is
centred on the CCRP of own ship, but can also be offset to a position
anywhere within the chart window. The default range value for VRM 1 is
2.5 NM; the default range value for VRM 2 is 4.5 NM.
Each VRM can be turned on or off independently. Previous settings are
remembered when they are switched off.
When an VRM is switched On, the caption button is highlighted, the
lettering is shown as bold and the VRM’s range is displayed in the value
field. When a VRM is switched Off the lettering and button returns to
normal and Off is displayed in the value field.
To turn on a VRM do the following:
1. Left click on the VRM caption button. The
VRM button is highlighted, the lettering
appears bold and the range value is
displayed. On the chart display, the VRM
is displayed as a dashed circle centred on
the CCRP. The size of the circle is dictated by the VRM range
readout.
2. To turn the VRM off left click on the VRM caption button. The VRM
is removed from the chart display, and the range value is replaced
by the Off caption.
Changing the VRM and EBL range
There are a number of ways to change the VRM range. Either enter the
values in the VRM field or manually change the VRM's diameter on the
chart display.
The VRM range can also be changed in conjunction with the EBL bearing.
To change the range of a VRM do the following:
To manually change the VRM range using the trackball:
1. Position the screen cursor anywhere over the VRM circle line, the
screen curser changes to the following graphic .
2. Left click on any point of the circle line and hold the left key down.
3. Move the trackball left or right to change the size of the circle. The
range readout automatically changes in the VRM field.
4. When the range is correctly set left click to accept.

65900012 11-7
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines ECDIS User Guide

To change the VRM range from the readout:

1. Left click in the readout field. The readout text becomes editable
(green).
2. Move the trackball left or right until the required readout is
displayed.
3. Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode.

Changing the size of the VRM does not change the EBL bearing.
As the VRM size changes the EBL origin remains constant.

To change the VRM range from the Control Panel:

1. Turn the VRM rotary control clockwise to increase the VRM range,
or anti-clockwise to decrease the VRM range.

If both VRMs are switched off, turning the VRM rotary control will
automatically switch on VRM1. If VRM1 is switched off but VRM2 is
on then turning the rotary control will adjust the VRM2 range.

To change both the VRM range and its EBL bearing:

1. Move the cursor to the intersection position of the VRM and EBL,
the screen cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.
2. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to
change the VRM range and EBL bearing. The bearing and range
readout values automatically update as the VRM / EBL is moved.
3. Release the left key to fix the VRM range and EBL bearing
location.

11-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines

Changing the VRM and EBL position

To change the position of a VRM and its EBL do the following:
There are two methods of moving a VRM and EBL to an off-centre position
these are:
1. With the VRM switched on right click on the
caption button. A floating window appears
with the options: Offset Origin, Drop Origin
(D) and Drop End Point (E). For a
description of these options see Electronic
Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs).
Or:
2. Right click on the centre of the VRM on
the chart display. A semi transparent
window appears on the screen with the
options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop
EBL / VRM.
Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is
selected:
1. The cursor changes to a bidirectional
arrow indicator and the VRM and its associated EBL caption
displays the suffix (C).
2. When Offset is selected the VRM is immediately positioned
wherever the cursor is on the chart display. Using the trackball
move the VRM to the required offset location. When the VRM is
offset the centre of the VRM is indicated by a white dot.
3. Left click to position, the VRM is now in Carry mode and moves
relative to own ship. Or right click to cancel and return VRM to own
ship's CCRP.
Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected:
1. A white dot is displayed at the centre of the VRM and the VRM and
its associated caption are shown with the suffix (D). Unlike Offset,
the VRM does not move when the cursor moves. When the cursor
is positioned over the VRM origin it changes to a bidirectional arrow
indicator.
2. To moved, left click and hold on the VRM origin. With the left button
held down, use the trackball to move the VRM to the required
location and release the left button to drop the VRM. The VRM
remains stationary in the selected location.

65900012 11-9
Electronic Range and Bearing Lines ECDIS User Guide

To re-position the VRM back to own ship's CCRP

either right click on the VRM caption and select
Centre Origin from the drop down window, or
right click on the VRM origin and select Centre
EBL / VRM from the semi transparent window.
Where Drop End Point (E) is selected from the VRM readout:
1. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). As the
ship moves the ERBL range and bearing are continually updated.
2. To move the line or marker relative to own ship with the EBL/VRM
range and bearing static select Carry End Point.
3. Or to drop the ERBL at the current position select Drop Origin (D)
from the drop down window, or right click on the VRM origin and
select Drop EBL / VRM.

11-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

Chapter 12 Radar
The Radar menu provides access to the
following radar/video functions:
Transceiver - enables switching the
system between standby and
transmit mode, pulse length
selection and radar fine tuning to be
made.
Video - enables video processing controls and trails mode
selection to be made.
Interswitch –provides selection and information on transceivers
connected to an Interswitch.
In addition to access via the Radar menu the following sub-menu functions
can be quickly accessed from the upper toolbar area:
To show the Transceiver window on the chart display right click on
the Standby/Transmit icon and select Transceiver Control.. (see
Selecting Transmit Mode).
To show the Video window on the chart display right click on the
radar video icon and select Video Settings... (see Radar Video
Mode).

65900012 12-1
Radar ECDIS User Guide

Radar Settings
Transceiver
The Transceiver window displays the
selected transceiver's alpha identity (A to F
if a six-way Interswitch is connected, see
Interswitch), its status (Master or Slave) and
the scanner unit the transceiver is
connected to (X-band or S-band).
The following controls are available when
operating as a Master display:
switching the operational mode
between standby and transmit
changing the pulse length
changing between AFC and manual
tuning
If the Transceiver has been selected as a
Slave at the Interswitch window the Pulse
Length and Tune functions are unavailable.
Operational Mode
The system can be in one of two operational
modes: Standby and Transmit. In addition,
when the system is in standby following
30
power up it may also be warming up .

A slave display can only be switched to Transmit if its associated

master display is in Transmit mode. If Transmit is selected on a
slave display when its master is still in Standby (NOT transmitting),
a prompt is displayed and the slave remains in Standby.

30
Upon power-on of a “cold” transceiver, a warm up period is required to prevent damage to
the magnetron before it can start transmitting.
The transceiver informs its connected display(s) if it is in the warm up process.
When a display is connected to a transceiver that is in warm up, either because of
interswitching or from power-on, a textual status and a count appears in the Transceiver sub
menu. The count starts at 0 and increment each second up to a maximum of 999. Only when
the transceiver informs the connected display(s) that the warm up period has ended is the text
and count removed and the normal standby text displayed. Transmit can be selected only
when the warm up period has ended.

12-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

To switch between operational modes click the radio button adjacent to the
mode.
1. In Transmit the red diagonal line on the transmit/standby icon is
removed (see Getting Started with ECDIS, Standby Mode), the
transceiver starts transmitting radar pulses and the ECDIS display
can be enabled to show radar video, see Radar Video Mode
2. In Standby the red diagonal line on the transmit/standby icon re-
appears, the pulse length selection and radar tuning adjustment
are disabled and any active Radar Video is automatically switched
off.
Pulse Length
The following pulse lengths are available, dependant on the range
restrictions detailed below:
Short Pulses (SP) are used at close range to improve the
discrimination and range accuracy of received echoes.
Long Pulses (LP) are used at long range to improve the ability of
the radar to pick out targets at distance.
Medium Pulse (MP) is a pulse length used as an optimum between
discrimination and long range detection.
Pulse lengths are restricted to the following scale ratios:
SP is available on the 1:30,000 scale ratio and below.
MP is available in the 1:8,000 to 1:200,000 scale ratios.
LP is available at 1.40,000 scale ratio and above.
Tune
For a Master display there are three tuning controls:
AFC on/off
Manual fine tune
Coarse tune
In a multi-node system the coarse and fine tune levels are distributed and
used by other nodes on the system.
For accurate tuning to be achievable, coarse tuning must have been
correctly adjusted during initialisation. Refer to Chapter 5 Diagnostics and
Commissioning in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.
The current level of tuning is indicated by the shaded bar below the two
modes. This bar indicates the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left,
100% on the right.

65900012 12-3
Radar ECDIS User Guide

Manual Fine Tuning Adjustment

For manual fine tuning long pulse (LP) must be selected, ideally using a
high scale ratio that shows a known target near to the edge of the display.
To manually fine tune do the following.
1. Click the Manual radio button. In manual mode the tuning indicator
colour changes from grey to green.
2. Left click in the Tune bar to activate
the control. The tune bar divides
into two, the upper bar is the tuning
indicator (shown in green), and the
lower bar is the tuning control level
indicator (shown in blue) which
indicates how well the receiver is tuned.
2. Move the trackball left or right to adjust the tuning control (lower
bar) until the maximum level is reached on the tuning indicator
(upper bar). If distant targets are visible, use these for the final
adjustment.
3. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. A right click will
de-activate the bar but not set the new level.

12-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

Video
The Video sub-menu enables the following
settings and mode selections to be made:
Video Processing Controls -
enables adjustment of the Gain
setting and the anti-clutter (Rain
and Sea) settings.
Auto Anti-Clutter and Enhance
Video mode.
Vector Mode - Relative or True
Trails - selection of trail type.
For a description of the vector modes, see
Vector Modes in `Chapter 3 - Basic
Operation of ECDIS’.
Video Processing Controls
The current video processing level is
indicated by the shaded bar adjacent to the
control caption. All the video processing
levels are shown in grey colour (non-
editable) in Standby. In Transmit mode the
Gain level is shown as green.
In open sea conditions, tick the Auto Anti-
Clutter check box to suppress rain and sea
clutter. This normally provides optimum
detection by adapting the amount of clutter suppression applied to the
varying characteristics of clutter returns.
Video GAIN
Always adjust the Gain setting while on the longer scale ratios. A
light background speckle should be present to achieve the best
target detection and long range performance. A temporary
reduction in gain can be beneficial when searching for targets in
rain or snow conditions. Video gain is independently adjustable for
Auto and Manual anti-clutter modes.
Anti Clutter (RAIN)
Use the Anti-Clutter Rain control to optimise suppression of rain
clutter, i.e. balance the detection of targets within the clutter region
(under the rain) with detection of those outside the clutter region.

65900012 12-5
Radar ECDIS User Guide

Always use the control with great care. Excessive suppression can
cause loss of small targets. It is often advantageous to use this
control to search for targets in the clutter region, returning the
control to zero after the search.
Anti Clutter (SEA)
Use the Anti-Clutter Sea control to reduce sea clutter to an
operational level where some residual clutter speckle is present.
The setting must permit small targets, often of similar signal
strength to the sea clutter returns to be detected.
Always use the control with great care. Avoid setting the control to
completely remove all sea clutter, as this will reduce the detection
of small targets. The setting should be periodically checked as
prevailing sea conditions change.
Manually Adjusting Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls
The video processing controls can be adjusted independently. The
Rain/Sea anti clutter levels can only be adjusted when the Auto Anti-Clutter
is switched off.
To manually adjust the Video GAIN, RAIN and SEA settings, do the
following:
The Gain and anti-clutter settings may be adjusted either from the control
panel, or by using the trackball.
IMPORTANT NOTE – There are different stored values of Gain
setting for Auto Anti Clutter and Manual, you will need different
settings for each mode.
To adjust the settings using the trackball:
1. Position the screen cursor over the control you wish to change.
2. Left click to make control bar active. The bar colour will appear
blue.
3. Move the trackball left or right to move
the bar to the gain/suppression level
required; as the bar is adjusted the
current percentage figure appears in the
centre of the field. You can exit the
adjustment and return to the previous
setting by right clicking.
4. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar adjustment. The
bar will return to its green shaded state and the percentage figure
disappears.

12-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

5. When Auto Anti-Clutter check box is ticked after adjustment the

Rain and Sea anti clutter settings appear grey.
To adjust the settings using the control panel:
1. Turn the required video rotary control clockwise to increase the
gain or anti-clutter level, or anti-clockwise to suppress the gain or
anti-clutter level.

The Video rotary controls only adjust the gain/suppression levels.

The adjusted level is set and the bar deactivated after a 10 second
period of inactivity.

Enhanced Video Mode

A substantial improvement in the presentation of small and/or short range
targets can normally be achieved by selecting the enhanced video mode.
This facility is available on a scale ratio of 1:10,000 and above.
In estuary and open sea conditions, always use the enhanced video mode
for best target detection. To enable enhanced video tick the Enhance
check box.

CAUTION:

Use the Enhance Control with caution. If used on a low

scale ratio it will degrade target discrimination.

Trails
The display can be set to show decaying video
trails, showing the history of a targets'
movements across the screen.
The way the trails are shown depends on the
motion mode in use:
In Relative Motion – Relative Trails
(RM(R)) the trails indicate the
movement of the targets relative to own
ship. In this mode trails are shown as Relative.
In True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion – True Trails (RM (T)) the
trails have own ship's speed applied (ground based or water
based). In this mode trails are shown as True.
Trails are only shown in Transmit Mode, not in Standby Mode.

65900012 12-7
Radar ECDIS User Guide

The following Trails Modes are available:

SHORT
High rate of decay giving a short trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use. See Trial Length Time table.

The trail time defaults to SHORT after power up.

LONG
Low rate of decay giving a long trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use. See Trial Length Time table.
PERM
Permanent trail which does not decay. When the trail length
exceeds 60 minutes >60min 0s is displayed.
OFF
Trails are removed from display.
RESET
Resets the Trails time to zero and momentarily clears all existing
trails from the display.
To reset the trails time click on the Reset button
Trail Length Time
The trail time shows the length of the trails in minutes and seconds. If the
trails are still below their maximum length, a count-up time is shown,
indicating how long they have been building up.
The selection of Long or Short Trails changes the trail time and is
dependant on the scale ratio in use, see Scale Ratio. When the scale ratio
is changed the trail time restarts at zero before building up to the maximum
time for the scale ratio and trail type selected. If Permanent Trails mode is
selected the trails do not decay.
When switching between trails length it takes as long as the new time
selection for the trail time to be representative. For example, changing from
3 minutes on Long to 60 seconds on Short will take 60 seconds for the
trails to represent how far the targets have moved. During this period the
trails displayed are not representative of the displayed trail time and so the
trail time is shown in the warning colour (amber).

12-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

The table below lists the long and short maximum trail times, relative to the
scale ratio.
Scale Ratio Short Trail time Long Trail time
1:4,000 10 sec 30 sec

1:8,000 15 sec 45 sec

1:20,000 30 sec 60 sec

1:30,000 30 sec 1m 30sec

1:80,000 and above 60 sec 3 min

Interswitch
The Interswitch sub-menu is divided into the
following areas: Request for Display and
Status.
Request for Display
The Request for Display area lists the
Transceivers fitted to the system with their
alpha identifier. The transceivers available for
selection are online, the unavailable
transceivers (greyed out) are fitted but offline.
The number of transceivers displayed will
depend on your system configuration.
Up to six transceivers can be connected to up
to six displays. The number of transceivers
that may be set up is dependent on the
interswitch status as follows:
When no interswitch is fitted to the system:
the Master/Slave selection is fixed at
commissioning with the system
defaulting to Master.
the transceiver identification is fixed at
A.

65900012 12-9
Radar ECDIS User Guide

When an interswitch is fitted to the system:

the master/slave display, display identifier and transceiver
identification are determined from the interswitch.
if the interswitch is two-way then only transceivers A and B may be
set up.
if the interswitch is six-way then all transceivers A, B, C, D, E and F
may be set up.
To select the Master or Slave status of the available transceiver click the
relevant radio button.
Status
The Status area displays the current transceiver settings for each Display
set at the Request for Display area. Transceivers not available are shown
greyed out and default to Slave.

12-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

Radar Alarms
The following series of radar alarms may be raised by the system.
Video Settings Alarms
Low Video Level
The signal level of the video received from the transceiver is monitored at
regular intervals when the display is in transmit. If the level falls below an
optimal video level a low video alarm is raised. The low video alarm is
cleared when:
the monitored video level is greater than or equal to an optimum
video level; or
the radar is in standby.
Communications Alarms
Transceiver Communications
A transceiver communications alarm is raised if a valid message has not
been received from the transceiver for more than 4 seconds. The alarm is
raised regardless of the display’s standby/transmit status. The alarm is
cleared whenever valid messages are received.
PCIO Communications with SC2 and USB
A PCIO communications alarm is raised within 10 seconds if the physical
connection between the SC2 board and the PCIO unit, or the PC USB and
the PCIO unit is broken. The alarm is raised regardless of the display’s
standby/transmit status. The alarm is cleared when the connection is fixed
and valid messages are received.

65900012 12-11
Radar ECDIS User Guide

Transceiver Alarms
Trigger Error
A trigger error alarm is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and there
are fewer valid triggers than expected. The alarm is cleared when:
the number of triggers returns to the expected value; or
the transceiver is switched to standby.
Azimuth Error
An azimuth error alarm is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and
either:
the number of azimuth pulses between heading markers is greater
or less than a margin of error of 5 pulses centred on a nominal
value of 4096 pulses; or
the number of pulses per revolution is within the margin of error,
but a small error persists for a period of time (e.g. 4095 pulses per
rev are received continually).
The azimuth error alarm is cleared when:
neither of the alarm conditions is satisfied; or
the transceiver is switched to standby.
Heading Marker Error
When the transceiver is in transmit an error alarm is raised if a heading
marker has not been received for more than 10 seconds. If a heading
marker has not been received for more than 30 seconds the Master Display
automatically switches the connected transceiver to standby.
The heading marker error alarm is cleared when:
a heading marker is received; or
the transceiver is switched to standby.
Pulse Length Error
An error alarm is raised if, after a delay no greater than 4 seconds, the
display’s requested pulse length does not match the pulse length of its
connected transceiver. The alarm is cleared automatically when
The requested pulse length matches that of its connected
transceiver
The display is switched to Standby.
The display is switched to a Slave

12-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Radar

Transceiver BITE
A Transceiver BITE alarm is only raised when the system is connected to a
BME or BM II transceiver. The alarm automatically clears when:
there are no failed BITE parameters; or
if the connected transceiver is not a BME or BM II transceiver.
Interswitch Alarms
Interswitch alarms are raised under the following conditions:
The Interswitch communications has failed; or
The interswitch model conflicts with the configured model.

65900012 12-13
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Chapter 13 Autopilot
If compliance with international standards for Track Control is required, the
configured autopilot for the VisionMaster system must be a Sperry
31
NAVIPILOT 4000 , this device is known as an Autopilot.
When an Autopilot interface is configured, the system
provides an Autopilot button on the Main Menu. An
Autopilot button also appears on the upper toolbar,
providing quick access to the Autopilot sub menus.
To access the Autopilot sub menus either
click on Autopilot in the main menu list or
right click on the Autopilot button in the
upper toolbar. The Autopilot sub menu list is
displayed with the following selection options:
Auto Status
Auto Control Mode
VM Heading Control
Track Control Settings

31
Additional Autopilot models such as ADG3000 and C-Path HSC are also compatible with
the VisionMaster system and can be configured if the vessel does not require track control
certification. For further information, contact your VisionMaster supplier.

65900012 13-1
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

Auto Status
The Auto Status window displays current status
information on the Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000
Autopilot.
The table below provides a summary of the
indicator fields on the Status window.
Heading Explanation
Master SCU Master Steering Control Unit of the
ship’s steering system.
Autopilot Mode The Autopilot mode of operation.
When VisionMaster Heading or Track
Control has been activated, this will
read External Heading Command.
When the autopilot is in Auto mode,
this will read Autopilot Heading
Control. In any other mode, this
readout will be the same as the mode
indicated on the Control Mode
window.
Cmd. Heading The present commanded heading to
to Steer steer.
Rate of Turn The present commanded rate of turn.
Cmd. Rudder The present commanded rudder
Angle angle.
Cmd. Rudder Left or Right state of rudder
Direction command.
Cmd. Off The off-heading tolerance
Heading Limit commanded at the Autopilot
Rudder Order Indicates whether the rudder order
Limit Status limit set at the autopilot has been
reached.
Cmd. Rudder Commanded Rudder Limit.
Limit
Radius of Turn The present commanded radius of
turn.

13-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Auto Control Mode

Control Mode Selection
The control mode can be selected in one of two
ways:
1. From the Autopilot main menu select
Auto Control Mode. The Autopilot
Control Mode window opens with the
currently selected mode's radio button
in highlight. To change the mode click
an alternative control mode's radio
button.
Or:
2. The current Autopilot Control Mode is
shown in abbreviated form on the upper
toolbar. To change the mode click on
the button, and select an alternative
control mode from the drop down list.
If an Autopilot control mode is not currently

available for selection its lettering is shown as orange.

The following three selectable steering modes are shown in the upper
portion of the Control Mode window, and are also listed in the drop down
list from the Autopilot button.
Autopilot Heading Control
VisionMaster Heading Control
Track Control
Note that the three modes are not available for selection until the Autopilot
is placed into AUTO mode, at which time the first mode becomes selected
with no action required at the VisionMaster system. VisionMaster Heading
Control and/or Track Control may be displayed in the warning colour if the
mode availability criteria are not met. In some cases the system provides a
temp prompt when attempting to select an unavailable mode to indicate
why the mode is not available. For example, selecting Track mode from the

65900012 13-3
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

context menu when the present XTE is too large. When the availability
criteria are met the operator at any VisionMaster node can switch between
all three modes as needed based on operational requirements.
Non-Selectable Control Modes
The additional modes shown on the Control Mode window are for indication
purposes only. The selections for these modes are made at the steering
system, and the modes that can be indicated will vary depending on the
steering system configuration.
Autopilot Control Mode Description
The three selectable control modes are described below.
1. Autopilot Heading Control (Autopilot Hdg)
The heading order and turn rate is controlled at the Autopilot, not at
VisionMaster. AUTO is displayed at the Autopilot.
2. VisionMaster Heading Control (VM Heading)
This mode is the default control mode at VisionMaster and is
activated by selecting NAV mode at the Autopilot.
The Heading Order and Turn Rate are controlled at VisionMaster
using the VM Heading Control menu, see VisionMaster Heading
Control.
3. Track Control (Track)
When this mode is selected the VisionMaster system automatically
adjusts the heading order and the rate order, making adjustments
automatically as required to steer own ship along the track of a
monitored route (either a temp route or saved route).
The system uses an availability criteria for Track Control to ensure
a save transition into this highly automated control mode. (See
Activating Track Mode).
Autopilot on a Multi-node System
All nodes within a multi-node system will have access to all of the Autopilot
related functions, including the ability to engage and disengage track
control. Appropriate indications are provided at all nodes in order to make
all operators aware of any important events related to track control,
including change of steering modes and imminent course changes. Under
certain failure scenarios the system may automatically switch out of Track
Control mode, downgrading to VM Heading Control, or downgrade further
into Autopilot Control mode by forcing the autopilot out of NAV mode. The
nature or the failure determines the system response.

13-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Autopilot Heading Control

The Autopilot heading control enables the Autopilot to have full control of
ship's heading. In this mode heading data may be set at the Autopilot, the
system then switches from controlling own ship's heading from an external
compass to controlling the heading from the Autopilot.
When Autopilot Heading Control is active the Autopilot enters `Auto mode'.
To change the control mode back to VisionMaster control mode (default
mode) select Nav mode from the Autopilot, the control mode will
automatically change from Autopilot to VisionMaster Heading Control.

65900012 13-5
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

VisionMaster Heading Control

VisionMaster Heading Control is the default
steering mode when NAV Mode (external
heading control) is selected from the
Autopilot. In this mode traditional Autopilot
functions (setting the heading order and turn
rate) now reside at any VM node having the
necessary Autopilot interface configured.
The autopilot system itself will still issue the
rudder commands to the steering system to
achieve the order and rate set by
VisionMaster.
When VM heading control is activated the
following settings become available.
Heading Order - the heading order is initially set to the current
heading of own ship upon activating VM Heading Control mode.
The value entered in this control is provided to the Autopilot as the
Set Heading, and indicated as such at the Autopilot.
Rate Order – When VM Heading mode is first activated after
system start-up, this value is set to own ship's nominal turn rate
defined in the system configuration, or it is set to last used Max.
Rate Order without Confirmation if that value is less than the
configured nominal turn rate. The rate order set by VisionMaster is
indicated as such at the Autopilot.
Max. Rate Order Without Confirmation - any turn rate orders
larger than this value must be confirmed by the operator.
The Rate Order and Max Rate Without Confirmation values cannot be set
higher than the configured own ship maximum turn rate. Refer to
VisionMaster Ship's Manual, Chapter 4 `Configuration', Own Ship Static
Data for more details.

13-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

To change any of the VM Heading Control values do the following.

1. Click in the respective fields and move the trackball left to decrease
the value, or right to increase the value. Left click in the field to set
the value, or let the timeout occur (about 10 seconds).
Or
2. Right click to display the numeric keypad, type in the desired value,
and select OK on the keypad.
If the Heading Order is adjusted a confirmation prompt will appear
to help ensure that the Heading order is to be set to the desired
value. The order is not sent to the autopilot until it is confirmed.
The indicated ‘Minimum Recommended Rate
Order’ value is related to the configured nominal
speed, beam and length set in Own Ship Static
Data. Refer to VisionMaster Ship's Manual,
Chapter 4 `Configuration'.
If the operator sets a rate order lower than the
minimum recommended rate order the system
provides a warning to recommend a higher rate
order.

65900012 13-7
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

Track Control
Track Control mode (or Track mode) allows the VisionMaster system to
automatically adjust the heading order and the rate order to steer own ship
along the track of a monitored route.
For initial activation of Track Control mode, the conditions below must be
met.
1. A monitored route or temporary route must be currently monitored
on a straight leg (not in a planned turn).
2. Valid sensors must be selected for the following data:
Course Over Ground (COG)
Position
Heading
Speed through Water (STW)
3. Ship’s COG is within 5 degrees of the current leg bearing.
4. The XTE (cross track error) on the current leg is presently less than
25 meters.
If these conditions are not met the Track Control option on the Control
Mode window and upper toolbar drop down list appear in the warning
(orange) colour, and will not be selectable.

WARNING!

When Track Control is enabled the operator should

not change the currently selected sensors as this may
cause a large change to the heading order.

Track Control on a Multi-node System

All nodes within a multi-node system will have access to all of the Autopilot
related functions, including the ability to engage and disengage track
control. Appropriate indications are provided at all nodes in order to make
all operators aware of any important events related to track control,
including change of steering modes and imminent course changes. Under
certain failure scenarios the system may automatically switch out of Track
Control mode, downgrading to VM Heading Control, or downgrade further
into Autopilot Control mode by forcing the autopilot out of NAV mode. The
nature or the failure determines the system response.

13-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Tracking a Monitored Route

Assuming the conditions listed in Track Control section have been met,
track control mode may be enabled.
To enable track control on a monitored route do the following:
1. Select Nav Mode from the Autopilot (for details on Autopilot
operation, refer to `NAVIPILOT 4000, Installation and Operation
Manual', document reference JA19-8039). If the current XTE
(distance off track) of own ship from the monitored route exceeds
the value in the system configuration (10 metres default) then
Track Control will be unavailable for selection from Control Mode.
2. Select Track Control, either from the
upper toolbar, or from the Autopilot
Control Mode window, see Control
Mode. When Track Control is enabled
for the monitored route the Track
Control Settings window and an
Operator Message appear at all system
nodes to inform operators of the
change in steering mode. The time of
track control engagement is included along with an Acknowledge
button. The message should be acknowledged independently on
each node.
Activating Track Control on a Monitored Route
If the current XTE or the COG are not within the required tolerances Track
Control will be unavailable. In this case there are two methods to activate
Track Control:
1. Steer onto the monitored route using VM Heading mode until the
ship is close enough to the track and on the required course before
selecting Track Mode.
Or:
2. Create a Temp Route whilst in VM Heading mode with a ‘Return-
to-Plan’ waypoint, see Temporary Routes.
The method selected usually depends on whether the ship is presently
deviating significantly from the track line of the monitored route.

65900012 13-9
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

If a Temp Route is used whilst in VM Heading

mode the system provides an Operator Message
when selecting `Start’ to allow immediate transfer
into track mode upon starting the temp route, if
desired. If ‘No’ is selected the temp route is
started but the system does not switch to track
mode, and all course changes must be made by
the operator.
For information on monitoring and editing a temp route in a multi-node
system, see Temp Route Monitoring on a Multi-node System.
For information on changing settings during track control, see Track Control
Settings.
Alarms and Indications
Course Change Messages
Course change operator messages appear on the
screen whenever a course change is
approaching. The operator message includes an
Acknowledgement button.
In accordance with International Regulations the
planned course changes will be initiated as long
as Track Mode is active, regardless of whether
the course change messages are acknowledged.
However, system alarms will occur when the
messages are not acknowledged, culminating in an emergency alarm
intended to notify the ‘backup navigator.’ The normal sequence for course
change operator messages is described in more detail below.
The system provides an operator message as an `Early Indication of an
upcoming Course Change'. This message appears at all operating nodes
and normally occurs 5 minutes before the wheel-over point for the indicated
waypoint. The message may occur less than 5 minutes before wheel-over
in the case of a very short leg, but will always occur before the wheel-over
TTG reaches 1 minute. The early indication can be acknowledged at any
node, and will be cleared from all nodes after acknowledgement.

13-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

When the wheel-over TTG reaches 1 minute the

system provides a Course Change Imminent
message, which can also be acknowledged at
any node. If the early indication message was
not acknowledged before wheel-over TTG
reaches 1 minute, or the Course Change
Imminent message is not acknowledged before
wheel-over, the system provides a Turn Not
Acknowledged alarm.
Note that the course change will be executed at wheel-over in track mode
even if none of the messages are acknowledged. However, the system will
provide a ‘Backup Navigator’ alarm 30 seconds after the wheel-over point if
the Turn Not Acknowledged alarm remains unacknowledged. This alarm is
normally connected to an external alarm system that will notify appropriate
ship’s personnel that a course change has been executed without being
acknowledged by the attending operator.
Track Control Alarms
In addition to the course change alarms, the following track control alarms
may also be raised:
Autopilot power supply failure and Autopilot power supply
reduction.
If ship's heading deviates from the track course beyond a default
course limit.
When own ship is 3 minutes (+/- 2 minutes) before the last
waypoint of the active track is passed. If this alarm is not
acknowledged within 30 seconds, the back-up navigator alarm is
raised.
If the current required ROT exceeds the planned ROT (see Monitor
Route - Route Tab) by the Required ROT Difference Limit (see the
Alerts tab in the Monitor Route – Route Tab) an Excessive Turn
Rate alarm is raised approximately 5 minutes before wheel over.

65900012 13-11
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

Track Control Settings

The Track Control Settings window can be displayed by selecting
Autopilot from the bottom right menu area, and then selecting Track
Control Settings, or by clicking on Autopilot button on the upper toolbar
and selecting Track from the drop-down menu.
The Track Control Settings window is
divided into the following three areas:
Track Control Data
Limits and Settings
Turn To Next Leg
Certain data shown on the Track Control
Settings window is replicated in the
Monitor Route - Route Tab.
Track Control Data
The Track Control Data area displays the
following read-only data:
Leg Bearing - the current leg
bearing of the monitored route.
XTE (Cross Track Error) - the
distance, in metres, own ship is off
track from the monitored route. L
= number of metres left of track, R
= number of metres right of track.
Track Order - the order currently
issued by VisionMaster to stay on
the monitored leg of the route.

13-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Limits & Settings

The Limits & Settings area includes the following data:
Base - displays the base order, which is initially equal to the
current leg bearing, but can be adjusted by clicking in the Base
field and moving the trackball left to decrease, or right to increase
the value. In practice the Base order is rarely adjusted by the
operator. The Port and Stbd limits are automatically adjusted
along with the base order.
Limit from Base – The difference between the
limits and the base, which is selected from a drop
down menu. To change the limit click on the drop
down arrow and select from the list, between
002.0° to 045.0°. If the calculated track order
reaches a value that falls outside the indicated
limits the system provides an Operator Message
with options to accept or decline the new order, or adjust the limits.
Reaching the order limit may indicate the presence of an increasing
cross-current that requires a larger adjustment to the heading order
to maintain the intended track. The operator should normally select
a ‘Limit From Base’ value that allows reasonable automatic
adjustments to maintain the track without constant operator
messages to do so.
Track Sensitivity - allows the operator to adjust track-keeping
performance to account for factors such as present traffic
conditions, weather, ship’s location, and position sensor
performance. Track Sensitivity determines the magnitude of track
order adjustment for a given XTE. The default selections are
Loose, Medium and Tight. These definitions may be modified
during installation, and choices may be added or removed
depending on the particular requirements of the vessel. To select
the desired sensitivity click on the drop-down arrow and select from
the list.
Adjust Set and Drift - This should normally remain ticked so that
the system will adjust track order using its presently computed Set
and Drift data. Note that the track control system uses its own
internally computed set & drift, which may vary from the set & drift
value shown in the available sensor menu.

65900012 13-13
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

Track Heading Order Limit Reached Messages

The Track Heading Order Limit Reached Operator Message is a request
for operator approval of an order that falls outside the limits. It includes the
option buttons: Accept, Decline or Adjust Limits.
When the Accept button is selected, the Base order will be
adjusted to the value selected by the operator. The Port & Stbd
limits will move with the base keeping their respective differences
as set under Limit From Base. The system will now be free to
issue heading orders based on the new Base order.
Decline may be selected if the operator believes the ship is already
moving toward the track at an acceptable rate. If this is true the
operator message may clear on its own as the calculated heading
eventually falls between the Port & Stbd limits.
Adjust Limits displays the Track Control Settings menu if it was
not already displayed, to allow adjustments to the base order and
Limits if desired.
Turn To Next Leg
The Turn To Next Leg area displays the following read-only data:
Leg TTG (Time To Go) - the time to go along the route leg to next
wheel-over, based on own ship's SOG.
Turn Radius - the turn radius in NM nautical miles.
Required ROT (Rate Of Turn) - the required rate of turn based on
own ship's SOG.
Next Leg Brg - true bearing of the next route leg.

13-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Autopilot

Temp Route Monitoring on a Multi-node System

When an operator at a given node begins editing a monitored temporary
route, the edited version of the route is only visible on that node.
If the edited version of the temp route is validated and the Start button on
the Temp Route folder is selected, the temporary route becomes visible at
all nodes in the colour that indicates it is now being monitored (orange for a
monitored route; purple for a route being edited).
For route editing scenarios on a multi-node system, see the section below.
Simultaneous Temp Route Editing on Multi-nodes
A temporary route may be simultaneously edited on two or more nodes.
The following scenario assumes a temporary route, transitioning to a
planned monitored route, is being edited and started on two nodes.
If the operator on the first node completes editing and begins route
monitoring by clicking the Start button the newly monitored temporary
route will be graphically displayed on each node.
The operator editing the same temp route on the second node will, in
addition to the edited (purple) route on that node, see the monitored
route redrawn at the new position.
If the operator on the second node continues editing the temp route and
then starts route monitoring, that version of the temp route on the
second node will supersede the version created on the first node and
will be displayed on all nodes.

65900012 13-15
Autopilot ECDIS User Guide

When temporary route monitoring is started while the Autopilot is in a mode

in which it is already accepting commands from VisionMaster (e.g. VM
Heading Control mode), the system prompts to change control mode to
Track Control using the temporary route.
If the operator clicks Yes, the system will enter
Track Control mode, and operators at all nodes
will see the Operator Message indicating that
Track control was engaged. If the operator clicks
No, the system will monitor the temporary route,
but remain in the current steering mode.

13-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Conning Information Display

Chapter 14 Conning Information Display

If the VisionMaster FT system is configured
for a Conning information Display (CID) as
an Optional Feature (for information see
Chapter 4 `Configuration' in the VisionMaster
Ship's Manual) the following functions are
available by clicking on the CID button in the
lower popup toolbar.
Steering Mode & Route Info
Docking

65900012 14-1
Conning Information Display ECDIS User Guide

Track Control
Track Control Status Window
To access the Track Control window click on the CID button on the lower
popup toolbar and select Track Control. The Track Control popup window
appears on the chart display.

The Track Control window displays the following read-only data for own
ship:
True heading data, the current bearing value as shown in the HDG
data display (see Sensor Data Display) and the data source of the
value e.g. Gyro. A graphical display below the HDG also shows the
bearing value.
Rate of Turn, the current rate of turn in degrees per minute as
shown in the ROT folder, (see Rate of Turn Values). A graphical
display below the ROT also shows the degrees per minute value.
Course and Speed data, including STW, SOG, COG values as
shown in their respective folders (see Sensor Data Display) and the
data source of the value e.g. GPS.
Depth value, as shown in Depth folder (see Depth Source Values)
and the data source of the value.

14-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Conning Information Display

System date and time, either UTC or local time, as shown in the
Current Date and Time field.
Route Information - information on the currently monitored route. If
no route is being monitored the data fields are shown with dashes.

65900012 14-3
Conning Information Display ECDIS User Guide

Docking Display
The docking display uses various sensor data from serial interfaces
connected to the PCIO unit to compute own ship’s fore and aft motion and
its port and starboard velocity at the bow and the stern.
The docking display is intended for use during ship docking and other low-
speed manoeuvring operations such as anchoring.
To access the docking display
window click on the CID button
on the lower popup toolbar and
select Docking. The Docking
Display popup window appears
on the chart display.
The docking display shows the
following data:
True heading data, the
current bearing value as
shown in the HDG data
display (see Sensor Data
Display) and the data
source of the value e.g.
Gyro. A graphical display
below the HDG also
shows the bearing value.
True course over ground,
the current bearing value as shown in the COG data display (see
Sensor Data Display) and the data source of the value e.g. GPS.
Rate of Turn, the current rate of turn in degrees per minute as
shown in the ROT folder, (see Rate of Turn Values). A graphical
display below the ROT also shows the degrees per minute value.
Speed over Ground (SOG) data displaying the following values (in
kilometres) and source of data:
Bow Port/Starboard speed over ground
Ship Port/Starboard speed over ground
Ship Fore/Aft speed over ground
Stern Port/Starboard speed over ground

14-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Chapter 15 System
The System menu provides access to the
following system facilities:
User Profiles
Options
Diagnostics
Commissioning
Time Management
Shutdown

65900012 15-1
System ECDIS User Guide

User Profiles
The User Profiles submenu enables you to
create, delete, apply, save, view and update
profiles that contain node specific chart,
route, and other display settings. Saved
profiles are maintained by the system and
are available after a system restart.
In addition to the System menu the User
Profiles sub menu can be can be accessed
by left clicking on the Profiles button in the
lower toolbar area and selecting Edit/Create
Profile.

Previously created and saved profiles can be selected in the Available

Profiles selection drop down list. If no profiles have been created this field
is blank.
If no new user profiles have been created the Apply, Delete and View/Edit
buttons are greyed out.
New profiles can be created either from the currently active display settings
or from the default system settings. A profile name must be entered in the
Create New Profile field prior to creating a new profile.
Multi-Node Functionality
The collection of available user profiles is saved and retrieved in a
database, shared between all nodes within a multi-node system. When a
profile is applied, it is generally only applied to that particular node.
Most changes made to a user profile will only effect the profile on that
node, the exceptions to this rule are changes to the following:
Safety Depth
Deep Contour
Shallow Contour.
If you change any of the above values to an applied profile on one node,
this edited profile will be applied on all nodes.

15-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Create New Profile

When creating a new user profile, you have the option of selecting values
for the various settings, and also the option of choosing whether or not a
given setting is included in your profile. For example, a profile may be
created that only contains display settings for routes, or one that only
contains settings for charts. By default, all available settings are included
in the profile.
To create a new profile do the following
1. Left click in the Create New Profile field. The screen keypad
appears.
2. Enter a profile name, use the trackball to navigate to the relevant
alpha-numeric keys and left click. When a profile name has been
entered click the OK button on the keypad. The keypad is removed
and the name entered in the Create New Profile field.
3. To create the new profile from system default settings click the
From Default Settings.. button. The settings list appears with all
chart and map features ticked in the Selection folder. To edit the
settings refer to Available Profiles. Click the Save button to save
the edited settings to the created profile.
Or
4. To create the new profile based on the currently selected setting
click the From Current Settings.. button. The current settings for
the profile selected in the Available Profiles list appear. To edit the
settings refer to Available Profiles. Click the Save button to save
the edited settings to the created profile. following:

65900012 15-3
System ECDIS User Guide

With a profile setting displayed in the Available

Profiles field click the View/Edit button.
The Editing tab shows the specific settings
contained in the selected profile and enables
you to edit these settings; the Selection tab lists
all the available settings and allows you to
choose whether or not a setting should be
included in the profile.
The list of chart dangers, charting and route
plan settings in User Profiles is reflected in the
following sub menus:
Chart Dangers in the Charts menu - for
changes to Dangers settings.
Chart Depths in the Charts menu - for
changes to Charting settings.
Setting Custom Chart Features in the
Charts menu - for changes to chart
engine settings.
Route Display Settings in the Routes
menu - for changes to route plans.
To change profile selections do the
following:
To select or deselect profile features:
1. Click on the Selection tab. To select all
the features in the list click the Select
All button, or to deselect all the
features, including the selected profile
settings, click the Deselect All button.
2. To select individual profile features open
the navigation tree by ticking the feature
sub menu check box and tick the check
boxes of the individual features.
2. Click the Save button to confirm
selection changes, or click the Cancel
button to return to the previous screen.

15-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

To edit a user profile, do the following:

To change the Danger look ahead time or the common charting values:
1. Click in the required field, the text becomes green (editable).
2. Move the trackball left to increase or right to increase the value,
with the required value entered left click to exit edit mode.
The IMO display option defines the level of
chart detail, the default option is Standard.
The drop down arrow of the display option
lists the three chart feature sets shown in
Feature Set, with the addition of Plus
options for each set. Where custom
selections to a chart feature set are made in
User Profiles the Plus option for that set
must be selected (together with the Apply
Custom Features box ticked in Feature
Set) in order to display the chart selections
on screen.
The Charting and Route Plan features
displayed in the Editing tab folder are
dependant on the selections made in the
Selections tab folder.
To select custom charting and route plan
features in the Editing tab folder:
1. Tick the check box of the Charting or Route Plan feature you want
to apply to the profile, as the cursor is moved over the features a
brief description of the feature is displayed at the bottom of the
Editing tab folder.
2. To change the text scaling click in the Text Scale Factor field and
move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the scaling.
The maximum text scale factor is 3.0.
3. Select the IMO display option from the drop down arrow, i.e. if the
feature set is Standard select Standard Plus.
4. When custom settings have been made click on the Save button.
The settings are saved and the menu returns with the edited profile
highlighted in the Available Profiles list.
5. To cancel any profile setting changes click on the Cancel button.

65900012 15-5
System ECDIS User Guide

Available Profiles
Saved profiles in the Available Profiles list are viewed and edited in the
same way as described previously for Creating a New Profile.
To apply or delete a user profile do the following:
1. Select a previously created user
profile from the Available Profiles
list.
2. To apply a profile, click the Apply
button. When a settings profile is
applied, the system updates the
corresponding features with the
setting values stored in the profile only on the node where the
profile was applied. If successful a temporary prompt appears
confirming profile application.
3. To delete a profile click the Delete button. When a profile is to be
deleted the system prompts to confirm, select OK to confirm the
profile deletion.
To restore all settings affected by a profile to their default values on an
individual node click the Restore Defaults button. If successful a
temporary prompt appears confirming default settings have been restored.

15-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Options
The Options window displays a selection of
common units which are displayed when the
system is running, (e.g. meters, knots,
degrees etc.)
If the selection of units has not been enabled
for the operator at commissioning (which is
the default mode), then the Options window
displays the units as read-only information.

65900012 15-7
System ECDIS User Guide

Diagnostic Functions
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu includes the
following which have functionality for a non-
logged on user:
Performance Monitor - can be
enabled to monitor the performance
of the system (default mode), or
monitor the receiver.
Report - enables reports to be generated and exported to an
external device.
DataLog - enables individual datalog files to be viewed and a
datalog zip file to be generated and exported to an external device.
Sensor Status - displays the state of the data from the currently
selected data source, as shown on the Sensor Data Display.
Buzzer - enables the Alarm buzzer to be tested.
The following diagnostic functions contain read-only information for the
non-logged on user. For a description of these functions refer to Chapter 5
`Diagnostics and Commissioning' in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.
Time - displays transmission time and total persisted runtime data.
Tx/Rx Config - displays configuration data on the currently
selected transceiver.
Tx/Rx Data - displays pulse data, antenna RPM and heading
marker data on the currently selected transceiver.
Tx/Rx BITE - displays test results from the transceiver BITE (when
connected to a BridgeMaster (BM) E or BM II transceiver).
Version - displays version information on system components.
When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the
following additional diagnostic features are available:
S/W - displays version information of all operational system
software, including charting data.

15-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor folder displays the current operational
Transceiver (Tx/Rx); selected from the Radar menu, see Interswitch
Control.
Before using the Performance Monitor (PM) select the following operating
parameters:
Master Display (Interswitch systems)
Transmit mode
Radar Video on
Gain setting at optimum level (if the setting is too low or too high
the four tuning arcs may not be visible).
Performance Monitor Operation
A non-logged on user can operate the PM and adjust the monitor mode
(Receiver or System) tune levels to determine if there has been a drop in
performance.
In a multi-node system the PM monitor tuning settings are distributed and
used by other nodes on the system.
To turn on the performance monitor (PM) tick the check box next to On.

In Operator mode the PM switches off automatically after 10

seconds.

If sector blanking is active the system displays a warning prompt informing

the operator that sector blanking is inhibited while the PM is switched on.
When the PM is operational and the monitoring mode tuning level is being
adjusted, four arcs are shown on the chart display. These arcs are
approximately 0.3NM apart and start at a scale ratio of around 1:30,000.
The arcs extend from 290° to 320° (S Band), or from 155° to 185° (X
Band), with respect to the heading line. The precise bearing value will alter
depending on the Heading line offset value.

65900012 15-9
System ECDIS User Guide

To adjust the Performance Monitor, do the following:

1. Select Receiver monitoring mode by clicking the Receiver radio
button. The current tuning level is shown as a green bar.
2. Left click in the Tune bar to activate
the control and move the trackball to
the left to set the tune bar to
minimum. While adjustment is in
progress the tuning bar colour
changes to blue.
3. Slowly move the trackball to the right
to display maximum presentation of
the four PM arcs that should be visible
in the following video sectors: 290° to
320° for S -band and 155° to 185° for
X-band. The number of arcs displayed shows the current
performance.
4. Select System monitoring mode and repeat steps 1 to 3.

The arcs are spaced at 5dB intervals. If during operation

performance decreases below the second arc, it shows a 10dB
drop in performance.

15-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Report
The Report folder enables you to export a
system fault report to an external device such
as a USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk.
You can quickly access the Reports folder by
right clicking on the iHelp button on the lower
popup toolbar.

Right clicking on the iHelp button also

captures a screenshot of the current
display, which can then be used form
part of an export option, see below.

There are three types of export options

available for reports:
Concise - this option will generate a
smaller report than verbose, making it
easier to transfer over slow internet
connections.
Verbose - this option contains the
same information as the concise
report, however more detail is
included, making the report file larger.
Complete - this option contains all
verbose information, with the addition
of log files, over a 24 hour period.
The default export option is Verbose.
With the exception of ‘screenshot only’ the fault report will include the
following file types:
xml schema files
.txt files
.png file (screenshot)
.cfg file (config file)

65900012 15-11
System ECDIS User Guide

To export a fault report do the following:

1. Insert an external device into the PC and select the Report tab
folder.
2. Select the external drive and folder in the navigation field. This will
typically be E:\. If any previous report files are on the device they
will be listed in the field below the device navigation tree as .zip
files.
3. Click in the Filename field and, using the on-screen keypad, enter
a name for the report. The name would typically be related to the
fault, i.e. ‘track fault’ or ‘video error 3’.
4. Select the report type from the three options listed above.
5. If required, enter a description of the report in the Description field.
6. Click on the Export button to generate the report. While the export
is in progress the Export button changes to display Wait... If
successful a temporary prompt will appear confirming the export.
7. When complete click the Eject button before removing the external
device.
DataLog
The system automatically logs all voyage data
to a single relational database management
system (RDBMS) located on the ship’s
network.
The following voyage data is logged to the
database at a periodic default rate of 5
seconds:
Sensor Information
Own Ship Information
Target Information
Chart Information
Node State
The following voyage data is logged to the
database on an event-driven basis:
Routes Information
Announcements Information
A copy of the configuration file is logged to the
database on Node start up. On subsequent
startups a copy of the configuration file is
logged only if the file has changed.

15-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

View DataLog
Individual log files can be selected from a list and their contents viewed in
table format via the Data Log Viewer.
To view datalog files do the following:
1. Click on the View Data Log button. The Data Log Viewer window
appears on the chart display.
2. To view data on a specific log file click on the Log File arrow and
select from the drop down list of xml files.

The Data Log Viewer window may include the following datalog types,
listed as tabs:
Announcement (alarms or warnings generated)
CCRS
Chart (with the VMFT system name in brackets)
Position Sensor
Prompt (list of prompts relevant to the named VMFT system)
VisionMaster Track Control (if enabled).
3. To view log data on a specific type, click on the tab. The data
displayed will include a timestamp and other information relevant to
the datalog type selected.

65900012 15-13
System ECDIS User Guide

Export DataLog
A copy of the datalog file can be exported to an external device, such as a
USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk.
To export a datalog file do the following:
1. Insert an external device into the PC and click on the DataLog tab
folder.
2. Select the log type to be exported, this may be specific voyage
data as listed above, or All Logs, which includes all available
voyage data.
3. The time period that the export will cover defaults to 3 months back
from the current date. To change the date and time period select
the date/time values in the From and To fields and click on the
up/down arrows to move the date/time forward or back.
4. Navigate to the external device sub directory where the datalog is
to be exported to. If any previous datalog or report files are on the
device they will be listed in the field below the device navigation
tree as .zip files.
5. Enter a name for the datalog file in the Filename field.
6. Click the Export button. The system exports the datalog as a zip
file, while the export is in progress the Export button changes to
display Wait... If successful a temporary prompt will appear
confirming the export.

This process may take a long time if all logs are being exported
over an extensive period.

7. When the process is complete the Wait... button returns to display

Export and the zip file name appears in the window above the
buttons. Click the Eject button before removing the external
device.

15-14 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Sensor Status
The system determines the status for received sensor data for each of the
four data types (HDG, STW, COG and SOG) in the Sensor Data Display
The data state for each sensor is shown as a table in the Sensor Status tab
folder. If the data is good the Data State column is shown as a green bar
adjacent to the sensor.
If the data associated with the sensor becomes
`not recently sampled' (a degraded state
resulting in the Cursor and/or Position displays
showing this data in amber) the Data State bar
also displays as amber after approximately 15
seconds.
If the data associated with the sensor becomes
not available (an unusable state resulting in
the displays showing this data in red) the Data
State bar also displays as red after
approximately 50 seconds.
The data state is restored to green when the
sensor data becomes valid.
To view details on the sensor status click the Details button at the bottom
of the window.
A separate window displaying details of the Sensors, Interfaces, Data
Types and Status is displayed.

65900012 15-15
System ECDIS User Guide

Buzzer
The Buzzer folder enables the user to test
the operation of the buzzer, (the buzzer is
located in the Console Monitor).
To test click on the Test Buzzer button. The
alarm buzzer should sound.
If there are any problems with the alarm buzzer refer to section 6.7
`Announcements' in Chapter 4 `Configuration' of the VisionMaster FT
Ship's Manual.

15-16 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Commissioning
The Commissioning menu includes the
following functions:
Login - enables a suitably qualified
user to access locked system
processes by entering a user name
and password.
Tx/Rx - displays a group of settings for all the transceivers which
the display can operate.
Video - displays the video enablement settings and read only data
transmitted by the transceiver.
Authorization - displays authorization information and product
type for the node.
Mute Settings - displays the length of time the alarm buzzer can
be temporarily muted. The default time is 5 minutes.
Characteristics - displays persistent static data relating to own
ship that has been entered in system configuration
When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the
following additional commissioning features are available:
Security - enables a logged on user to create a group of members
(from field engineer, ship admin and seaman).
Service - displays service information on the system.
For a description of all Commissioning functions refer to Chapter 5
`Diagnostics and Commissioning' in the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual.

65900012 15-17
System ECDIS User Guide

Time Management
The Time Management facility enables the
operator to select local date and time and set
a time zone offset from GMT . The window
also displays the sensor (e.g. GPS) which is
used as the time source.
In addition to the System menu the Time
Management window can be quickly
accessed by left clicking on the date and
time field in the lower popup toolbar.
The Time Management window is divided
into three areas:
System Time - enables the
selection of UTC or local time, (local
time represents time offset applied, if
no time offset has been applied then
both UTC and local time will be the
same). The time current time
selected (UTC or Local) is displayed
in the lower popup toolbar.

Local Offset - enables the input of a local time offset from GMT in
either an East direction (offset before GMT) or a West direction
(offset after GMT).
Time Sync Source - shows the selected time sensor used by the
system to synchronize the date and time of all nodes, valid data is
shown in green. The Select Source button enables selection of
other time sources, if configured.

15-18 65900012
ECDIS User Guide System

Local Offset
To set a local time offset do the following
1. Select the direction of the local time offset by clicking on the East
or West radio buttons.
2. Enter the required time offset by clicking in the Hours and Minutes
fields and moving the trackball to the right, left click again to exit
the edit mode.
3. With the correct offset displayed click the Apply button. The Local
time is adjusted to the time offset applied and the lower popup
toolbar shows the local offset time.

65900012 15-19
System ECDIS User Guide

Shutdown
The Shutdown facility enables the operator to
shut down or restart a single node, or all
nodes on the system.

In Operator mode, the Service Mode

and Service Mode All buttons will be
greyed out. They will only be available
if the current operator is logged on as
a Service Engineer.

Restart System is selected if for whatever

reason the operator requires to restart their
particular node on the system. The node will
first power down and then restart. Other nodes
on the system will not be affected.
Shutdown System is only selected when the
operator requires to shut down their particular
node on the system for a prolonged period of time. Other nodes on the
system will not be affected.
Restart All Systems is selected if for whatever reason the operator
requires to restart all the nodes on the system.
When Restart All Systems is selected an
Action Required message appears prompting
to enter CONFIRM in the box below. To
proceed enter CONFIRM (not case dependant)
and click the OK button. All nodes on the
system will first power down and then restart.
Shutdown All Systems is selected if for
whatever reason the operator requires to shut
down all the nodes on the system for a
prolonged period of time.
When Shutdown All Systems is selected the Action Required message
appears. Enter the same password as described above.
For information on fully shutting down the system, see System Shutdown.

15-20 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes

Appendix A Chart Datum Codes

The table below lists Chart Datums with their identification codes.

Code Description
ABI Abidjan, Ivory Coast

ACC Leigon Pillar (GCS No 121), Accra, Ghana

ADI Adindan (30th Meridian), Sudan

AFG Afgooye, Somalia

AIN Ain el Abd 1970, Saudi Arabia

AMM M36 Astro 1975 adjustment, Montserrat

ANT DOS Astro A14 1977 adjustment, Antigua

ANU A4 Astro 1956, Anguilla

ARF ARC 1950, Africa

ARS ARC 1960, Africa (1960 adjustment of ARC 1950 datum)

65900012 A-1
Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes ECDIS User Guide

Code Description
ASC Ascension Island 1958

ASM Astro 1958, Montserrat

ASQ Astronomical Station 1952, Marcus Island

ASX Astro Secor 1966, Tarawa and Gilbert Islands

ATB Athens, Greece

ATF Astro Beacon E 1945, IWO-JIMA, Bonin Islands

AUA Australian Geodetic 1966

AUG Australian Geodetic 1984

AUS Australian National

BAT Batavia (Djakarta), Java, Indonesia

BBE Bathurst Base East End Datum, Gambia

BEQ Bermuda 1943, Bermuda Islands

BER Bermuda 1957, Bermuda Islands

BID Bissau Base North West End Pillar, Portugese Guinea

BOO Bogota Observatorio, Colombia

BUR Bukit Rimpah, Bangka Island, Indonesia

CAC Cape Canaveral, USA

CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969, Argentina

CAJ Castello Di Sao Jorge, Lisboa, Portugal (Bessel)

CAO Canton Island Astro 1966

CAP Cape Datum, South Africa

CAZ Camp Area Astro 1961-62, Antarctica

CDF Castania Delle Furie, Sicily

A-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
CGE Carthage, Tunisia

CHI Chatham Island Astro 1971, Chatham Island, New Zealand

CHU Chua Astro, Paraguay

COA Corrego Alegre, Brazil

CRA Cruz Astro 1947, Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands

CZX DOS 66 CZX6, Santa Cruz (DOS 1966-72)

DAK Dakar, Senegal

DCL DCS-3 Astro 1973 adjustment, St Lucia

DJA Djakarta New, Indonesia

DOB DOS Astro Gux1, Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands

DOM M12 Astro 1983 adjustment, Dominica, Lesser Antilles

EAS Easter Island 1967

EGT Egypt 1907

EGY Egypt 1930

ENW Eniwetok-Wake 1960, Marshall Islands

EUR European 1950

EUS European 1979

FAH Fahud, Oman (Also known as PD Oman)

FIN Final 1958, Iran

FJD Fiji 1986

FJI Fiji 1956

FLO Observatorio 1939 (Also known as Flores Astro 1939)

FOT Fort Thomas 1955, St Kitts-Nevis, Lesser Antilles

65900012 A-3
Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes ECDIS User Guide

Code Description
FTO Fort Thomas 1975 Adjustment, St Kitts-Nevis

GAA Gan 1970, Addu Atoll

GCA GCI Astro (IAGS 1959), Grand Cayman

GDA German

GEN Genoa, 1908, Italy

GEO Geodetic Datum 1949, New Zealand

GIZ DOS 1968, Gizo Island, New Georgia

GOE Goenoeng Dempo, Sumatra, Indonesia

GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948

GSE Goenoeng Segara (P5) 1933, Kalimantan E

GTA Grand Turk Astro 1943

GUA Guam 1963

HEL Helsinki, Kallio Church, Finland

HER Hermannskogel, Austria

HITO XVIII Astro, Chile (Also known as Provisional South Chilean
HIT
1963)
HIU HITO XXV

HJO Hjorsey 1955, Iceland

HKD Hong Kong 1963

HKE Hong Kong 1980

HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan, Taiwan

IGB IGN (North Block, Bellevue)

IGN IGN72 Nouvelle Caledonie

A-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
IND Indian (Survey of India)

INF Indian 1954

INH Indian 1975, Thailand

IRL Ireland 1965

IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969, Diego Garcia

ITA Itarare N Base, Itajuba-Santa, Catarina

JEU British Honduras 1922

JOH Johnstone Island 1961

KAN Kandawala 1933, Lanka

KEA Revised Kertau

KEG Kerguelen Island 1949

KUS Kusaie Astro Station 3, 1951, Kusaie Island, Caroline Islands

LAP Le Pouce, Mauritius

LAT Latvia

LCA LC5 Astro 1961, Little Cayman and Cayman Brac

LIB Liberia 1964 (Roberts Field Astro)

LIS Lisboa (Castelo Di Sao Jorge), Portugal (International spheroid)

LUZ Luzon (1911), Philippines

MAS Massoua (Eritrea), Ethiopia

MDD Madrid 1853, Spain

MER Merchich, Morocco

MET Mercury Datum (Satellite Reference System Only)

MID Midway Astro 1961

65900012 A-5
Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes ECDIS User Guide

Code Description
MIN Minna, Nigeria

MOB Monte Mario 1875, Rome (Also known as Rome 1875)

MOD Monte Mario 1940, Rome (Also known as Rome 1940)

MOG Mogadishu, Somalia

MOZ Madzansua (Zumbo), Mozambique

MVS Monavatu 1916, Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands

NAG Revised Nahrwan

NAH Nahrwan, Iraq

NAN Nanking 1960, China

NAP Naparima 1955, Trinidad and Tobago

NAR North American Datum 1983 (NAD83)

NAS North American Datum 1927 (NAD27)

NUM Vanua Levu, Fiji

OEG Old Egyptian, Egypt

OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain 1936

OGC OSGB 1970 (Scientific Network)

OGD OSGB 1980 adjustment (Scientific Network)

OHA Old Hawaiian, Hawaiian Islands

OSI Ordnance survey of Ireland (WOFO Grid)

OSL Oslo Observatory (Old), Norway

OSN Norwegian (New)

PAC Panama Colon, Panama

PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse (Phare D'Ayabelle), Djibouti

A-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967

PLN Pico de la Nieves, Gran Canaria, Canary Islands

POE Port Etienne, Mauritania

POS New Porto Santo

POT Potsdam, Germany

PRI Principe, Sinal Domorro Do Papagaio

PRP Provisional South American 1956 PSAD56

PUR Puerto Rico 1927, Puerto Rico, Greater Antilles

QAT Qatar National

QUO Qomoq, Greenland

REU Reunion

REY Reykjavik, Iceland

SAG Sainte Anne-Island IGN 1951-52, Guadeloupe, Lesser Antilles

SAN South American 1969

SAO Sao Braz, Sao Miguel and Santa Maria, Azores

SAP Sapper Hill 1943, Falkland Islands

SCK Schwarzeck, Namibia

SEG Segura, Borneo

SEI South East Island, Seychelles

SFO San Fernando Observatory, Spain

SGA ISTS 061 Astro 1968, S Georgia

SGM Selvagem Grande 1938, Madeira

SHO Service Hydrographique et Oceanographic de la Marine 1984 (SHOM

65900012 A-7
Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes ECDIS User Guide

Code Description
1984), Martinique

SIL Sierra Leone 1960

SMG GS8 Astro 1953, Grenada, Lesser Antilles

SOA South Asia

SOO Sao Tome

STO Stockholm, Sweden

SWA South West Africa

TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925, Malagasy Rebublic

TEC Tete, Mozambique

TIL Timbalai 1948 (datum point), Sabah (Bessel 1841)

TIV Timbalai 1948 (datum point), Sarawak + Brunei (Everest)

TOK Tokyo, Japan

TOY Tokyo Astronomical Observatory (Old) 1918

VAR Varesmae (System 1937), Estonia

VID HMS Vidal 1967 Astro

VIN Vienna (Hermanskogel)

IGN 1957 (South Block, Tanna), Vanuatu (Also known as Tanna Astro
VLE
1957)
VOA Fort Charlotte, St Vincent

WAK Wake Island Astro 1952

WGC World Geodetic System 1972 (WGS 1972)

WGD World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 1984)

YAC Yacare, Uruguay

A-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix A – Chart Datum Codes

Code Description
YED Astro Yendegaia

XXX OSI & OGB

YYY IRL & OGB. These codes are used where a chart has been compiled
by fitting information on more than one datum directly to the chart
graticule without making adjustments for the shift between the datums.
They indicate that, at the scale of the chart, such differences are not
plottable, and the chart may be regarded as being on either datum.
UND Undetermined Code. UND is used where it cannot be stated with any
degree of certainty that positions read from the chart can be related to
any one horizontal datum. Where it is possible to separately identify
the datums to which different parts of the chart are referred, then the
chart will be subdivided for geographic referencing purposes. In
practice, there are large parts of the world where insufficient data
exists to relate a chart to any specific horizontal datum.

65900012 A-9
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

Appendix B Glossary

A
Activated Target: A symbol representing the automatic or manual
activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional
graphically presented information including: a vector (speed and
course over ground); the heading; and ROT or direction of turn
indication (if available) to display actually initiated course changes.
AFC: Automatic Frequency Control (fine tuning)
AIS: Automatic Identification System. A system capability which enables
ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation
information about other ships at sea, using an automated
transponder.
Antenna: Slotted waveguide array for transmitting and receiving
microwave signals. 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X-
band (4, 6 or 8 ft aperture).
Anti-clutter: Also called Vision. Removal of unwanted reflections on the
radar screen caused by rain, sleet etc. (see Clutter).
ARCS: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A service of British Admiralty,
suppliers of electronic charts with world coverage, in the HCRF
data format.
ARPA: Automatic Radar Plotting Aid – a system wherein radar targets are
automatically acquired and tracked and collision situations
computer assessed and warnings given.
AZ: Acquisition Zone
Azimuth (AZ): The number of degrees from North (or other reference
direction) that a line runs, measured clockwise.

65900012 B-1
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

B
BA: British Admiralty.
Backup Navigator Alarm: The Backup Navigator Alarm is affected by
activating a commissioned PCIO relay output by way of an active
alarm.
BCR: Bow Crossing Range
BCT: Bow Crossing Time
BIST: Built-In Self-Test
BITE: Built in Test Equipment
BSB: BSB Electronic Charts. A supplier of raster-format electronic charts.
Electronic charts based on the paper charts supplied by NOAA or
CHS are available in the data format established by BSB.
Bulkhead Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver mounted below decks with
microwave or co-axial connection to the Turning Unit.

C
Chart Database: Structured collection of chart data sufficient for safe and
efficient navigation on an ECDIS or Chart Radar system.
Chart Format: The industry standard the defines the structure of a chart
database (e.g. the ENC chart database uses the S-57 format)
CMAP: CMap Cartographic Service. Commercial supplier of vector-format
navigational charts, which are not fully compliant with ECDIS
standards as defined by IMO.
CMAP dongle: Used to represent a license for CMAP charts and the
CMAP chart engine.
C UP: Course-up
CCRP: The Consistent Common Reference Point is a location on own ship,
to which all horizontal measurements such as target range,
bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach
(CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA) are referenced.
Typically the CCRP is the conning position of the ship’s bridge.

B-2 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

CD ROM: Compact Disk Read-Only Memory.

Checksum: A numeric value used to verify the integrity of a block of data.
When data is transmitted from point to point in a packet, the
sending computer counts the bytes and adds a check digit at the
end of the packet. The receiving computer calculates the bytes
received and compares the sender's count with the receiver's count
to determine if there is any change that might indicate tampering
with the information.
CHS: Canadian Hydrographic Service
Clutter: Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, commonly from rain,
snow or sleet.
CM93v3: CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format.
COG: Course Over Ground
CID Conning Information Display – a presentation option available
when a node has been configured as a Total Watch.
Course-up (C UP): Stabilised display – the ship’s bearing is shown at the
top of the chart display with the North arrow pointing in the direction
of true north.
CPA: Closest Point of Approach [to own ship]
CRT: Constant Radius Turn
CSE: CourSE [through water]

D
Datum: Any point, line, or surface used as a reference for a measurement
of another quantity.
DC: Digitized Chart. A data format for electronic charts that are made
using a digitizer device with paper navigational charts. On ships
equipped to make digitized charts, these charts can be used for
operating in areas for which electronic charts from official or
commercial sources are not available. Digitized charts do not
conform to any standards for chart display.
DGPS: Differential GPS (see also GPS). Position sensor intended for
precise commercial navigation in coastal waters. The DGPS
employs an additional receiver for the reception of correction

65900012 B-3
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

signals from a land-based transmitter to be applied to the satellite-

based GPS position information.
Display Unit: The Display Monitor, Processing Unit and Controls.
DnV: Det norske Veritas. Independent maritime organization performing
classification, certification, quality-assurance and in-service
inspection of ships and mobile offshore units with the objective of
safeguarding life, property and the environment.
Dongle: A small hardware device that, when plugged into a computer,
enables a specific program to run on that computer. The program
is disabled, or operates in a degraded mode if the device is not
present.
DR: Dead Reckoning – A method of estimating the position of a ship
without astronomical observations, as by applying to a previously
determined position the course and distance traveled since.
DTG: Distance To Go. Distance to next action, such as a turn, while
running a Voyage Plan.

E
EBL: Electronic Bearing Line. An EBL control is used to show the relative
or true bearing of a target on the display. The EBL is moved with
the cursor, and the bearing is read of the screen in degrees. One
end is always anchored, either at the center of the screen or at a
operator-defined point on the display.
ECDIS: Electronic Chart Display and Information System. A standard of the
International Maritime Organization (IMO), governing electronic
navigational systems.
ECS: Electronic Charting System. A chart display system that does not
comply fully with the ECDIS standard as defined by IMO.
Effective Ship Box: The operator specified ship box limited by the chart
window.
ENC: Electronic Nautical Chart. Chart data conforming to specification
published in IHO Special Publication No. 57 (S57). Charts
complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.

B-4 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

ENC (C-MAP): Official S-57 encrypted charts converted to CMAP's

proprietary chart database format.
ERBL: Electronic Range and Bearing Line
ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD: Estimated Time of Departure
Extended Processor: This is a larger processor which houses two Radar
Processors and one Display Processor, and is also referred to as a
Dual Channel Processor.

F
FPD: Flat Panel Display

G
Gain: The ratio of the signal output of a system to the signal input of the
system expressed in dB. A gain of 10 would imply that the signal
power had increased by a factor of 10. There are two general
usages of the term in radar: (a) antenna gain (or gain factor) is the
ratio of the power transmitted along the beam axis to that of an
isotropic radiator transmitting the same total power; and (b)
receiver gain (or video gain) is the amplification given a signal by
the receiver.
GGA: NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data.
GMT: Greenwich Mean Time. The international time standard, based on
local standard time at longitude 0º 0' 0" (in Greenwich, England).
Also called Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
GPS: Global Positioning System. A system by which receivers anywhere
on earth can obtain accurate position data. The term "GPS" is also
used to refer to the receiver device.
Great Circle (GC): A circle drawn around the Earth such that the center of
the circle is at the center of the Earth. Following such a circle plots
the shortest distance between any two points on the surface of the
Earth.
GZ: Guard Zone

65900012 B-5
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

H
H UP: Head-up
HCRF: Hydrographic Chart Raster Format. Electronic format used for BA-
ARCS charts.
HDG: Heading
Head-up (H UP): Unstabilised display – the ship’s heading marker is
always shown vertically upwards indicating straight ahead
movement.
Heading Line: Line that projects forward showing where own ship is
headed relative to the targets seen on the chart display.
Heading Marker: A heading marker on the display provides an
important reference to direction. When the antenna is pointing
ahead, it sends a pulse to the radar display that causes a line to
show on the screen that represents the vessel's head. You can
refer echoes displayed on the screen to your vessel's head and get
the relative bearing of the echo. If the heading marker is not
pointing exactly ahead, relative bearings will be wrong. You can
quickly check for any such mistake by heading toward a small
prominent visible object and see if the radar echo appears under
the heading marker.
HL: Heading Line
HM: Heading Marker
HO: Hydrographic Office. Refers to any national hydrographic office.
HSC: Heading-to-Steer Command. Heading order sent to an autopilot
from an external electronic navigation aid, such as the ECDIS.

I
IHO: International Hydrographic Office. IHO has developed an ENC
product specification as the standard for ECDIS data, and has
published this specification in its Special Publication No. 57 (S-57).
IMO: International Maritime Organisation
Integral Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver housed in the Turning Unit.

B-6 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

Interswitch Unit: Enables radar systems to be connected together so that

any Display Unit may be connected to any Scanner Unit.
I/O Interface: The collection of components that define the hardware,
protocols, and formats used to communicate with an interfaced
device. This will include a set of I/O Ports (in most cases, this will
be a set of one).
I/O Port: A logical channel through which data is transferred, which
may handle protocols needed to pass the data, but functions with
no cognizance of the meaning of the data involved. A common
example is a serial (RS-232) communications port.

K
Km: Kilometre (1000 metres)
Kt: Knot (one nautical mile per hour – 1.15 mph)

L
LAN: Local-Area Network
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
Local Time Offset: Offset between local time and UTC.
Lost Target: A target representing the last valid position of a target before
its data was lost. The target is displayed by a “lost target” symbol.
LP: Long Pulse (available from 3 NM and upwards)

M
m: Metre
Magnetron: Device that is comprised of an electric circuit inside a strong
but variable magnetic field, designed to generate coherent
microwaves.
Master Display: A Master Display has complete control over a
Transceiver. A Transceiver can only have one Master Display. A
Master Display can only have one Transceiver.
MMSI: Maritime Mobile Service Identity

65900012 B-7
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

MOB: Man Overboard

Monitor: The viewing unit (also known as an FPD or a LCD).
MP: Medium Pulse (available in range of 0.5 NM to 24 NM).
Multi-node system: A number of workstations, linked by a LAN, which
have been configured as specific product types.
Multi-target Tote: A display panel showing details of multiple acquired
targets.

N
N UP: North-up
Navline Interface: Interface to Navline Maps facility.
NDI: Nautical Data International. Licensed distributor of CHS charts in
the BSB electronic format.
NIMA: National Imagery and Mapping Agency. An agency of the United
States government, supplying navigational charts to the United
States Navy.
NM: Nautical mile – The nautical mile is closely related to the
geographical mile which is defined as the length of one minute of
arc on the earth's equator. By international agreement, the nautical
mile is now defined as 1852 meters (1.15 standard miles).
NMEA: National Marine Electronics Association. An association of
manufacturers that has published widely used standards for
navigation and other marine sensor communication. Their
published standards include NMEA 0183, Standard for Interfacing
Marine Electronic Navigational Devices, Version 1.5, December
1987, and Version 2.0, January 1992. This standard is commonly
referred to as simply "NMEA 0183." The ECDIS is designed to use
messages from any navigation, weather, or machinery sensor that
conforms to this standard.
NOAA: National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. Agency of the
US government, supplying navigational charts. NOAA charts are
available in the BSB electronic format.

B-8 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

North-up (N UP): Stabilised display – the bearing scale shows 000° at the
top of the chart display (assumed to be True North). The ship’s
heading marker is shown at the appropriate bearing.

P
Parallel Index Lines (PI): A set of parallel lines placed on the chart display
to aid navigation.
Parity: An error-checking procedure in which the number of 1s must
always be the same – either even or odd – for each group of bits
transmitted without error.
Past Position Dots: Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked
or reported target and own ship. The co-ordinates used to display
past positions may be either relative or true.
PCB: Printed Circuit Board
PCIO: PC Input/Output
PM: Performance Monitor
POS: Position
PPI: Plan Position Indicator
PRF: Pulse Repetition Frequency – the number of radar pulses
transmitted each second. The pulse transmission rate is
automatically lengthened for longer ranges.
Product types: A small set of defined products, any one of which the
VisionMaster application can function as. Product types apply to
individual nodes.
PSU: Power Supply Unit

R
RADAR: Radio Detection and Ranging
RAIM: Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory used in computer systems.
RAM is volatile memory, which does not hold data when the power
is turned off.

65900012 B-9
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

Range Rings: A set of concentric circles labelled by distance from the

central point, useful for judging distance (especially from own ship).
Relative Motion – Relative Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on
the display (normally the centre). All target trails are shown relative
to own ship’s movement. This means stationary targets will have
trails if own ship is moving.
Relative Motion – True Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on the
display (usually the centre). Target trails show their direction.
Stationary targets do not produce trails
RF: Radio Frequency
Rhumb Line (RHL): A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same
angle; the path taken by a ship or plane that maintains a constant
compass direction
RM(R): Relative Motion – Relative Trails
RM(T): Relative Motion – True Trails
ROT: Rate of Turn
Route: A set of waypoints that define the intended path of travel.
RR: Range Rings

S
S-band: The S-band, or 10 cm radar short-band, is the part of the
microwave band of the electromagnetic spectrum ranging roughly
from 1.55 to 5.2 GHz.
S57: Internationally accepted standard for electronic charts in the ENC
vector-format. ENC data is standardized according to ECDIS
specifications published in IHO Special Publication No. 57. Charts
complying with this specification are available from various
suppliers.
S57 PIN: Is used to generate a 16-character string which represents the
encrypted hardware ID portion of the S-57 User Permit.
S63 Chart permit file: A file generated by the data manufacturer that is
used, in conjunction with an S63 permit code to decrypt chart data
for a particular set of ARCS charts or S57 cells.

B-10 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

S63 permit code: A code that identifies a license for using S57 charts.
This is sometimes referred to as the S57 User Permit.
SART: Search and Rescue Transponder
Scanner Control Unit: A unit which switches power to the S-band Turning
Unit, under the control of the Display.
Scanner Unit: Comprises the Antenna and Turning Unit.
SCU: Scanner Control Unit
SENC: System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC) means a database
resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and
other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually
accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other
navigational functions, and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper
chart. The SENC may also contain information from other sources.
Sentence: a self contained line of data
SevenCs: chart engine format
Slave Display: Display that is used to observe a radar image. It has limited
functionality.
Sleeping Target: A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation
of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional
information is presented until activated thus avoiding information
overload.
SM: Statute mile – A mile as measured on land, 5,280 feet or 1.6
kilometres. Distances at sea are measured in nautical miles.
SOG: Speed Over the Ground. Actual measured speed of advance of a
vessel over the surface of the earth.
SOLAS: Safety of Life At Sea. A set of conventions adopted by the IMO
and all of its signatory countries in 1974. These conventions
regulate many of the features of ships used in international trade,
including navigation equipment and its functionality.
SP: Short Pulse (available in scale ratio of 1:32 and below)
Sperry security block: A dongle used to identify a VM system (through a
PIN), and identify permits for charts that are licensed on a system-
by-system basis.

65900012 B-11
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

STBD: Starboard
STD: Standard Display. The standard set of chart objects (buoy
information, conspicuous landmarks, etc.) specified for ECDIS
display, in compliance with IMO standards.
STW: Speed Through Water. Ship's speed, as measured relative to the
water.
System PIN: Personal Identification Number that uniquely identifies a
system.

T
T BRG: Target Bearing/True Bearing
Target: Object of interest on a radar display. Targets can be labelled
(acquired) and tracked.
TCPA: Time to Closest Point of Approach [to own ship]
TM: True Motion
TO-Waypoint: The waypoint to which the ship is approaching
TO-Wheel-over: The wheel-over to which the ship is approaching
Trial Manoeuvre: Facility used to assist the operator to perform a
proposed manoeuvre for navigation and collision avoidance
purposes, by displaying the predicted future status of all tracked
and AIS targets as a result of own ship’s simulated manoeuvres.
Trigger PCB: A control board housed in the Transceiver. It controls the
Modulator, Magnetron and sends signals to the Display to indicate
when the magnetron has fired a pulse.
TRP: Temporary Route Plan
True Motion: Own ship moves across the chart display. Stationary targets
do not produce trails.
TTG: Time To Go. Time to next action, such as a turn, while running a
Voyage Plan.
TTMG: Track To Make Good. In the context of the ECDIS, TTMG denotes
a temporary plan which may be activated at any time, and which by
default consists of a 500 nm track line on present heading.

B-12 65900012
ECDIS User Guide Appendix B – Glossary

Turning Unit: Contains the Antenna rotation motor, the microwave rotary
joint, and may contain an integral Transceiver.
TX BIST: Transceiver Built-In Self Test
TX COMMS: Transceiver Communications

U
UTC: Universal Time Coordinated – the international standard of time,
kept by atomic clocks around the world. Formerly known as
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), local time at zero degrees longitude
at the Greenwich Observatory, England. UTC uses a 24-hour
clock.

V
Variable Range Marker (VRM): An adjustable range ring used to measure
the distance to a target. When the VRM is adjusted over the
leading edge of a return with the cursor control, the distance to the
object is shown on the screen.
Vector: Direct connection between two points, either given as two sets of
coordinates (points), by direction and distance from one given set
of coordinates (True Vector), or a point in a vector space defined
by one set of coordinates relative to the origin of a coordinate
system (Relative Vector).
Vigilance Alarm: A system alarm generated when the operator fails to
give evidence of fitness.
Vision: see Anti-clutter

65900012 B-13
Appendix B – Glossary ECDIS User Guide

W
Watch Alarm: The purpose of a watch alarm system is to monitor bridge
activity and detect operator disability which could lead to marine
accidents. The system monitors the awareness of the Officer of the
Watch (OOW) and automatically alerts the Master or another
qualified OOW if for any reason the OOW becomes incapable of
performing the OOW's duties. This purpose is achieved by a series
of indications and alarms to alert first the OOW and, if he is not
responding, then to alert the Master or another qualified OOW.
Additionally, the watch alarm may provide the OOW with a means
of calling for immediate assistance if required. The watch alarm
should be operational whenever the ship's heading or track control
system is engaged, unless inhibited by the Master.
Waypoint: A geographical location (for example, latitude and longitude) on
a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s planned route
(for example, course alteration point, calling in point, etc.).
WGS-84: World Geodetic System 1984. Chart datum specified in
accordance with the IMO ECDIS standard.
Wheel-over: The geographic location, represented by a line where
rudder movement should be activated to accomplish a planned
turn. The wheel-over line may be displayed perpendicular to the
approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn.
Wobbulation: Low frequency modulation of the Pulse Repetition
Frequency (PRF) to help suppress interference.

X
X-band: The X-band (3 cm band) of the microwave band of the
electromagnetic spectrum roughly ranges from 5.2–10.9 GHz. The
relative short wavelength at X-band frequencies makes possible
high-resolution imaging radars for target identification and target
discrimination.
XTE: Cross-Track Error. The distance by which the ship's actual position
deviates left or right from the Voyage Plan track.

B-14 65900012
© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.